RULE NO. 424(b)(5)
REGISTRATION NO. 333-68887

Prospectus Supplement to Prospectus dated February 17, 1999.

$750,000,000
[LOGO OF LEVEL 3 Level 3 Communications, Inc.
COMMUNICATIONS, 6% Convertible Subordinated Notes due 2009
INC.]
----------------
You may convert the notes into shares of common stock of Level 3
Communications, Inc. at any time prior to maturity, unless Level 3 has caused
the conversion rights to expire. The notes will mature on September 15, 2009.
The conversion rate is 15.3401 shares per each $1,000 principal amount of
notes, subject to adjustment in certain circumstances. This is equivalent to a
conversion price of approximately $65.19 per share. On September 14, 1999, the
last reported sale price for the common stock on the Nasdaq National Market
was $53.88 per share. The common stock is listed under the symbol "LVLT."

Level 3 will pay interest on the notes on March 15 and September 15 of each
year. The first such payment will be made on March 15, 2000. The notes are
subordinated in right of payment to all senior debt of Level 3 and effectively
subordinated in right of payment to all debt and other liabilities of Level
3's subsidiaries. The notes will be issued only in denominations of $1,000 and
integral multiples of $1,000.

On or after September 15, 2002, Level 3 may cause the conversion rights of
holders to expire under certain circumstances set forth under "Description of
Notes--Expiration of Conversion Rights" in this prospectus supplement. You
have the option, subject to certain conditions, to require Level 3 to
repurchase any note held by you in the event of a change of control, as
described in this prospectus supplement, at a price equal to 100% of its
principal amount plus accrued interest to the date of repurchase. Level 3 will
pay the repurchase price in cash or, at its option but subject to the
satisfaction of certain conditions, in shares of common stock.

See "Risk Factors" beginning on page S-11 of this prospectus supplement to
read about important factors you should consider before purchasing the notes.

----------------

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any other regulatory
body has approved or disapproved of these securities or passed upon the
accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is
a criminal offense.

----------------

Per note Total
-------- ------------

Initial public offering price............................. 100.000% $750,000,000
Underwriting discount..................................... 2.875% $ 21,562,500
Proceeds, before expenses, to Level 3..................... 97.125% $728,437,500

The initial public offering price set forth above does not include accrued
interest, if any. Interest on the notes will accrue from September 20, 1999
and must be paid by the purchaser if the notes are delivered after September
20, 1999.

To the extent that the underwriters sell more than $750,000,000 principal
amount of notes, the underwriters have the option to purchase up to an
additional $112,500,000 principal amount of notes from Level 3 at the initial
public offering price less the underwriting discount.

----------------
The underwriters expect to deliver the notes in book-entry form only
through the facilities of The Depository Trust Company against payment in New
York, New York on September 20, 1999.

Goldman, Sachs & Co. Salomon Smith Barney

----------------
Chase Securities Inc.
Credit Suisse First Boston
J.P. Morgan & Co.
Morgan Stanley Dean Witter

----------------

Prospectus Supplement dated September 14, 1999.

[ARTWORK APPEARING ON INSIDE FRONT COVER OF PROSPECTUS SUPPLEMENT]

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS
- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------
OUR PROGRESS OUR SERVICES
- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------

- - Operational Gateway facilities - Private Line and Special Access
in 21 U.S. cities and in
London, Paris, Amsterdam and - Colocation
Frankfurt
- Internet Access
- - Launched initial services to
customers over national - Managed Modem
leased network
- Voice and Fax*
- - Completed initial local fiber
loops in 14 U.S. cities and - Special Services
London

- - Secured 100% of rights-of-way
needed for North American
intercity network

- - Completed construction of
approximately 3,375 miles of
North American intercity network
using 10 to 12 conduits

- - Secured 2.7 million square feet of
space for Gateway facilities * Currently in commercial testing.
- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------

[LOGO OF LEVEL 3]

- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------
OUR NETWORK* OUR STRATEGY
- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------

- - An intercity network covering - Become the low cost provider of
nearly 16,000 miles in North communications services
America
- Combine latest generations of
- - Leased or owned local networks fiber and electronics
in 56 North American markets
- Offer comprehensive range of
- - An intercity network covering communications services
approximately 4,750 miles across
Europe - Provide seamless interconnection
to PSTN
- - Leased or owned local networks
in 23 European and Pacific Rim - Accelerate market roll-out
markets
- Expand target market opportunities
- - Transoceanic capacity including
a 1.28 Tbps transatlantic cable - Develop advanced business support
system systems

- Leverage existing information
services capabilities

- Attract and motivate high quality
* At completion. employees
- ------------------------------------- ------------------------------------

[ARTWORK APPEARING ON INSIDE FRONT COVER OF PROSPECTUS SUPPLEMENT]

LEVEL 3 GATEWAYS

We created the term Gateway site to describe the major communications hubs of
Level 3's network. Our Gateway facilities are designed to house local sales
staff, operational staff, transmission and IP routing/switching facilities and
space designed to accommodate colocation of equipment by Level 3 customers. Each
of our Gateway facilities is served by redundant, fault tolerant connections to
our network.

REPRESENTATIVE GATEWAY SITES IN SERVICE

Los Angeles
Modem equipment is used for our [PICTURE OF TECHNICAL SPACE IN
Managed Modem service. This LOS ANGELES GATEWAY FACILITY]
equipment will also be used for
voice service.

London
Level 3's facilities have been [PICTURE OF COLOCATION SPACE IN
designed to anticipate and embrace LONDON GATEWAY FACILITY]
the rapid pace of technological
advances. We have constructed our
Gateway facilities to be more
readily upgradeable and capable of
evolving as technology changes and
to meet customer demand.

Denver
Level 3 Gateways provide climate- [PICTURE OF BACKUP POWER AND BATTERY
controlled environments and managed SPACE IN DENVER GATEWAY FACILITY]
power with UPS battery and generator
backup.

[ARTWORK APPEARING ON INSIDE FRONT COVER OF PROSPECTUS SUPPLEMENT]

- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GATEWAY SITES IN SERVICE IN 1999
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

United States Europe
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------

Atlanta Dallas Long Island* Orlando* Seattle Amsterdam

Baltimore* Denver Los Angeles Philadelphia Stamford Brussels*

Boston Detroit Miami* San Diego St. Louis Frankfurt

Chicago Houston Newark* San Francisco Tampa* London

Cincinnati Jersey City New York City San Jose Washington, D.C. Paris
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*Not in service; final city selection subject to change

[PICTURE OF TECHNICAL SPACE IN CHICAGO GATEWAY FACILITY]

Chicago

Level 3 Gateway facilities house
sophisticated optical and electronic
equipment, bringing together all of
Level 3's technology.

[DIAGRAM OF LAYOUT
OF TYPICAL
GATEWAY FACILITY
(NOT TO SCALE.)]

[PICTURE OF TECHNICAL SPACE IN WASHINGTON, D.C.
GATEWAY FACILITY]

Washington, D.C.

Network surveillance equipment in our
Gateways is used by our Network
Operations Center in Denver to monitor
the network 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

[PICTURE OF COLOCATION SPACE IN NEW YORK
GATEWAY FACILITY]

New York

Level 3's Colocation facilities are among
the largest and most modern in the
industry, housing a state-of-the-art
network of telephone and web hosting
equipment. Colocation services from
Level 3 provide customers a quick,
cost-efficient way to launch their services.

PROSPECTUS SUPPLEMENT SUMMARY

This summary contains a general summary of the information contained in this
prospectus supplement. It may not include all the information that is important
to you. You should read the entire prospectus supplement, our prospectus dated
February 17, 1999, and the documents incorporated by reference before making an
investment decision.

Level 3 Communications, Inc. was known as "Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc." prior
to the March 31, 1998 split-off of its construction and mining management
business from its other businesses. See "Business--History." See "Risk Factors"
for factors that you should consider before investing in the notes and
"Information Regarding Forward-Looking Statements" for information relating to
statements contained in this prospectus supplement that are not historical
facts. Capitalized terms used but not defined in this prospectus supplement
have the meaning given to them in "Glossary of Terms."

Level 3

We engage in the communications, information services and coal mining
businesses through ownership of operating subsidiaries and substantial equity
positions in public companies. In late 1997, we announced a business plan to
increase substantially our communications and information services business and
to expand the range of services we offer. This plan is referred to in this
prospectus supplement as the "Business Plan." We are implementing the Business
Plan by building an advanced, international, facilities based communications
network based on Internet Protocol technology.

As our Business Plan is implemented, our network will combine both local and
long distance networks and connect customers end-to-end across the U.S. and in
Europe and the Pacific Rim. Over the next two to three years, our network is
expected to encompass:

.an intercity network covering nearly 16,000 miles in North America;

.leased or owned local networks in 56 North American markets;

.an intercity network covering approximately 4,750 miles across Europe;

.leased or owned local networks in 23 European and Pacific Rim markets; and

.transoceanic capacity, including a 1.28 Tbps transatlantic cable system.

We expect to complete the North American intercity portion of the network
during the first quarter of 2001. In the interim, we have leased a national
network over which we began to offer services in the third quarter of 1998.

As of August 1, 1999, we had secured 100% of the rights-of-way required for
our planned North American intercity network, had completed construction of
3,375 route miles of this network and had approximately an additional 7,000
route miles under construction. As of August 1, 1999, we had local network
development underway in 22 U.S. cities. The number of U.S. cities with
operational facilities based local metropolitan networks totals 14. We have
secured approximately 2.7 million square feet of space for our gateway
facilities which vary in size and the nature of services currently offered. Our
gateway facilities are operational in 21 U.S. cities and in London, Paris,
Amsterdam and Frankfurt. We have entered into transoceanic capacity agreements
and have announced the development and construction of a 1.28 Tbps
transatlantic cable system.

We believe that, as technology advances, a comprehensive range of both
consumer and business communications services will be provided over networks,
such as ours, utilizing Internet

S-2

Protocol technology. These services will include traditional voice services and
fax transmission, as well as other data services such as Internet access. We
believe this shift has begun, and over time should accelerate, since Internet
Protocol networks offer:

. more efficient use of network capacity than the traditional public
switched telephone networks;

. an open protocol which allows for market driven development of new uses
and applications;

. the prospect of technological advances that will address problems
currently associated with Internet Protocol based applications that use
the public Internet; and

. an open architecture that enables new competition among suppliers and
ultimately leads to lower network costs.

Level 3's Strategy

Key elements of our strategy include:

. Become the Low Cost Provider of Communications Services. Our network is
designed to provide high quality communications services at a lower cost
by taking advantage of efficiencies in new technologies such as packet-
switching, using open, non-proprietary interfaces in the network design
and by having an upgradable network that can more readily incorporate
future technological improvements.

. Combine Latest Generations of Fiber and Electronics. In order to achieve
unit cost reductions for transmission capacity, we have designed our
network with multiple conduits to deploy successive generations of fiber
to exploit improvements in transmission electronics. Optimizing
transmission electronics to exploit specific generations of fiber optic
technology currently provides transmission capacity on the new fiber
more cost effectively than deploying new electronics on previous
generations of fiber.

. Offer a Comprehensive Range of Communications Services. We provide a
comprehensive range of communications services over our network,
including private line, colocation, Internet access and managed modem.
We are currently commercially testing voice and fax transmission
services. We are also offering dark fiber along our local and intercity
networks on a long term lease basis.

. Provide Seamless Interconnection to the Public Switched Telephone
Network. We and other technology providers have developed, and we are
currently commercially testing, technology to allow seamless
interconnection of Internet Protocol networks with the public switched
telephone network for long distance voice and fax transmissions. We and
others are developing similar technology for local voice and fax
transmission services. A seamless interconnection will allow customers
to use our Internet Protocol based services without modifying existing
telephone and fax equipment or existing dialing procedures (that is,
without the need to dial access codes or follow other similar special
procedures). Our managed modem service currently uses softswitch
technology to seamlessly interconnect to the public switched telephone
network.

. Accelerate Market Roll-out. To support the launch of our services and
develop a customer base in advance of completing our network build, we
have begun offering services in 21 U.S. cities and in London, Paris,
Amsterdam and Frankfurt over a combination of leased local and intercity
facilities. Over time, these leased networks will be displaced by
networks that we are constructing.

. Expand Target Market Opportunities. To increase revenue-producing
traffic on our network more rapidly, we are using a direct sales force
focused on communications intensive and web centric businesses. These
businesses include ISPs, application service providers, content
providers, systems integrators, next generation carriers, web-hosting
companies, streaming media companies and Internet Protocol based storage
providers. Providing continually declining bandwidth costs to these
companies is at the core of our market enabling strategy.

S-3

. Develop Advanced Business Support Systems. We are developing a
substantial, scalable and web-enabled business support system
infrastructure specifically designed to enable us to offer services
efficiently to targeted customers. We believe that this system will
reduce our operating costs, give our customers direct control over some
of the services they buy from us and allow us to grow rapidly without
redesigning the architecture of the business support system.

. Leverage Existing Information Services Capabilities. We are expanding
our existing capabilities in computer network systems integration,
consulting, outsourcing and software reengineering, with particular
emphasis on the conversion of legacy software systems to systems that
are compatible with Internet Protocol networks and web browser access.

. Attract and Motivate High Quality Employees. We have developed programs
designed to attract and retain employees with the technical skills
necessary to implement the Business Plan. The programs include our
Shareworks stock purchase plan and our Outperform Stock Option program.

Competitive Advantages

We believe that we have the following competitive advantages that, together
with our strategy, will assist us in implementing the Business Plan:

. Experienced Management Team. We have assembled a management team that we
believe is well suited to implement the Business Plan. Most of our
senior management has been involved in leading the development and
marketing of telecommunications products and in designing, constructing
and managing intercity, metropolitan and international networks.

. A More Readily Upgradable Network Infrastructure. Our network design
strategy takes advantage of recent innovations, incorporating many
features that are not present in older communications networks, and
provides us flexibility to take advantage of future developments and
innovations. We have designed the transmission network to optimize all
aspects of fiber and electronics simultaneously as a system to deliver
the lowest unit cost to our customers. As fiber and transmission
electronic technology changes, we expect to realize new unit cost
improvements by deploying the latest fiber and transmission electronics
technology in available empty or spare conduit in our multiple conduit
network. We believe that the spare conduit design of our network will
enable us to effect this deployment more quickly and at lower cost than
other carriers.

. Integrated End-to-End Network Platform. We believe that the integration
of our local and intercity networks will expand the scope and reach of
our on-net customer coverage and facilitate the uniform deployment of
technological innovations as we manage our future upgrade paths.

. Systems Integration Capabilities. We believe that our ability to offer
computer outsourcing and systems integration services, particularly
services relating to allowing a customer's legacy systems to be accessed
with web browsers, will provide additional opportunities for selling our
products and services.

Our principal executive offices are located at 1025 Eldorado Boulevard,
Broomfield, Colorado 80021 and our telephone number is (720) 888-1000.

S-4

The Offering

Securities offered.............. $750,000,000 aggregate principal amount of 6%
convertible subordinated notes due 2009, plus
an additional $112,500,000 aggregate
principal amount of notes subject to the
underwriters' over-allotment option.

Offering price.................. 100% of the principal amount plus accrued
interest, if any, from September 20, 1999.

Interest........................ Interest on the notes is payable semiannually
on March 15 and September 15 of each year,
beginning on March 15, 2000.

Conversion...................... You may convert your notes into shares of
common stock at a rate of 15.3401 shares of
common stock per $1,000 principal amount of
notes, which is equal to a conversion price
of approximately $65.19 per share, subject to
adjustment in certain events.

You may convert notes at any time after their
initial issuance and before the close of
business on the business day immediately
before their maturity date, at the conversion
rate set forth above, unless previously
repurchased or unless we have caused the
conversion rights to expire. If your notes
are subject to repurchase, you will be
entitled to convert the notes up to and
including, but not after, the business day
immediately before the date fixed for
repurchase. If we have caused the conversion
rights to expire, you will be entitled to
convert the notes up to and including, but
not after, the conversion expiration date.

See "Description of Notes--Conversion
Rights."

Subordination................... The notes are subordinated to present and
future senior debt of Level 3. As of June 30,
1999, the aggregate amount of our outstanding
senior debt was approximately $2.531 billion.
Assuming that on June 30, 1999 we had entered
into our proposed secured credit facility and
our subsidiaries had borrowed $475 million
under that credit facility, we would have had
approximately $3.006 billion of outstanding
senior debt, including $475 million of our
subsidiaries' debt guaranteed by us, and our
subsidiaries would have had $900 million in
additional borrowings available under that
credit facility guaranteed by us on a senior
basis.

In addition, the notes are also effectively
subordinated in right of payment to all
indebtedness and other liabilities of our
subsidiaries. As of June 30, 1999, the
aggregate amount of our subsidiaries'
outstanding balance sheet

S-5

liabilities, excluding intercompany
liabilities, was approximately $1.037
billion. Assuming that on June 30, 1999 we
had entered into our proposed secured credit
facility and our subsidiaries had borrowed
$475 million under our proposed secured
credit facility, our subsidiaries would have
had approximately $1.512 billion of
outstanding balance sheet liabilities and
$900 million in additional borrowings
available under that credit facility. The
notes indenture does not restrict our ability
or our subsidiaries' ability to incur
additional debt.

See "Description of Notes--Subordination."

Expiration of conversion
rights.......................... On or after September 15, 2002, we may, at
our option, cause the conversion rights to
expire. We may exercise this option only if
for at least 20 trading days within any
period of 30 consecutive trading days,
including the last trading day of that
period, the current market price of common
stock exceeded 140% of the conversion price,
subject to adjustment in certain
circumstances. In order to exercise our
option to cause the conversion rights to
expire, we must issue a press release and
provide notice to you as provided in the
notes indenture. See "Description of Notes--
Expiration of Conversion Rights."

Repurchase at option of
holdersupon a change of
control......................... Upon a change of control, you will have the
right, subject to certain conditions and
restrictions, to require us to repurchase all
or a portion of your notes at 100% of the
principal amount thereof, plus accrued
interest to the repurchase date. We will pay
the repurchase price in cash or, at our
option but subject to the satisfaction of
certain conditions, in shares of common
stock, valued at 95% of the average closing
sales prices of the common stock for the five
trading days before and including the third
trading day before the repurchase date.
However, the subordination provisions would
likely restrict our ability to repurchase the
notes prior to the repayment in full of all
amounts outstanding under our senior debt,
including both series of our senior notes and
the proposed secured credit facility. See
"Description of Notes--Repurchase at Option
of Holders Upon a Change of Control."

Global note; Book-entry
system.......................... The notes will be issued only in fully
registered form without coupons and in
minimum denominations of $1,000. The notes
will be evidenced by a global note, in fully
registered form and without coupons,
deposited with the trustee for the notes, as
custodian for DTC. Beneficial interests in
the global note will be shown on,

S-6

and transfers will be effected only through,
records maintained by DTC and its
participants and indirect participants. See
"Description of Notes--Form, Denomination,
Transfer, Exchange and Book-Entry
Procedures."

Nasdaq National Market symbol
for our common stock............ LVLT

Absence of a public market for
the notes....................... The notes will not be listed on any
securities exchange or quoted on the Nasdaq
National Market. The underwriters have
advised us that they intend to make a market
in the notes. The underwriters are not
obligated, however, to make a market in the
notes, and any market making may be
discontinued at any time at their sole
discretion without notice. See
"Underwriting."

Use of proceeds................. We will use the net proceeds for working
capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions
and other general corporate purposes in
connection with the implementation of our
Business Plan. See "Use of Proceeds."

Proposed Secured Credit Facility

Certain of our subsidiaries propose to enter into a $1.375 billion secured
credit facility that has been underwritten by a syndicate of banks and other
financial institutions. Level 3's guarantee of that debt will constitute senior
debt. Neither the closing of the proposed secured credit facility nor the
closing of this offering of notes is conditioned upon the closing of the other
transaction. See "Description of Other Indebtedness of Level 3--Proposed
Secured Credit Facility."

Risk Factors

See "Risk Factors" beginning on page S-11 of this prospectus supplement to
read about important factors you should consider before purchasing the notes.

S-7

Summary Financial Data

The summary financial data presented below as of and for the fiscal years
ended the last Saturday in December of 1994, 1995, 1996 and 1997 and December
31, 1998 have been derived from Level 3's audited consolidated financial
statements and the notes related to those financial statements. The summary
financial data presented below for the six month periods ended June 30, 1998
and 1999 and as of June 30, 1999 have been derived from Level 3's unaudited
consolidated condensed financial statements. In the opinion of management, the
unaudited financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the
audited financial statements and include all adjustments, consisting of normal
recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of the financial
position and results of operations as of such dates and for such periods. The
following information should be read in conjunction with Level 3's audited
consolidated financial statements and the notes related to those financial
statements and Level 3's unaudited consolidated condensed financial statements
and the notes related to those financial statements, all of which are included
in this prospectus supplement. Since the Business Plan represents a significant
expansion of Level 3's communications and information services business, Level
3 does not believe that the following information serves as a meaningful
indicator of Level 3's future financial condition or results of operations.
Level 3 expects to incur substantial net operating losses for the foreseeable
future, and Level 3 may not be able to achieve or sustain operating
profitability in the future.

Six Months Ended
June 30, Fiscal Year Ended (1)
------------------- -----------------------------------
1999 1998 1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
( in millions)

Results of Operations:
Revenue............... $ 208 $ 190 $ 392 $ 332 $ 652 $ 580 $ 537
Income (loss) from
continuing
operations(2)........ (149) (40) (128) 83 104 126 28
Net earnings
(loss)(3)............ (149) 892 804 248 221 244 110
Financial Position:
Total assets.......... 7,350 5,525 2,779 3,066 2,945 4,048
Current portion of
long-term debt....... 6 5 3 57 40 30
Long-term debt, less
current portion(4)... 2,667 2,641 137 320 361 899
Stockholders'
equity(5)............ 3,609 2,165 2,230 1,819 1,607 1,736

- --------
(1) In October 1993, Level 3 acquired 35% of the outstanding shares of C-TEC
Corporation, which shares entitled Level 3 to 57% of the available voting
rights of C-TEC Corporation. C-TEC Corporation is sometimes referred to in
this prospectus supplement as "C-TEC." At December 28, 1996, Level 3 owned
48% of the outstanding shares and 62% of the voting rights of C-TEC.

As a result of the restructuring of C-TEC in 1997, Level 3 owned less than
50% of the outstanding shares and voting rights of each of the three
entities into which C-TEC was divided, and therefore accounted for each
entity using the equity method beginning in 1997. Level 3 consolidated C-TEC
in its financial statements from 1994 to 1996.

The financial position and results of operations of the construction and
mining management businesses of Level 3 have been classified as discontinued
operations due to the March 31, 1998 split-off of Level 3's construction and
mining management businesses from its other businesses. Level 3's
construction and mining management businesses are referred to in this
prospectus supplement as the "Construction Group."

S-8

In 1995, Level 3 dividended its investment in its former subsidiary, MFS
Communications Company, Inc. to the holders of the Class D Stock. MFS
Communications Company, Inc. is sometimes referred to in this prospectus
supplement as "MFS." MFS' results of operations have been classified as a
single line item on the statements of earnings for 1994 and 1995. MFS was
consolidated in the 1994 balance sheet of Level 3. In 1994, MFS received
net proceeds of approximately $500 million from the sale of 9 3/8% Senior
Discount Notes.

Level 3 sold its energy segment to MidAmerican Energy Holdings Company
(formerly known as CalEnergy Company, Inc.) in 1998 and classified it as
discontinued operations within the financial statements. MidAmerican Energy
Holdings Company is sometimes referred to in this prospectus supplement as
"MidAmerican."

(2) Level 3 incurred significant expenses in conjunction with the expansion
of its communications and information services businesses in 1998 and 1999.

During 1999, RCN Corporation, sometimes referred to in this prospectus
supplement as "RCN," issued stock in a public offering and for certain
transactions that diluted Level 3's ownership of RCN from 41% at December 31,
1998 to 35% at June 30, 1999. The increase in Level 3's proportionate share of
RCN's net assets as a result of these transactions resulted in a pre-tax gain
of $111 million for Level 3 in the second quarter of 1999. Level 3 also
recognized a gain of $21 million in the second quarter of 1998 related to
stock transactions of RCN. Level 3 recognized gains of $62 million in 1998 for
RCN stock activity and $3 million and $59 million in 1995 and 1994,
respectively, for MFS stock activity.

In 1998, Level 3 acquired XCOM Technologies, Inc. and its developing
telephone-to-Internet Protocol network bridge technology. XCOM Technologies,
Inc. is sometimes referred to in this prospectus supplement as "XCOM." Level 3
originally recorded a $115 million nondeductible charge against earnings for
the write-off of in-process research and development acquired in the
transaction.

In October 1998, the SEC issued new guidelines for valuing acquired research
and development which were applied retroactively. Consequently, Level 3
reduced the charge by $85 million in 1998, which also increases goodwill by
the corresponding amount. The goodwill associated with the XCOM transaction is
being amortized over a five-year period.

Level 3 believes that its resulting charge for research and development
conforms to the SEC's expressed guidelines and methodologies. However, the SEC
may require additional adjustments.

In 1998, Cable Michigan, Inc. was acquired by Avalon Cable of Michigan, Inc.
Level 3 received approximately $129 million for its shares of Cable Michigan,
Inc. in the acquisition and recognized a pre-tax gain of approximately $90
million in the fourth quarter of 1998.

(3) In 1998, Level 3 recognized a gain of $608 million equal to the
difference between the carrying value of the Construction Group and its fair
value. No taxes were provided on this gain due to the tax-free nature of the
split-off.

Level 3 also recognized in 1998 an after-tax gain of $324 million on the
sale of its energy segment to MidAmerican.

(4) In 1998, Level 3 issued $2 billion of 9 1/8% senior notes due 2008 and
$834 million principal amount at maturity of 10 1/2% senior discount notes due
2008. The issue price of the 10 1/2% senior discount notes was approximately
60% of the principal amount at maturity.

(5) In March 1999, Level 3 received approximately $1.5 billion of net proceeds
from the sale of 28.75 million shares of its common stock.

S-9

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges

Our ratio of earnings to fixed charges for each of the periods indicated was
as follows:

Six Months Ended
June 30, Fiscal Year Ended
---------------- -------------------------------------------------------

1999 1998 1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
-- 1.40 -- 5.73 3.87 -- --

For this ratio, earnings consist of earnings (loss) before income taxes,
minority interest and discontinued operations plus fixed charges excluding
capitalized interest. Fixed charges consist of interest expensed and
capitalized, plus the portion of rent expense under operating leases deemed by
us to be representative of the interest factor, plus, prior to September 30,
1995, preferred stock dividends on preferred stock of our former subsidiary,
MFS. We had deficiencies of earnings to fixed charges of $201 million for the
six months ended June 30, 1999, $36 million for the fiscal year ended 1998, $32
million for the fiscal year ended 1995 and $42 million for the fiscal year
ended 1994.

S-10

RISK FACTORS

Before you invest in the notes, you should carefully consider the following
risks.

We are dependent on our new Business Plan that relies on Internet Protocol
technology

The current status of our Business Plan makes evaluation of its risks and
rewards extremely difficult and speculative. The Business Plan depends upon a
shift in providing communications services over Internet Protocol based
networks instead of the traditional public-switched networks. Our strategy
assumes that the technology that we and others have developed solves the
problems currently associated with Internet Protocol based applications and
will scale for full deployment, and that others will continue to develop new
uses and applications for Internet Protocol based networks. The success of our
Business Plan depends on other assumptions as well, such as our ability to use
open, non-proprietary interfaces in our network software and hardware that
allow us to buy equipment in the future from multiple vendors. Finally, we must
generate substantial traffic volume at acceptable prices on our network in
order to realize the anticipated operating efficiencies and cost benefits of
the network.

Substantial operating losses are expected for the foreseeable future

The development of our Business Plan requires significant capital
expenditures. We expect to incur a large portion of these capital expenditures
before we receive any significant related revenues from our Business Plan.
Because of these capital expenditures and the related early operating expenses,
we expect substantial negative operating cash flow and net losses for the
foreseeable future. For 1998, we incurred a loss from continuing operations of
$128 million and for the six months ended June 30, 1999, we incurred a loss
from continuing operations of $149 million. We expect our operating losses for
the foreseeable future to be substantially higher. We may never establish a
significant customer base for our communications and information services
business, and even if we do, we may continue to sustain substantial negative
operating cash flow and net losses as a result of low prices or higher costs.

Since our Business Plan is a significant expansion of our communications and
information services business, we believe that our historical financial results
will not provide investors with a meaningful indicator of our future financial
condition or results of operations.

A failure to finance our substantial capital requirements could adversely
affect our Business Plan

The implementation of our Business Plan and our ability to meet our
projected growth depends on our ability to secure substantial additional
financing. We estimate that the implementation of our Business Plan, as
currently contemplated, requires between $9 and $11 billion over the 10-year
period of the plan. However, the amount of additional financing we need could
be higher than we currently estimate. The implementation of our Business Plan
and our future financial results could be adversely affected if we are
unsuccessful in obtaining required financing through:

. raising debt or equity capital at the times we need on terms that we
consider acceptable;

. generating cash flow from our operations; and

. offering others fiber optic capacity on our network or access to our
conduits.

If we fail to obtain the required financing, we may be required to delay or
abandon some of our future expansion or spending plans. Our existing level of
debt and its terms may limit our ability to raise additional capital and
otherwise restrict our activities. In addition, if our operations do not
produce positive cash flow in sufficient amounts to pay our financing
obligations, our future financial results and our ability to implement our
Business Plan will be materially and adversely affected.

S-11

Difficulties in constructing our network could increase its estimated costs and
delay its scheduled completion

The construction, operation and any upgrading of our network is a
significant undertaking. Administrative, technical, operational and other
problems that could arise may be more difficult to address and solve due to the
significant size and complexity of the planned network. We are also dependent
on timely performance by third-party suppliers and contractors. In addition,
important aspects of our network, such as voice and fax capability, will rely
on technology that is in the development stage or that is largely commercially
unproven. This new technology also may not be compatible with existing
technology. Many of these factors and problems are beyond our control. As a
result, the entire network may not be completed as planned for the cost and in
the time frame that we currently estimate. We may be materially adversely
affected as a result of any significant increase in the estimated cost of the
network or any significant delay in its anticipated completion.

After its initial completion, future expansions and adaptations of our
network's electronic and software components may be necessary in order to
respond to:

. a growing number of customers;

. increased demands by our customers to transmit larger amounts of data;

. changes in our customers' service requirements; and

. technological advances by our competitors.

Any expansion or adaptation of our network will require substantial
additional financial, operational and managerial resources. If we are unable to
expand or adapt our network to respond to these developments on a timely basis
and at a commercially reasonable cost, then our business will be materially
adversely affected.

A failure to commercially deploy satisfactory voice or fax technology for
Internet Protocol networks could adversely affect our business

We and others have developed technology that we believe will avoid the need
for customers on a private Internet Protocol based network to dial access codes
or follow other special procedures to initiate a voice or fax call. This
technology has not been commercially deployed yet, and problems with it may be
discovered as it is further tested and deployed. For example, it may not be
scalable for our network. Our efforts to commercially deploy this technology in
a timely manner and at an acceptable cost may not be successful, and such a
failure could have a material adverse effect on us. To date, Internet Protocol
voice telephony using the public Internet has also had significant problems
with quality, latency, reliability and security. Until we begin commercially
deploying our voice or fax telephony services, we cannot predict whether our
plans for solving these problems will work.

The commercial deployment of our voice and fax telephony services also
requires that we develop related business support systems. Our failure to
develop these business support systems could have an adverse effect on the
timing of the commercial launch of these services.

Our Business Plan requires the development of effective business support
systems to implement customer orders and to provide and bill for services

Our Business Plan depends on our ability to develop effective business
support systems. This is a complicated undertaking requiring significant
resources and expertise and support from third-party vendors. Business support
systems are needed for:

. implementing customer orders for services;

. provisioning, installing and delivering these services; and

. monthly billing for these services.

S-12

Since our Business Plan provides for rapid growth in the number and volume
of products and services we offer, we need to develop these business support
systems on a schedule sufficient to meet our proposed service rollout dates. In
addition, we will require these business support systems to expand and adapt
with our rapid growth. The failure to develop effective business support
systems could have a material adverse effect on our ability to implement our
Business Plan.

We may be unable to hire and retain sufficient qualified personnel; the loss of
any of our key executive officers could adversely affect us

We believe that our future success will depend in large part on our ability
to attract and retain highly skilled, knowledgeable, sophisticated and
qualified managerial, professional and technical personnel. To implement our
Business Plan, we need to have a substantial number of additional employees. We
have experienced significant competition in attracting and retaining personnel
who possess the skills that we are seeking. As a result of this significant
competition, we may experience a shortage of qualified personnel. Our
businesses are managed by a small number of key executive officers,
particularly James Q. Crowe, Chief Executive Officer, R. Douglas Bradbury,
Chief Financial Officer, and Kevin J. O'Hara, Chief Operating Officer. The loss
of any of these key executive officers could have a material adverse effect on
us.

Inability to manage effectively our planned rapid expansion could adversely
affect our operations

Our Business Plan contemplates rapid expansion of our business for the
foreseeable future. This growth will increase our operating complexity and
require that we, among other things, rapidly:

. expand our employee base with highly skilled personnel;

. develop, introduce and market new products and services;

. integrate any acquired operations and joint ventures;

. develop financial and management controls and systems; and

. control expenses related to our Business Plan.

The significant size and complexity of our planned network and planned rate
of expansion will make it more difficult to satisfy these requirements. Our
failure to satisfy any of these requirements, or otherwise manage our growth
effectively, could have a material adverse effect on us.

If we were to make strategic investments, acquisitions or joint ventures,
our resources and management time could be diverted and we may be unable to
integrate them successfully with our existing network and services.

Burdensome peering and transit arrangements result in higher costs

Peering agreements with Internet service providers allow us to access the
Internet and exchange transit for free with these providers. Recently, many
Internet service providers that previously offered peering have reduced or
eliminated peering relationships or are establishing new, more restrictive
criteria for peering. The costs of transit payments could have a material
adverse effect on our margins for our products that require Internet access.
Currently we pay transit payments with respect to a portion of our Internet
traffic to two of the largest Internet access providers.

We must obtain and maintain permits and rights-of-way to develop our network

Although we have secured 100% of the rights-of-way required for our planned
North American intercity network, the operation of our network requires that we
obtain many local franchises and other permits. We also must obtain rights to
use underground conduit and aerial pole space and

S-13

other rights-of-way and fiber capacity. The process of obtaining these
franchises, permits and rights is time consuming and burdensome. If we are
unable, on acceptable terms and on a timely basis, to obtain and maintain the
franchises, permits and rights needed to implement our Business Plan, the
buildout of our network could be materially adversely affected. In addition,
the cancellation or non-renewal of the franchises, permits or rights we do
obtain could materially adversely affect us.

Termination of relationships with key suppliers could cause delay and costs

Until we complete the company-owned portion of our network, we will lease
substantially all of our intercity communications capacity in North America,
Europe and possibly elsewhere. As a result, we will be dependent on the
providers of this capacity. In addition, we intend to lease a significant
amount of capacity from local exchange carriers to connect our customers to our
gateway sites. We are also dependent on third-party suppliers for substantial
amounts of fiber, conduit, computers, software, switches/routers and related
components that we will assemble and integrate into our network. If any of
these relationships is terminated or a supplier fails to provide reliable
services or equipment and we are unable to reach suitable alternative
arrangements quickly, we may experience significant delays and additional
costs. If that happens, we could be materially adversely affected.

Our industry is highly competitive with participants that have greater
resources and existing customers

The communications and information services industry is highly competitive.
Many of our existing and potential competitors have financial, personnel,
marketing and other resources significantly greater than ours. Many of these
competitors have the added competitive advantage of an existing customer base.
In addition, significant new competitors could arise as a result of:

. increased consolidation and strategic alliances in the industry
resulting from recent Congressional and FCC actions;

. allowing foreign carriers to compete in the U.S. market;

. further technological advances; and

. further deregulation and other regulatory initiatives.

If we are unable to compete successfully, our business could be materially
adversely affected.

Rapid technological changes can lead to further competition

The communications and information services industry is subject to rapid and
significant changes in technology. In addition, the introduction of new
products or technologies may reduce the cost or increase the supply of certain
services similar to those that we plan to provide. As a result, our most
significant competitors in the future may be new entrants to the communications
and information services industry. These new entrants may not be burdened by an
installed base of outdated equipment. Technological changes and the resulting
competition on our operations could have a material adverse effect on us.

Increased industry capacity and other factors could lead to lower prices for
our products and services

There are currently three U.S. long distance fiber optic networks that are
owned by each of AT&T, MCI WORLDCOM and Sprint, as well as numerous local
networks. Others, including Qwest Communications International Inc., IXC
Communications, Inc. and Williams Communications Group, Inc., are deploying
additional networks that use advanced technology similar to that of our
network. These networks offer significantly more capacity than is currently
available in the marketplace. This

S-14

additional capacity may cause significant decreases in the prices for services.
Prices may also decline due to capacity increases resulting from technological
advances and strategic alliances, such as long distance capacity purchasing
alliances among regional Bell operating companies. These price declines may be
particularly severe if recent trends causing increased demand for capacity,
such as Internet usage, change. Rapid growth in the use of the Internet is a
recent phenomenon, and may not continue at the same rate. Increased competition
has already led to a decline in rates charged for various telecommunications
services.

We are subject to significant regulation that could change in an adverse manner

Communications services are subject to significant regulation at the
federal, state, local and international levels. These regulations affect us and
our existing and potential competitors. Delays in receiving required regulatory
approvals, completing interconnection agreements with incumbent local exchange
carriers or the enactment of new and adverse regulations or regulatory
requirements may have a material adverse effect on us. In addition, future
legislative, judicial, and regulatory agency actions could have a material
adverse effect on us.

Recent federal legislation provides for a significant deregulation of the
U.S. telecommunications industry, including the local exchange, long distance
and cable television industries. This legislation remains subject to judicial
review and additional FCC rulemaking. As a result, we can not predict the
legislation's effect on our future operations. Many regulatory actions are
under way or are being contemplated by federal and state authorities regarding
important items. These actions could have a material adverse effect on us.

Canadian law currently does not permit us to offer services in Canada

Ownership of facilities that originate or terminate traffic in Canada is
currently limited to Canadian carriers. This restriction will block our entry
into the Canadian market unless appropriate arrangements can be made to address
it.

Potential regulation of Internet service providers could adversely affect our
operations

The FCC has to date treated Internet service providers as enhanced service
providers. Enhanced service providers are currently exempt from federal and
state regulations governing common carriers, including the obligation to pay
access charges and contribute to the universal service fund. The FCC is
currently examining the status of Internet service providers and the services
they provide. If the FCC were to determine that Internet service providers, or
the services they provide, are subject to FCC regulation, including the payment
of access charges and contribution to the universal service funds, it could
have a material adverse effect on us.

The FCC has also been considering whether local carriers are obligated to
pay compensation to each other for the transport and termination of calls to
Internet service providers when a local call is placed from an end user of one
carrier to an Internet service provider served by the competing local exchange
carrier. Recently, the FCC determined that it had no rule addressing inter-
carrier compensation for these calls. In the absence of a federal rule, state
commissions may elect not to require payment of compensation for these calls.
The FCC also released for comment alternative federal rules to govern
compensation for these calls in the future. If state commissions, the FCC or
the courts determine that inter-carrier compensation does not apply, carriers,
including us, may be unable to recover their costs or will be compensated at a
significantly lower rate and may be required to refund compensation previously
paid.

Network failure or delays and errors in transmissions expose us to potential
liability

Our network will use a collection of communications equipment, software,
operating protocols and proprietary applications for the high speed
transportation of large quantities of data among

S-15

multiple locations. Given the complexity of our proposed network, it may be
possible that data will be lost or distorted. Delays in data delivery may cause
significant losses to a customer using our network. Our network may also
contain undetected design faults and software bugs that, despite our testing,
may be discovered only after the network has been installed and is in use. The
failure of any equipment or facility on the network could result in the
interruption of customer service until we effect necessary repairs or install
replacement equipment. Network failures, delays and errors could also result
from natural disasters, power losses, security breaches and computer viruses.
These failures, faults or errors could cause delays, service interruptions,
expose us to customer liability or require expensive modifications that could
have a material adverse effect on our business.

Intellectual property and proprietary rights of others could prevent us from
using necessary technology to provide Internet Protocol voice services

While we do not know of any technologies that are patented by others that we
believe are necessary for us to provide Internet Protocol voice services, this
necessary technology may in fact be patented by other parties either now or in
the future. If this technology were held under patent by another person, we
would have to negotiate a license for the use of that technology. We may not be
able to negotiate such a license at a price that is acceptable to us. The
existence of such a patent, or our inability to negotiate a license for any
such technology on acceptable terms, could force us to cease using the
technology and offering products and services incorporating the technology.

Our subsidiaries must make payments to us in order for us to make payments on
the notes

We are a holding company with no material assets other than the stock of our
subsidiaries. Accordingly, we depend upon cash payments from our subsidiaries
to meet our payment obligations, including our obligation to pay you as a
holder of notes. Our subsidiaries may not generate earnings sufficient to
enable us to meet our payment obligations. Future debt agreements of our
subsidiaries, including the proposed secured credit facility, likely will
impose significant restrictions on the ability of our subsidiaries to make
distributions or other payments to us.

The notes will rank below our existing and future senior debt, and we may be
unable to repay our obligations under the notes

The notes will be unsecured and subordinated in right of payment to all of
our existing and future senior debt, including both issues of our outstanding
senior notes and our guaranty of borrowings under our proposed secured credit
facility. Because the notes are subordinate to our senior debt, in the event
of:

. our bankruptcy, liquidation or reorganization,

. the acceleration of the notes due to an event of default under the
indenture, and

. certain other events,

we will make payments on the notes only after we have satisfied all of our
senior debt obligations. Therefore, we may not have sufficient assets remaining
to pay amounts on any or all of the notes. Assuming that on June 30, 1999 we
had entered into our proposed secured credit facility and our subsidiaries
borrowed $475 million, we would have had $3.006 billion of outstanding senior
debt, including $475 million of our subsidiaries' debt guaranteed by us, and
our subsidiaries would have had $900 million in additional borrowings available
under that credit facility guaranteed by us on a senior basis. Our proposed
secured credit facility will be secured by substantially all of our assets and,
subject to certain exceptions, all of the assets of our wholly owned domestic
subsidiaries.

In addition, all payments on the notes will be prohibited in the event of a
payment default on senior debt obligations and may be prohibited in the event
of some non-payment defaults according to the terms of the notes and our senior
debt obligations.

S-16

Because the notes are structurally subordinated to the obligations of our
subsidiaries, you may not be fully repaid if we become insolvent

We have substantial existing debt and expect to incur substantial additional
debt, so we may be unable to make payments on the notes

Assuming that on June 30, 1999 we had completed the offering of the notes
and our subsidiaries borrowed $475 million under the proposed secured credit
facility, we would have had approximately $3.898 billion of indebtedness, and
our subsidiaries would have had $900 million in additional borrowings available
under that credit facility. Our indentures and our proposed secured credit
facility permit us to incur substantial additional debt, and we fully expect to
borrow substantial additional funds, which may include secured borrowings, in
connection with implementing the business plan. A substantial level of debt
makes it more difficult for us to repay you. All our existing debt will, and
our future debt may, mature prior to the notes.

We may be unable to generate cash flow from which to make payments on the notes

We had deficiencies in our ratios of earnings to fixed charges of
approximately $201 million for the six months ended June 30, 1999 and
approximately $36 million for the fiscal year ended 1998. We expect to incur
substantial net operating losses for the foreseeable future. We may not become
profitable or sustain profitability in the future. Accordingly, we may not have
sufficient funds to make payments on the notes.

Future additional debt that we incur in implementing our Business Plan may have
a negative effect on our financial flexibility and stability

Our Business Plan will require us and our subsidiaries to incur substantial
amounts of additional indebtedness in the future. The extent to which we incur
additional debt, and the restrictive and financial covenants that we will be
subject to, will have important consequences to the holders of the notes. These
include the following:

. a potential impairment of our ability to obtain additional financing for
the Business Plan, including financing necessary to fund the substantial
net losses incurred in connection with the Business Plan;

. the requirement that a substantial portion of our cash flow from
operations must be dedicated to the payment of debt service, thus
reducing the funds available for the Business Plan; and

. potential limits on our ability to adjust rapidly to changing market
conditions and vulnerability in the event of a downturn in general
economic conditions or in the communications and information services
business.

S-17

If an event constituting a change in control of Level 3 occurs, we may be
unable to purchase the notes you hold, even if they are validly tendered

Upon the occurrence of certain change of control events, we must make an
offer to purchase all outstanding notes at a purchase price equal to 100% of
the principal amount of the notes, plus accrued interest. We may not have
sufficient funds to pay the purchase price for all notes tendered by holders
seeking to accept the offer to purchase. In addition, the indentures relating
to each issue of our existing senior notes, the proposed secured credit
facility and our other debt agreements may require us to repurchase or repay
the other debt upon a change in control or may prohibit us from purchasing any
notes before their stated maturity, including upon a change of control. Our
failure to purchase all validly tendered notes would result in an event of
default under the indenture. See "Description of Notes--Covenants--Repurchase
at Option of Holders Upon a Change of Control."

Our Year 2000 compliance efforts may not succeed, and PKS Systems Integration
LLC may have liability from its Year 2000 customer projects

We are conducting a review of our computer systems, including the computer
systems used in our computer outsourcing business, to identify systems that
could be affected by the Year 2000 computer issue. We are also developing and
implementing a plan to resolve the issue. If any required plan to resolve the
Year 2000 problem is unsuccessful, however, that result could have a material
adverse effect on us. Until our review is completed and our plans are developed
and completed, we cannot predict with certainty whether the cost of resolving
the Year 2000 issue will be material.

Our significant suppliers and customers, including those of our computer
outsourcing business, may not be Year 2000 compliant in a timely manner and any
noncompliance of these systems could have a material adverse effect on us.

PKS Information Services, Inc., derives a substantial portion of its revenue
from projects that its subsidiary, PKS Systems Integration LLC, or PKSSI,
conducts involving Year 2000 assessment and renovation services. These
activities of PKSSI expose us to potential risks that may include problems with
services provided by PKSSI to its customers and the potential for claims
arising under PKSSI's customer contracts. PKSSI's attempts to contractually
limit its exposure to liability for Year 2000 compliance issues may not be
effective. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of Operations--Year 2000--June 30, 1999."

Foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations or repatriation could result in
losses

Our international expansion will cause our results of operations and the
value of our assets to be affected by the exchange rates between the U.S.
dollar and the currencies of the additional countries in which we have
operations and assets. In some of these countries, prices of our products and
services will be denominated in a currency other than the U.S. dollar. As a
result, we may experience economic losses solely as a result of foreign
currency exchange rate fluctuations, including a foreign currency's devaluation
against the U.S. dollar. We may also in the future acquire interests in
companies that operate in countries where the removal or conversion of currency
is restricted. In addition, similar restrictions could be imposed in countries
where we conduct business after we begin our operations.

Environmental liabilities from our historical operations could be material

Our operations and properties are subject to a wide variety of laws and
regulations relating to environmental protection, human health and safety.
These laws and regulations include those concerning the use and management of
hazardous and non-hazardous substances and wastes. We

S-18

have made and will continue to have to make significant expenditures relating
to our environmental compliance obligations. We may not at all times be in
compliance with all these requirements.

In connection with certain historical operations, we are a party to, or
otherwise involved in, legal proceedings under state and federal law involving
investigation and remediation activities at approximately 110 contaminated
properties. We could be held liable, jointly and severally, and without regard
to our own fault, for such investigation and remediation. The discovery of
additional environmental liabilities related to our historical operations or
changes in existing environmental requirements could have a material adverse
effect on us.

Significant future declines in cash flow from coal operations

More than half of our net revenues for 1998 were attributable to our coal
mining operations. The level of cash flows generated in recent periods by our
coal operations will not continue after the year 2000. These cash flow levels
will decrease because the delivery requirements under our current long-term
contracts decline significantly after that date. Moreover, without those
contracts, our coal mining operations would not be able to operate profitably
by selling their production on the spot markets. A substantial majority of our
coal mining revenues are provided by three customer contracts.

Potential liabilities and claims arising from our coal operations could be
significant

Our coal operations are subject to extensive laws and regulations that
impose stringent operational, maintenance, financial assurance, environmental
compliance, reclamation, restoration and closure requirements. These
requirements include those governing air and water emissions, waste disposal,
worker health and safety, benefits for current and retired coal miners, and
other general permitting and licensing requirements. We may not at all times be
in compliance with all of these requirements. Liabilities or claims associated
with this non-compliance could require us to incur material costs or suspend
production. Mine reclamation costs that exceed our reserves for these matters
also could require us to incur material costs.

Anti-takeover provisions in Level 3's charter and by-laws could limit our share
price and delay a change of management

Our certificate of incorporation and by-laws contain provisions that could
make it more difficult or even prevent a third party from acquiring our company
without the approval of our incumbent board of directors. These provisions,
among other things:

. divide our board of directors into three classes, with members of each
class to be elected in staggered three-year terms;

. prohibit stockholder action by written consent in place of a meeting;

. limit the right of stockholders to call special meetings of
stockholders;

. limit the right of stockholders to present proposals or nominate
directors for election at annual meetings of stockholders; and

. authorize our board of directors to issue preferred stock in one or more
series without any action on the part of stockholders.

These provisions could limit the price that investors might be willing to
pay in the future for shares of our common stock and significantly impede the
ability of the holders of our common stock to change management. In addition,
we have adopted a poison pill rights plan, which has anti-takeover effects. Our
rights plan, if triggered, will cause substantial dilution to a person or group
that

S-19

attempts to acquire our company on terms not approved by our board of
directors. Provisions and agreements that inhibit or discourage takeover
attempts could reduce the market value of our common stock.

Sales of a large number of shares by Level 3 or by stockholders could depress
our stock price

The market price of our common stock could drop as a result of sales of a
large number of our shares in the public market after the offering. The
perception that sales may occur could have the same results. We will be subject
to a 90 day black-out period following the date of this prospectus supplement.
During this black-out period, we are not allowed to issue additional common
stock or securities convertible into common stock except in limited
circumstances or unless Goldman, Sachs & Co. consents. One exception allows us
to issue additional stock in connection with acquisitions. A second exception
applies if we are included in a major market index.

Our officers and directors will not be subject to any lock-up provision.
Additional shares are issuable under our benefit program depending on the
extent to which our stock outperforms the S&P 500 by either rising at a higher
rate or falling at a lower rate. The number of such shares that would be issued
is based on a multiplier related to how much our stock outperforms the S&P 500.

There may be no public market for the notes, so you may be unable to sell the
notes

The notes are a new issue of securities for which there currently is no
established trading market. Although the underwriters have advised us that they
intend to make a market in the notes, they have no obligation to do so and may
discontinue any market making at any time without notice. In addition, any
market making activity will be subject to the limits imposed by the Securities
Act and the Exchange Act. As a result, a market for the notes may not develop
or, if it does, may not be maintained.

Various factors could have a materially adverse effect on the trading price
of the notes, including the failure of an active market to develop and
fluctuations in the prevailing interest rates. In addition, our operating
results and prospects could from time to time be below the expectations of
public market analysts and investors, which could adversely affect public
perception of our creditworthiness and, therefore, the trading price of the
notes. The trading price of the notes could also be significantly affected by
the market price of our common stock, which has fluctuated significantly since
it has been publicly traded and may continue to do so in the future.

If you convert any notes, the value of the common stock you will receive may
fluctuate significantly

Since our common stock has been publicly traded, its market price has
fluctuated significantly and may continue to do so in the future. Significant
fluctuations in the market price of our common stock may occur in response to
various factors and events, including, among other things:

. the depth and liquidity of the trading market for our common stock;

. quarterly variations in actual or anticipated operating results;

. changes in estimates by securities analysts;

. market conditions in the communications and information services
industry;

. announcements and performance by competitors;

. regulatory actions; and

. general economic conditions.

We do not anticipate that we will pay cash dividends on our common stock

We do not currently plan to pay any cash dividends on our common stock in
the foreseeable future. In addition, our indentures and proposed secured credit
facility contain limits on our ability to declare and pay cash dividends.

S-20

Certain Foreign Holders may be subject to adverse U.S. federal income tax
consequences

We may be or may become a "United States real property holding corporation"
(a "USRPHC") for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Generally, if we have been,
are or become a USRPHC and the notes are considered to be "regularly traded"
under applicable U.S. Treasury Regulations, then a Foreign Holder (as defined
under "Certain United States Tax Considerations") who owns or has owned,
actually or constructively, at any time during the five year period ending on
the date of disposition or conversion, more than 5% of the total fair market
value of the notes outstanding during that period may be subject to adverse
U.S. federal income tax consequences upon disposition or conversion of a note.
Additionally, it is possible that a Foreign Holder that initially owns 5% or
less of the total fair market value of the notes may subsequently be considered
to own more than 5% of the total fair market value of the notes due to other
holders' conversion of notes into common stock. See "Certain United States Tax
Considerations--Foreign Holders."

INFORMATION REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus supplement contains or incorporates by reference forward-
looking statements. These forward-looking statements include, among others,
statements concerning:

. the Business Plan, as defined, its advantages and our strategy for
implementing the Business Plan;

. anticipated growth of the communications and information services
industry;

. plans to devote significant management time and capital resources to our
business;

. expectations as to funding our capital requirements;

. anticipated dates on which we will begin providing certain services or
reach specific milestones in the Business Plan; and

. other statements of expectations, beliefs, future plans and strategies,
anticipated developments and other matters that are not historical
facts.

You should be aware that these forward-looking statements are subject to
risks and uncertainties, including financial, regulatory, environmental,
industry growth and trend projections, that could cause actual events or
results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by the statements.
The most important factors that could prevent us from achieving our stated
goals include, but are not limited to, our failure to:

. achieve and sustain profitability based on the creation and
implementation of our advanced, international, facilities based
communications network based on Internet Protocol technology;

. overcome significant early operating losses;

. produce sufficient capital to fund the Business Plan;

. develop financial and management controls, as well as additional
controls of operating expenses as well as other costs;

. attract and retain qualified management and other personnel;

. install on a timely basis the switches/routers, fiber optic cable and
associated electronics required for successful implementation of the
Business Plan;

. successfully complete commercial testing of our softswitch technology
for voice and fax transmission services;

. negotiate new and maintain existing peering agreements; and

. develop and implement effective business support systems for processing
customer orders and provisioning.

For a discussion of certain of these factors, see "Risk Factors" beginning
on page S-11.

S-21

USE OF PROCEEDS

Our net proceeds from this offering are estimated to be $726.9 million, or
$836.2 million if the underwriters' over-allotment option is exercised in full,
after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and expenses. The net proceeds
will be used for working capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions and other
general corporate purposes in connection with the implementation of the
Business Plan. Although we evaluate potential acquisitions from time to time,
we have no agreement or understanding with any person to effect any material
acquisition.

Pending this utilization, we intend to invest the net proceeds of this
offering in short-term investments.

COMMON STOCK PRICE RANGE AND DIVIDENDS

Our common stock is quoted on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol
"LVLT." It began trading on the Nasdaq National Market on April 1, 1998, the
day following the split-off of the Construction Group from our other
businesses. The table below sets forth, for the calendar quarters indicated,
the high and low per share closing sale prices of our common stock as reported
by the Nasdaq National Market. The prices set forth in the table have been
adjusted to reflect the two-for-one split of our common stock effected as a
stock dividend in August 1998.

High Low
Year Ended December 31, 1998 ------ ------

Second Quarter (from April 1, 1998)......................... $37.13 $24.00
Third Quarter............................................... 42.13 29.78
Fourth Quarter.............................................. 43.13 24.00
Year Ended December 31, 1999
First Quarter............................................... 72.81 39.75
Second Quarter.............................................. 93.06 60.06
Third Quarter (through September 14, 1999).................. 67.88 46.88

On September 14, 1999, the closing price per share of our common stock was
$53.88. We urge you to obtain current market quotations of our common stock
before making any decision with respect to an investment in the notes.

We intend to retain future earnings for use in our business, and we do not
anticipate paying any cash dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable
future. In addition, we are effectively restricted under certain debt covenants
from paying cash dividends on our common stock.

S-22

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth the consolidated capitalization of the
Company as of June 30, 1999 and that capitalization as adjusted to give effect
to the net proceeds from this offering, assuming no exercise of the
underwriters' over-allotment option.

June 30, 1999 (unaudited)
-----------------------------
Actual As Adjusted
------------ ---------------
(dollars in millions)

Cash and marketable securities................... $ 4,178 $ 4,905
============ ============
Current portion of long-term debt................ $ 6 $ 6
============ ============
Long-term debt, less current portion............. $ 2,667 $ 2,667
Notes offered under this prospectus supplement... -- 750
------------ ------------
Total long-term debt, less current portion..... 2,667 3,417
Stockholders' equity
Preferred stock, $.01 par value; authorized
10,000,000 shares; no shares outstanding,
actual and as adjusted........................ -- --
Common Stock, $.01 par value; authorized
1,500,000,000 shares; 339,616,599 shares
outstanding, actual and as adjusted........... 3 3
Additional paid-in capital..................... 2,372 2,372
Accumulated other comprehensive loss........... (10) (10)
Retained earnings.............................. 1,244 1,244
------------ ------------
Total stockholders' equity................... 3,609 3,609
------------ ------------
Total capitalization............................. $6,276 $ 7,026
============ ============

Certain Level 3 subsidiaries propose to enter into a $1.375 billion senior
secured credit facility that has been underwritten by a syndicate of banks and
other financial institutions. The credit facility will consist of a $450
million tranche A term loan facility, a $275 million tranche B term loan
facility and a $650 million revolving credit facility. The revolving credit
facility and the tranche A term loan facility mature eight years after the date
of the proposed credit agreement, and the tranche B term loan facility matures
on January 15, 2008. Level 3 expects that its subsidiaries will borrow $475
million under these facilities at the closing of the proposed secured credit
facility. The proposed secured credit facility is currently in general
syndication and is subject to customary conditions for a transaction of this
type, including completion of definitive documentation and finalization of
terms and conditions. Level 3 expects to close the proposed secured credit
facility by the end of September 1999. Neither the closing of the proposed
secured credit facility nor the closing of this offering of notes is
conditioned upon the closing of the other transaction. The previous table has
not been adjusted to give effect to any borrowings under the proposed secured
credit facility.

All obligations under the revolving credit facility will be secured by
substantially all of the assets of Level 3 and, subject to certain exceptions,
all of its wholly owned domestic subsidiaries (other than the borrower under
the term loan facilities). Such assets will also secure a portion of the term
loan facilities in an amount equal to $100 million plus, with certain
exceptions, the undrawn amount of the revolving credit facility. Additionally,
all obligations under the term loan facilities will be secured by the equipment
that is purchased with the proceeds of the term loan facilities and the lease
rentals derived from the lease of such equipment to the Company's operating
subsidiaries. The Company and, subject to certain exceptions, all its domestic
subsidiaries (other than the borrower under the term loan facilities) will
guarantee all obligations under the revolving credit facility. The Company and,
subject to certain exceptions, all its domestic subsidiaries will guarantee all
obligations under the term loan facilities. See "Description of Other
Indebtedness of Level 3--Proposed Secured Credit Facility."

S-23

MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

This document contains forward looking statements and information that are
based on the beliefs of management as well as assumptions made by and
information currently available to the Company. When used in this document, the
words "anticipate," "believe," "estimate" and "expect" and similar expressions,
as they relate to the Company or its management, are intended to identify
forward-looking statements. Such statements reflect the current views of the
Company with respect to future events and are subject to certain risks,
uncertainties and assumptions. Should one or more of these risks or
uncertainties materialize, or should underlying assumptions prove incorrect,
actual results may vary materially from those described in this document. For a
more detailed description of these risks, please see "Risk Factors" and
"Information Regarding Forward-Looking Statements."

Recent Developments

BusinessNet Ltd. Acquisition

On January 5, 1999, Level 3 acquired BusinessNet Ltd., a leading London-
based Internet service provider in a largely stock-for-stock transaction valued
at $12 million and accounted for as a purchase. After completion of certain
adjustments, the Company agreed to issue approximately 400,000 shares of common
stock and paid $1 million in cash in exchange for all of the issued and
outstanding shares of BusinessNet's capital stock. Of the approximately 400,000
shares Level 3 agreed to issue in connection with the acquisition,
approximately 150,000 shares of its common stock have been pledged to Level 3
to secure certain indemnification obligations of the former BusinessNet
stockholders. The pledge of these shares will terminate approximately 18 months
from the transaction date. Liabilities exceeded assets acquired, and goodwill
of $16 million was recognized from the transaction which is being amortized
over five years.

Common Stock Offering

Level 3 filed a "universal" shelf registration statement covering up to $3.5
billion of common stock, preferred stock, debt securities and depository shares
that became effective February 17, 1999. On March 9, 1999 the Company closed
the offering of 28,750,000 shares of its common stock through a public
offering. The net proceeds from the offering of approximately $1.5 billion,
after underwriting discounts and offering expenses, will be used for working
capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions and other general corporate
purposes in connection with the implementation of the Business Plan.

Increase in Authorized Shares Outstanding

On February 25, 1999, the Company's Board of Directors approved an increase
in the number of authorized shares of common stock from 500 million to 1
billion. On April 12, 1999, the Board of Directors approved a further increase
in the number of authorized shares of common stock by 500 million to 1.5
billion. The Company's stockholders approved the increase in authorized shares
at its 1999 Annual Meeting held on May 27, 1999.

Transatlantic Cable

On April 23, 1999, Level 3 announced that it had contracted with Tyco
Submarine Systems Ltd. to design and build a transatlantic terabit cable system
from Long Island, New York to North Cornwall, UK. The cable system is expected
to be in service by September 2000 and is expected to cost between $600 to $800
million. The total cost will depend on how the cable is upgraded over time.
Level 3 has prefunded the purchase of significant amounts of undersea capacity
as part of the Business Plan, but may require additional funding depending on
the cable's ultimate structure, pre-construction sales and ownership.

S-24

European Network

Level 3 announced on April 29, 1999 that it had finalized contracts relating
to construction of Ring 1 of its European network in France, Belgium, the
Netherlands, Germany and the United Kingdom. Ring 1, which is approximately
2,000 miles, will connect Paris, Frankfurt, Amsterdam, Brussels and London. The
network is expected to be ready for service by September 2000. Ring 1 is part
of the approximately 4,750 mile intercity network that will ultimately connect
a minimum of 13 local city networks in Europe. This European network will be
linked to the Level 3 North American intercity network by the Level 3
transatlantic terabit cable system currently under development, also expected
to be ready for service by September 2000.

On July 26, 1999, the Company announced two important developments of its
European network build with agreements with Eurotunnel and Alcatel. Eurotunnel
will provide Level 3 with multiple cross-Channel cables between the United
Kingdom and continental Europe. Eurotunnel will install and supply Level 3 with
multiple cross-Channel cables between the United Kingdom and France through the
high-security service tunnel. The first of these cables will be completed by
the first quarter of 2000. Subsequent cables will be installed to upgrade and
expand the network as and when required or when new fiber technology becomes
available. Alcatel will provide Level 3 with a cross-Channel undersea cable
link between the United Kingdom and Belgium. Alcatel will design, develop, and
install an undersea cable to link the Level 3 network between the United
Kingdom and Belgium. The cable system is already under development and is
expected to be complete by the end of 1999.

Colt Cost Sharing Agreement

On May 4, 1999, Level 3 and Colt Telecom Group plc announced an agreement to
share costs for the construction of European networks. The agreement calls for
Level 3 to share construction costs of Colt's planned 1,600 mile intercity
German network linking Berlin, Cologne, Dusseldorf, Frankfurt, Hamburg, Munich
and Stuttgart. In return, Colt will share construction costs of Ring 1 of Level
3's planned European network.

Lucent Agreement

On June 23, 1999 Level 3 announced a minimum four year, $250 million
strategic agreement with Lucent Technologies to purchase Lucent systems,
including new software switches or "softswitches." The minimum purchase
commitment is subject to certain conditions and has the potential to grow to $1
billion over five years.

Under this nonexclusive agreement, Lucent will provide Level 3 its Lucent
Technologies Softswitch, a software switch for Internet Protocol networks that
is intended to combine the reliability and features that customers expect from
the public switched telephone network with the cost effectiveness and
flexibility of Internet Protocol technology. With the Lucent Softswitch, Level
3 expects to provide a full range of Internet Protocol based communications
services similar in quality and ease of use to services on traditional circuit
voice networks. In addition, the companies also agreed to collaborate on future
enhancements of softswitches and gateway products to support next-generation
broadband services for business and consumers that will combine high-quality
voice and video communications with Internet-style web data services.

Results of Operations

In late 1997, the Company announced a plan to increase substantially its
information services business and to expand the range of services it offers by
building an advanced, international, facilities based communications network
based on Internet Protocol technology. Since the Business Plan represents a
significant expansion of the Company's communications and information services

S-25

business, the Company does not believe that the Company's financial condition
and results of operations for prior periods will serve as a meaningful
indication of the Company's future financial condition or results of
operations. The Company expects to incur substantial net operating losses for
the foreseeable future and it may not be able to achieve or sustain operating
profitability in the future.

Second Quarter 1999 vs. Second Quarter 1998

The following discussion should be read in conjunction with the Company's
consolidated condensed financial statements (including the notes thereto)
included elsewhere herein.

Revenue. Revenue for the quarters ended June 30, is summarized as follows
(in millions):

1999 1998
---- ----

Communications and Information Services........................ $ 53 $ 36
Coal Mining.................................................... 47 62
Other.......................................................... 6 5
---- ----
$106 $103
==== ====

Communications and information services revenue for the three months ended
June 30, 1999 increased 47% compared to the same period in 1998. New Internet
Protocol related products which the Company began offering in late 1998 and
early 1999, including private line, colocation and managed modem services,
provided $18 million of revenue for the communications segment in 1999. The
Company's purchase of XCOM in April 1998 provided $6 million of communications
revenue in the second quarter of 1998 subsequent to the acquisition. A
significant portion of XCOM's revenue is attributable to reciprocal
compensation agreements with Bell Atlantic. These agreements require the
company originating a call to compensate the company terminating the call. The
Federal Communication Commission has been considering whether local carriers
are obligated to pay compensation to each other for the transport and
termination of calls to Internet service providers when a local call is placed
from an end user of one carrier to an Internet service provider served by the
competing local exchange carrier. Recently, the FCC determined that it had no
rule addressing inter-carrier compensation for these calls. The FCC also
released for comment alternative federal rules to govern compensation for these
calls in the future. If state commissions, the FCC or the courts determine that
inter-carrier compensation does not apply, carriers, including us, may be
unable to recover their costs or will be compensated at a significantly lower
rate and may be required to refund amounts previously received. In May 1999 the
Massachusetts Department of Public Utilities ruled that Bell Atlantic was no
longer required to pay the established reciprocal compensation rates for
certain services. As a result Level 3 has elected, effective at the beginning
of the second quarter of 1999, not to recognize this revenue source until these
uncertainties are resolved. Bell Atlantic has also notified the Company that it
will be escrowing all amounts due the Company under the reciprocal compensation
agreements until the issue is resolved. An unfavorable resolution to this
matter may have a material adverse effect on the Company's communications
revenues.

Revenues for the computer outsourcing and systems integration businesses
increased 12% and 21% to $18 million and $17 million, respectively. Revenue
attributable to new customers is primarily responsible for the increase for
both the computer outsourcing and systems integration businesses.

Coal mining revenue decreased $15 million, or 24% in the second quarter of
1999 compared to the same period in 1998. The decrease was partially due to
timing of shipments taken by Commonwealth. Commonwealth is obligated to
purchase annually, minimum amounts of coal; however, it is Commonwealth's
option as to when the coal will be purchased. Due to the expiration of certain
long-term coal contracts in 1998, 1999 coal revenue is expected to decline
approximately 10% from 1998 levels.

S-26

If current market conditions continue, the Company will experience a
significant decline in coal revenue and earnings beginning in 2001 as delivery
requirements under long-term contracts decline as additional long-term
contracts begin to expire.

Other revenue was consistent with 1998, and is primarily attributable to
CPTC, a privately owned tollroad in southern California.

Cost of Revenue. Cost of revenue increased 65% in 1999 to $81 million from
$49 million in 1998 primarily as a result of the increase in network expenses
of $36 million in 1999 related to the communications business as compared to
the same period in 1998. Cost of revenue for the communications business is
expected to increase substantially in the future as the Company continues to
increase the number of markets in which it offers services and the products
available in each of those markets. The cost of revenue for the information
services business was consistent with the corresponding increase in revenue.
The cost of revenue for the coal business, as a percentage of revenue,
increased approximately 7% due to the expiration of the high margin long-term
contract in 1998.

Depreciation and Amortization Expense. Depreciation and amortization expense
increased to $51 million in 1999 from $10 million in 1998. The commencement of
operations in 21 U.S. and 4 European markets and the completion of the initial
installation of 11 local networks in the second half of 1998 and the first half
of 1999 resulted in the higher depreciation expense in 1999. In addition, the
amortization of goodwill attributable to the acquisitions of XCOM, BusinessNet
and others contributed to the higher depreciation and amortization expense in
1999.

Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and
administrative expenses increased significantly in 1999 to $157 million from
$55 million in 1998 primarily due to the cost of activities associated with the
expanding communications business. The Company incurred incremental
compensation and travel costs for the substantial number of new employees that
have been hired to implement the Business Plan. The total number of employees
of the Company increased to over 3,200 at June 30, 1999. Professional fees,
including legal costs associated with obtaining licenses, agreements and
technical facilities and other development costs associated with the Company's
plans to expand services offered in U.S. and European cities, and consulting
fees to develop and implement the Company's business support systems, also
increased selling general and administrative expenses. In addition to the costs
to expand the communications and information services businesses, the Company
recorded $29 million of non-cash compensation expense in the second quarter of
1999 under SFAS No. 123 related to grants of stock options and warrants.
General and administrative costs are expected to increase significantly in
future periods as the Company continues to implement the Business Plan.

Write-off of In-Process Research and Development. Write-off of in-process
research and development was $30 million in 1998. The in-process research and
development costs were the portion of the purchase price allocated to the
telephone network-to-Internet Protocol network bridge technology acquired by
the Company in the XCOM transaction and were estimated through formal valuation
at $30 million. In accordance with generally accepted accounting principles,
the $30 million was taken as a nondeductible charge against earnings in the
second quarter of 1998.

EBITDA. EBITDA as defined by the Company, consists of earnings (losses)
before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization, non-cash operating
expenses (including stock-based compensation and in-process research and
development charges) and other non-operating income or expenses. EBITDA was $8
million in 1998 and $(103) million in 1999. The primary reason for the decrease
between periods is the significant increase in general and administrative
expenses, described above, incurred in connection with the implementation of
the Company's Business Plan. EBITDA is commonly used in the communications
industry to analyze companies on the basis of operating performance. EBITDA,
however, should not be considered an alternative to operating or

S-27

net income as an indicator of the performance of the Company's businesses, or
as an alternative to cash flows from operating activities as a measure of
liquidity, in each case determined in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles. See "Consolidated Condensed Statements of Cash Flows."

Interest Income. Interest income increased 27% in 1999 to $57 million from
$45 million in 1998 as the Company's average cash, cash equivalents and
marketable securities balance increased from approximately $3.2 billion during
the second quarter of 1998 to approximately $4.6 billion during the second
quarter of 1999. Pending utilization of the cash equivalents and marketable
securities in implementing the Business Plan, the Company intends to invest
the funds primarily in government and governmental agency securities. This
investment strategy will provide lower yields on the funds, but is expected to
reduce the risk to principal in the short term prior to using the funds in
implementing the Business Plan.

Interest Expense, Net. Interest expense, net increased significantly from
$36 million in 1998 to $45 million in 1999. Interest expense increased
substantially due to the completion of the offering of $2 billion aggregate
principal amount of 9 1/8% Senior Notes Due 2008 issued in April 1998 and $834
million aggregate principal amount at maturity of 10 1/2% Senior Discount
Notes Due 2008 issued in December 1998. The amortization of debt issuance
costs associated with the Senior Notes and Senior Discount Notes also
increased interest expense in 1999. The Company capitalized $20 million and $1
million of interest expense on network construction and business support
systems in the second quarter of 1999 and 1998, respectively.

Gain on Equity Investee Stock Transactions. The gain on equity investee
stock transactions increased to $111 million in 1999 from $21 million in 1998.
In the second quarter of 1999 RCN issued stock in a public offering and for
certain transactions which diluted the Company's ownership of RCN from 40% at
March 31, 1999 to 35% at June 30, 1999 but increased its proportionate share
of RCN's net assets. The increase in the Company's proportionate share of
RCN's net assets resulted in a pre-tax gain of $111 million for the Company in
the second quarter of 1999. In 1998, the Company recognized a $21 million gain
related to RCN stock activity.

Other Expense, Net. Other expense, net decreased in 1999 to $(7) million
from $(25) million. Other expense consists primarily of the Company's share of
losses incurred by the Company's equity method investees, principally RCN. RCN
is incurring significant costs in developing its business plan including the
acquisitions of several Internet service providers. The Company recorded $26
million of equity losses attributable to RCN in the second quarter of 1999, as
compared to $22 million in the second quarter of 1998. During the second
quarter of 1999, the Company sold its equity position in Burlington Resources,
which resulted in a pre-tax gain of $17 million. Also included in other
expense are equity earnings in Commonwealth Telephone Enterprises, Inc., and
realized gains and losses on the sale of other assets each not individually
significant to the Company's results of operations.

Income Tax Benefit. Income tax benefit in 1999 differs from the statutory
rate of 35% primarily due to losses incurred by the Company's international
subsidiaries which cannot be included in the consolidated U.S. federal return,
nondeductible goodwill amortization expense and state income taxes. The income
tax benefit differs from the statutory rate in 1998 primarily due to the $30
million nondeductible write-off of the research and development costs acquired
in the XCOM acquisition.

Six Months 1999 vs. Six Months 1998

Revenue. Revenue for the six months ended June 30 is summarized as follows
(in millions):

1999 1998
---- ----

Communications and Information Services.............................. $ 99 $ 65
Coal Mining.......................................................... 98 115
Other................................................................ 11 10
---- ----
$208 $190
==== ====

S-28

Communications and information services revenue increased from $65 million
for the six months ended June 30, 1998 to $99 million for the six months ended
June 30, 1999. In May, 1999 the Massachusetts Department of Public Utilities
ruled that Bell Atlantic was no longer required to pay the established
reciprocal compensation rates for certain services. As a result, Level 3 has
elected not to recognize additional revenue, beginning in the second quarter,
from these agreements until the uncertainties are resolved. An unfavorable
resolution to this matter may have a material adverse effect on the Company's
communications revenues. Systems integration revenue increased 10% to $32
million in 1999. Revenue for the computer outsourcing business increased from
$30 million in 1998 to $34 million in 1999. Revenue attributable to new
customers led to the increase in computer outsourcing and systems integration
revenue.

Mining revenue in 1999 decreased to $98 million from $115 million in 1998
due to timing of shipments taken by Commonwealth. The purchase agreement with
Commonwealth requires that minimum amounts of coal must be purchased; however,
it does not stipulate when the coal must be purchased. In addition, the
expiration of a long-term contract in late 1998 will result in an approximate
10% decline in 1999 coal sales from 1998 levels.

Other revenue was consistent with 1998, and is primarily attributable to
CPTC.

Cost of Revenue. Cost of revenue increased $52 million or 57% to $143
million in 1999 as a result of the expanding communications business. In 1999
network expenses were $54 million as compared to $1 million in the prior year.
The increase in costs is primarily attributable to the XCOM and GeoNet
acquisitions, the costs associated with the Frontier and IXC Communications
leases and costs attributable to the products the Company began offering in
late 1998 and 1999. The cost of revenue, as a percentage of revenue, for the
information services business increased slightly for the six months ended June
30, 1999 compared to the same period in 1998. The increase is primarily due to
the costs incurred by the systems integration segment to transition from Year
2000 services to systems and software reengineering for Internet Protocol
related applications. The cost of revenue for the coal business as a percentage
of revenue, increased due to the expiration of the high margin long-term
contract in 1998.

Depreciation and Amortization Expense. Depreciation expense increased from
$12 million in 1998 to $76 million in 1999. The significant increase in the
amount of assets placed in service during the last half of 1998 and first half
of 1999 for the communications business resulted in the increase in
depreciation expense. The acquisitions of XCOM, GeoNet and BusinessNet in 1998
and 1999 resulted in goodwill amortization increasing from $4 million in 1998
to $16 million in 1999.

Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and
administrative expenses increased significantly to $282 million in 1999 from
$103 million in 1998 primarily due to the cost of activities associated with
the expanding communications business. Compensation, travel and facilities
costs increased substantially due to the additional employees that have been
hired to implement the Business Plan. The total number of employees of the
Company increased to over 3,200 at June 30, 1999. Professional fees, including
legal costs associated with obtaining licenses, agreements and technical
facilities and other development costs associated with the Company's plans to
expand services offered in U.S. and European cities and consulting fees
incurred to develop and implement the Company's business support systems
contributed to higher selling general and administrative expenses. In addition,
the Company recorded $47 million of non-cash compensation in the first half of
1999 for expenses recognized under SFAS No. 123 related to grants of stock
options and warrants, up from $11 million in 1998. As the Company continues to
implement the Business Plan, general and administrative costs are expected to
continue to increase significantly.

Write-off of In-Process Research and Development. Write-off of in-process
research and development of $30 million in 1998 was the portion of the purchase
price allocated to the telephone

S-29

network-to-Internet Protocol network bridge technology acquired by the Company
in the XCOM transaction and was estimated through formal valuation. In
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, the $30 million was
taken as a nondeductible charge against earnings in the second quarter of 1998.

EBITDA. EBITDA decreased from $7 million in 1998 to $(170) million in 1999.
The primary reason for the decrease between periods is the significant increase
in general and administrative expenses, described above, incurred in connection
with the implementation of the Business Plan.

Interest Income. Interest income increased substantially from $71 million in
1998 to $107 million in 1999 primarily as a function of the Company's
increasing average cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities balances.
The average cash balance increased from approximately $2.6 billion during the
first half of 1998 to approximately $4.2 billion during the first half of 1999.
Pending utilization of the cash equivalents and marketable securities in
implementing the Business Plan, the Company intends to invest the funds
primarily in government and governmental agency securities. This investment
strategy will provide lower yields on the funds, but is expected to reduce the
risk to principal in the short term prior to using the funds in implementing
the Business Plan.

Interest Expense, Net. Interest expense, net increased $58 million to $98
million in 1999 due to the completion of the offering of $2 billion aggregate
principal amount of 9 1/8% Senior Notes Due 2008 in April, 1998 and $834
million aggregate principal amount at maturity of 10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes
Due 2008 in the fourth quarter of 1998. The amortization of the related debt
issuance costs also contributed to the increased interest expense in 1999. The
Company capitalized $31 million and $1 million of interest expense on network
construction and business support systems in the first half of 1999 and 1998,
respectively.

Gain on Equity Investee Stock Transactions. Gain on equity investee stock
transactions increased to $111 million during the first half of 1999. RCN
issued stock in a public offering and for certain transactions which diluted
the Company's ownership of RCN from 41% at December 31, 1998 to 35% at June 30,
1999. The increase in the Company's proportionate share of RCN's net assets as
a result of these transactions resulted in a pre-tax gain of $111 million from
subsidiary stock sales for the Company in the first half of 1999. The Company
recognized $21 million of gains for similar stock transactions of RCN in the
first half of 1998.

Other Expense, Net. Other expense, net decreased to $(30) million in 1999
from $(47) million in 1998. Other expense consists of the Company's share of
losses incurred by the Company's equity method investees, primarily RCN. RCN is
incurring significant costs in developing its business plan including the
acquisitions of several Internet service providers. The Company recorded $53
million of equity losses attributable to RCN in the first half of 1999, as
compared to $53 million in the first half of 1998. The Company also sold 1.2
million shares of Burlington Resources common stock, resulting in a pre-tax
gain of $17 million for the Company in 1999. Equity earnings of Commonwealth
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and gains on the disposition of other assets were
not individually significant in the first half of 1999 or 1998.

Income Tax Benefit. Income tax benefit in 1999 differs from the statutory
rate of 35% primarily due to losses incurred by the Company's international
subsidiaries which cannot be included in the consolidated U.S. federal return,
nondeductible goodwill amortization expense and state income taxes. The income
tax benefit in 1999 differs from the statutory rate in 1998 primarily due to
the $30 million nondeductible write-off of the research and development costs
acquired in the XCOM acquisition.

Discontinued Operations. Discontinued operations includes the one-time gain
of $608 million recognized upon the distribution of the Construction Group to
former Class C stockholders on March 31, 1998. Also included in discontinued
operations is the gain, net of tax, of $324 million from the Company's sale of
its energy assets to MidAmerican on January 2, 1998.

S-30

1998 vs. 1997

In 1998 the Company's Board of Directors changed Level 3's fiscal year end
from the last Saturday in December to a calendar year end. The additional five
days in the 1998 fiscal year are reflected in the period ended December 31,
1998. There were 52 weeks in fiscal years 1997 and 1996.

Revenue. Revenue for the years ended December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997
is summarized as follows (in millions):

1998 1997
---- ----

Communications and Information Services....................... $144 $ 95
Coal Mining................................................... 228 222
Other......................................................... 20 15
---- ----
$392 $332
==== ====

Communications and Information Services revenue increased 52% in 1998. The
Internet Protocol business generated revenues of approximately $24 million in
1998, of which $22 million is attributable to the acquisition of XCOM.
Approximately 87% of XCOM's revenue is attributable to reciprocal compensation
agreements with Bell Atlantic. These agreements require the company originating
a call to compensate the company terminating the call. The FCC has been
considering whether local carriers are obligated to pay compensation to each
other for the transport and termination of calls to Internet service providers
when a local call is placed from an end user of one carrier to an Internet
service provider served by the competing local exchange carrier. Recently, the
FCC determined that it had no rule addressing inter-carrier compensation for
these calls. In the absence of a federal rule, the FCC determined that it would
not be unreasonable for a state commission, in some circumstances, to require
payment of compensation for these calls. The FCC also released for comment
alternative federal rules to govern compensation for these calls in the future.
If state commissions, the FCC or the courts determine that inter-carrier
compensation does not apply, carriers, including us, may be unable to recover
their costs or will be compensated at a significantly lower rate and may be
required to refund amounts previously received. Bell Atlantic has notified the
Company that it will be escrowing all amounts due the Company under the
reciprocal compensation agreements until the issue is resolved. An unfavorable
resolution of this matter may have a material adverse effect on the Company's
communications revenues.

The computer outsourcing business experienced significant revenue growth in
1998. The inclusion of a full year of revenue from customers which began
service in 1997 and an increase in revenue from the existing customer base,
resulted in a 26% increase in outsourcing revenue. The systems integration
business experienced a 27% increase in revenue in 1998. This increase is
primarily attributable to new acquisitions and a strong demand for Year 2000
renovation during the first six months of 1998 and other systems reengineering
services.

Revenue from coal mines increased slightly in 1998. An increase in alternate
source coal sales to Commonwealth was partially offset by the expiration of a
long-term contract also with Commonwealth. In 1998 the Company and Commonwealth
amended their contract to allow Commonwealth to accelerate delivery of coal.
The amended contract requires Commonwealth to take delivery of its year 2001
coal commitments in 1998, 1999 and 2000. Of the 2001 commitments, 50% was taken
in 1998 and 25% will be taken in both 1999 and 2000. The expiration of the
long-term contract was partially offset by contracts with new customers in
1998. If current market conditions continue, the Company will experience a
significant decline in coal revenue and earnings over the next several years as
delivery requirements under long-term contracts decline as these long-term
contracts begin to expire.

S-31

Other revenue is primarily attributable to CPTC, the owner operator of the
SR91 tollroad in southern California. Revenues increased in 1998 primarily due
to higher traffic counts and increases in toll rates.

Cost of Revenue. Operating expenses increased 22% from $163 million in 1997
to $199 million in 1998 primarily due to expenses incurred in connection with
the Business Plan to expand the communications and information services
businesses. Operating expenses related to communications and information
services revenue in 1998 were $98 million up from $62 million in 1997. Costs
attributable to the XCOM and GeoNet acquisitions as well as costs associated
with the Frontier lease are responsible for an $11 million increase in
operating expenses. Operating expenses for the computer outsourcing and systems
integration business increased $5 million and $20 million in 1998,
respectively. The increase in the computer outsourcing operating expenses is
primarily attributable to the startup expenses associated with the second data
center in Tempe, Arizona. Higher than expected costs for Year 2000 work
resulted in the significant increase in systems integration operating expenses
in 1998. The Company also incurred expenses to refocus its efforts away from
Year 2000 services to systems and software reengineering for Internet Protocol
related applications. Operating expenses related to coal mining were consistent
with the prior year.

Depreciation and Amortization Expense. Depreciation and amortization expense
has increased $46 million from $20 million in 1997. The primary reason for this
increase is the $910 million of capital expenditures in 1998, of which
approximately $481 million was placed in service in 1998. The majority of the
assets placed in service are associated with 15 gateway sites constructed for
the expansion of the communications business. Also contributing to the increase
was the depreciation and amortization on equipment purchased for computer
outsourcing contracts, assets acquired through business acquisitions in 1998
and the amortization of goodwill related to these acquisitions. Depreciation
and amortization will continue to increase in 1999 as additional facilities are
placed in service.

Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and
administrative expenses increased $226 million to $332 million in 1998. This
increase of 213% from 1997 is primarily attributable to the implementation of
the Business Plan, including additional communications and information services
personnel. The total number of communications and information services
employees at December 31, 1998 was approximately 2,200 as compared to
approximately 1,000 at December 27, 1997. Cash compensation included in expense
increased from $14 million in 1997 to $51 million in 1998. In addition, $39
million of non-cash stock based compensation expense was recorded in 1998, of
which $24 million was related to the Company's Outperform Stock Option program
introduced in the second quarter of 1998. These costs are accounted for in
accordance with SFAS No. 123. Professional fees increased $74 million in 1998
primarily for legal costs associated with obtaining licenses, agreements and
technical facilities and other development costs associated with starting to
offer services in U.S. cities. Also included in professional fees is third
party software and associated development costs incurred in developing
integrated business support systems. These expenses were recorded in accordance
with the AICPA Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the Costs of
Computer Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use", which specifically
identifies those costs that should be expensed or capitalized for internally
developed software. Selling, general and administrative expenses are expected
to increase significantly in future periods as the Company continues to
implement the Business Plan.

Write-off of In-process Research and Development. Write-off of in process
research and development was $30 million in 1998. On April 23, 1998 the Company
completed the acquisition of XCOM, a privately held company that developed
certain components necessary for the Company to develop an interface between
its Internet Protocol based network and the existing public switched telephone
network.

S-32

The Company accounted for this transaction, valued at $154 million, as a
purchase. Of the total purchase price, $115 million was originally allocated to
acquired in-process research and development, and was taken as a nondeductible
charge to earnings in the second quarter of 1998. In October 1998, the SEC
issued new guidelines for valuing acquired research and development which are
applied retroactively. Consequently, the Company has reduced the charge by $85
million, which also increases goodwill by a corresponding amount. Goodwill
associated with the XCOM transaction is being amortized over a 5 year period.

The Company believes that its resulting charge for acquired research and
development conforms to the SEC's expressed guideline and methodologies.
However, no assurances can be given that the SEC will not require additional
adjustments.

EBITDA. EBITDA, as defined by the Company, consists of earnings (losses)
before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization, non-cash operating
expenses (including stock-based compensation and in process research and
development charges) and other non-operating income or expenses. The Company
excludes non-cash compensation due to its adoption of the expense recognition
provisions of SFAS No. 123. EBITDA decreased from $84 million in 1997 to ($100)
million in 1998 primarily due to the significant increase in general and
administrative expenses, described above, incurred in connection with the
implementation of the Company's Business Plan. EBITDA is commonly used in the
communications industry to analyze companies on the basis of operating
performance. EBITDA is not intended to represent cash flow for the periods. See
"Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows."

Interest Income. Interest income increased significantly in 1998 to $173
million from $33 million in 1997 as the Company's cash, cash equivalents and
marketable securities balances increased to $3.7 billion at December 31, 1998
from $765 million at December 27, 1997 as a result of the two debt offerings
and the proceeds from the sale of its energy business. Pending utilization of
the cash equivalents and marketable securities in implementing the Business
Plan, the Company intends to continue investing the funds primarily in
government and governmental agency securities. This investment strategy will
provide lower yields on the funds, but is expected to reduce the risk to
principal in the short term prior to using the funds in implementing the
Business Plan.

Interest Expense, Net. Interest expense, net increased significantly from
$15 million in 1997 to $132 million in 1998 due to the completion of the
offering of $2 billion aggregate principal amount of 9 1/8% Senior Notes Due
2008 issued on April 28, 1998 and $834 million aggregate principal amount at
maturity of 10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes Due 2008 issued on December 2, 1998.
The amortization of a portion of the $79 million of debt issuance costs
associated with the Senior Notes and Senior Discount Notes also increased
interest expense in 1998. The Company capitalized $15 million of interest
expense on network construction and business support systems development
projects in 1998.

Equity Losses in Unconsolidated Subsidiaries. Equity losses in
unconsolidated subsidiaries increased to $132 million in 1998 primarily due to
the equity losses attributable to RCN. RCN is the largest single source,
facilities based provider of communications services to the residential markets
primarily in the Northeast and the largest regional Internet service provider
in the Northeast. RCN is also incurring significant costs in developing its
business plan including the acquisitions of several Internet service providers.
RCN's losses increased from $52 million in 1997 to $205 million in 1998. The
Company's proportionate share of these losses, including goodwill amortization,
was $92 million and $26 million in 1998 and 1997, respectively. In 1998, the
Company elected to discontinue its funding of Gateway Opportunity Fund, LP, or
Gateway, which provided venture capital to developing businesses. The Company
recorded losses of $28 million and $15 million in 1998 and 1997, respectively,
to reflect Level 3's equity in losses of the underlying businesses of Gateway.
Also

S-33

included in equity losses are equity earnings of Commonwealth Telephone
Enterprises, Inc., a Pennsylvania public utility providing telephone services,
and equity losses of Cable Michigan prior to its sale in 1998, a cable
television operator in the State of Michigan.

Gain on Equity Investee Stock Transactions. Gain on equity investee stock
transactions was $62 million in 1998. During 1998, RCN issued stock in a public
offering and for certain acquisitions. These transactions decreased the
Company's ownership in RCN from 48% in 1997 to 41% in 1998, but increased its
proportionate share of RCN's net assets. The Company recorded a pre-tax gain of
approximately $62 million to reflect this increase in value.

Gains on Sale of Assets. Gains on sale of assets increased significantly in
1998 due to the sale of Cable Michigan to Avalon Cable of Michigan, Inc. in
November 1998. The Company recognized a gain of approximately $90 million from
the cash for stock transaction. Also included in gains on the disposal of
assets are $8 million and $1 million of gains on the disposal of property,
plant and equipment in 1998 and 1997 respectively, and $9 million of gains on
the sale of marketable securities in both periods.

Income Tax (Provision) Benefit. Income tax (provision) benefit differs from
the expected statutory rate of 35% primarily due to the nondeductible write-off
of the in process research and development costs allocated in the XCOM
transaction, losses incurred by the Company's international subsidiaries which
cannot be included in the consolidated U.S. federal income tax return and state
income taxes. In 1997 the effective rate was less than the expected statutory
rate primarily due to prior year tax adjustments, partially offset by the
effect of nondeductible compensation expense associated with the conversion of
the information services option and SAR plans to the Level 3 Stock Plan.

Financial Condition--June 30, 1999

The Company's working capital increased $291 million during 1999 from $3.5
billion at December 31, 1998 to $3.8 billion at June 30, 1999 primarily due to
the $1.5 billion equity offering completed in March 1999, offset by capital
expenditures for the communications network.

Cash (used in) provided by continuing operations increased from $(62)
million in 1998 to $159 million in 1999 primarily due to the changes in
components of working capital and an increase in interest income. Interest
income increased in 1999 as a result of the proceeds received from the Senior
Notes, Senior Discount Notes and the March 1999 equity offering. The increase
in cash provided by interest income was partially offset by the decrease in
cash provided by operations for the semi-annual payment of interest on the
Senior Notes. Interest payments on the Senior Discount Notes are deferred until
2004. An increase in the costs paid to implement the Business Plan also reduced
cash provided by continuing operations.

Investing activities include the purchase of $3.3 billion of marketable
securities offset by the sales and maturities of securities of $2.8 billion.
The Company also incurred costs of $1.2 billion for capital expenditures,
primarily for the expanding communications business. In addition, the Company
realized $11 million of proceeds from the sale of property, plant and
equipment.

Financing sources in the first six months of 1999 consisted primarily of the
net proceeds of $1.5 billion from the issuance of 28,750,000 shares of Common
Stock, and the exercise of the Company's stock options for $13 million. The
Company also repaid long-term debt of $4 million during the first half of 1999.

S-34

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Since late 1997, the Company has substantially increased the emphasis it
places on and the resources devoted to its communications and information
services business. The Company has commenced the implementation of a plan to
become a facilities-based provider (that is, a provider that owns or leases a
substantial portion of the property, plant and equipment necessary to provide
its services) of a broad range of integrated communications services. To reach
this goal, the Company is expanding substantially the business of its
subsidiary, PKSIS to create, through a combination of construction, purchase
and leasing of facilities and other assets, an advanced, international
facilities based communications network. The Company is designing its network
based on Internet Protocol technology in order to leverage the efficiencies of
this technology to provide lower cost communications services.

The development of the Business Plan will require significant capital
expenditures, a substantial portion of which will be incurred before any
significant related revenues from the Business Plan are expected to be
realized. These expenditures, together with the associated early operating
expenses, will result in substantial negative operating cash flow and
substantial net operating losses for the Company for the foreseeable future.
Although the Company believes that its cost estimates and build-out schedule
are reasonable, the actual construction costs or the timing of the expenditures
may deviate from current estimates. The Company estimates that its capital
expenditures in connection with the Business Plan will approximate $2.5 billion
in 1999. The Company's current liquidity and the cost sharing agreement with
INTERNEXT should be sufficient to fund the currently committed portions of the
Business Plan.

The Company currently estimates that the implementation of the Business
Plan, as currently contemplated, will require between $9 and $11 billion over
the 10 year period of the Business Plan. The Company's ability to implement the
Business Plan and meet its projected growth is dependent upon its ability to
secure substantial additional financing in the future. The Company expects to
meet its additional capital needs with the proceeds from credit facilities and
other borrowings, including the proposed secured credit facility, and sales or
issuance of additional equity securities or additional debt securities. The 9
1/8% senior notes and the 10 1/2% senior discount notes were issued under
indentures which permit the Company and its subsidiaries to incur substantial
amounts of debt. Assuming the offering of the notes is completed, the Company
will have approximately $1.250 billion of securities available for future
issuances under the "universal" shelf registration statement of which the
accompanying prospectus is a part.

Level 3 expects that its subsidiaries will borrow $475 million under these
facilities at the closing of the proposed secured credit facility. The proposed
secured credit facility is currently in general syndication and is subject to
customary conditions for a transaction of this type, including completion of
definitive documentation and finalization of terms and conditions. Level 3
expects to close the proposed secured credit facility by the end of September
1999. Neither the closing of the proposed secured credit facility nor the
closing of this offering of notes is conditioned upon the closing of the other
transaction.

All obligations under the revolving credit facility will be secured by
substantially all of the assets of Level 3 and, subject to certain exceptions,
its wholly owned domestic subsidiaries (other than the borrower under the term
loan facilities). Such assets will also secure a portion of the term loan

S-35

facilities in an amount equal to $100 million plus, with certain exceptions,
the undrawn amount of the revolving credit facility. Additionally, all
obligations under the term loan facilities will be secured by the equipment
that is purchased with the proceeds of the term loan facilities and the lease
rentals derived from the lease of such equipment to the Company's operating
subsidiaries. The Company and, subject to certain exceptions, all its domestic
subsidiaries (other than the borrower under the term loan facilities) will
guarantee all obligations under the revolving credit facility. The Company and,
subject to certain exceptions, all its domestic subsidiaries will guarantee all
obligations under the term loan facilities. See "Description of Other
Indebtedness of Level 3--Proposed Secured Credit Facility."

In addition, the Company may sell or dispose of existing businesses or
investments to fund portions of the Business Plan. The Company may also sell or
lease fiber optic capacity, or access to its conduits. The Company may not be
successful in producing sufficient cash flow, raising sufficient debt or equity
capital on terms that it will consider acceptable, or selling or leasing fiber
optic capacity or access to its conduits. In addition, proceeds from
dispositions of the Company's assets may not reflect the assets' intrinsic
value. Further, expenses may exceed the Company's estimates and the financing
needed may be higher than estimated. Failure to generate sufficient funds may
require the Company to delay or abandon some of its future expansion or
expenditures, which could have a material adverse effect on the implementation
of the Business Plan.

The Company may not be able to obtain such financing if and when it is
needed and if available, such financing may not be on terms acceptable to the
Company. If the Company is unable to obtain additional financing when needed,
it may be required to scale back significantly its Business Plan and, depending
upon cash flow from its existing businesses, reduce the scope of its plans and
operations.

In connection with implementing the Business Plan, management will continue
reviewing the existing businesses of the Company to determine how those
businesses will complement the Company's focus on communications and
information services. If it is decided that an existing business is not
compatible with the communications and information services business and if a
suitable buyer can be found, the Company may dispose of that business.

Year 2000--June 30, 1999

General. The Company's wholly owned subsidiary, Level 3 Communications, LLC,
is a new company that is implementing new technologies to provide Internet
Protocol technology-based communications services to its customers. The Company
has adopted a strategy to select technology vendors and suppliers that provide
products that are represented by such vendors and suppliers to be Year 2000
compliant. In negotiating its vendor and supplier contracts, the Company
secures Year 2000 warranties that address the Year 2000 compliance of the
applicable product(s). As part of the Company's Year 2000 compliance program,
plans will be put into place to test these products to confirm they are Year
2000 ready.

PKS Systems Integration LLC, or PKSSI, which is a subsidiary of PKSIS,
provides a wide variety of information technology services to its customers. In
fiscal year 1998, approximately 57% of the revenue generated by PKSSI related
to projects involving Year 2000 assessment and renovation services performed by
PKSSI for its customers. These contracts generally require PKSSI to identify
date affected fields in certain application software of its customers and, in
many cases, PKSSI undertakes efforts to remediate those date-affected fields so
that Year 2000 data may be processed. Thus, Year 2000 issues affect many of the
services PKSSI provides to its customers. This exposes PKSSI to potential risks
that may include problems with services provided by PKSSI to its customers and
the potential for claims arising under PKSSI's customer contracts. PKSSI
attempts to contractually limit its exposure to liability for Year 2000
compliance issues. However, these contractual limitations may not be effective.

S-36

Outlined below is additional information with respect to the Year 2000
compliance programs that are being pursued by Level 3 Communications, LLC and
PKSIS.

Level 3 Communications, LLC. Level 3 Communications, LLC uses software and
related technologies throughout its business that may be affected by the date
change in the Year 2000. The inability of systems to appropriately recognize
the Year 2000 could result in a disruption of Level 3 Communications, LLC
operations. Level 3 Communications, LLC has one main line of business:
delivery of communications services to commercial clients over fiber optic
cable. The delivery of service will be over Level 3 Communications, LLC owned
cable when the network construction is complete. In the interim, services will
be delivered over both owned and leased lines.

Level 3 Communications, LLC faces three primary Year 2000 issues with
respect to its business. First, Level 3 Communications, LLC must assess the
readiness of its systems that are required to provide its customer's
communications services. Second, Level 3 Communications, LLC must evaluate the
Year 2000 readiness of its internal business support systems. Third, Level 3
Communications, LLC must also verify the readiness of the providers of the
leased lines currently in use or that will be used in the future.

Level 3 Communications, LLC has designated a full-time Year 2000 director
in addition to establishing a program office staffed in part by experienced
Year 2000 consultants. Level 3 Communications, LLC is progressing through a
comprehensive program to evaluate and address the effect of the Year 2000 on
its internal business support systems, and the service delivery systems. The
plans' focus upon Year 2000 issues consists of the following phases:

(I) Assessment--Awareness, commitment, and evaluation which includes a
detailed inventory of systems and services that the Year 2000 may
impact.

(II) Detailed Plan--Establishment of priorities, development of specific
action steps and allocation of resources to address the issues as
outlined in Phase I.

(III) Implementation--Completion of the necessary changes as delineated
in Phase II.

(IV) Verification--Determining whether the conversions implemented in
Phase III have resolved the Year 2000 problem so that date related
calculations will function properly, both as individual units and on an
integrated basis. This will culminate in an end-to-end system test to
ensure that the customer services being delivered by Level 3
Communications, LLC will function properly and that all support services
necessary to business operations will be Year 2000 compliant.

(V) Contingency Plans--Establishment of alternative plans should any of
the services or suppliers that Level 3 Communications, LLC requires to
do business fail to be Year 2000 ready.

With respect to its Year 2000 plans, Level 3 currently has activities
underway in each of the five phases above. The current stage of activities
varies based upon the type of component, system, and/or customer service at
issue.

Business Functions Operational Effect Current Status
- ------------------ ------------------ --------------------
Customer Delivery Systems Inability to Deliver Customer Services Phases I to Phase V*
Internal Business Support Failures of Internal Support Services Phase I to Phase V*
Systems and Customer Billing

* Level 3 anticipates this range of activity to continue through 1999 as it
adds new equipment and services while building its infrastructure.
Additionally, the upgrading of service delivery through its proprietary
systems will require that the delivery systems go through verification with
each new innovation.

S-37

The expenses associated with this project by Level 3 Communications, LLC, as
well as the related potential effect on Level 3 Communications, LLC's earnings,
are not expected to have a material effect on the future operating results or
financial condition of Level 3 Communications, LLC. There can be no assurance,
however, that the Year 2000 problem, and any loss incurred by any customers of
Level 3 as a result of the Year 2000 problem, will not have a material adverse
effect on Level 3 Communications, LLC's financial condition and results of
operations.

Level 3 Communications, LLC has significant relationships and dependencies
with regard to systems and technology provided and supported by third party
vendors and service providers. In particular, the customer delivery systems for
the communications business of Level 3 Communications, LLC are dependent upon
third parties who provide telecommunication services while the infrastructure
continues to be built. As part of its Year 2000 program, Level 3
Communications, LLC has sought to obtain formal Year 2000 compliance
representation from vendors who provide products and services to Level 3
Communications, LLC. The vendor compliance process is being performed
concurrently with the Company's ongoing Year 2000 validation activities. This
compliance process consists of obtaining information from disclosures made
publicly available on company websites, reviewing test plans and results made
available from suppliers, and following up with letters and phone calls to any
vendors who have not made such information available to Level 3 Communications,
LLC as yet.

Because of the aforementioned reliance placed on third party vendors, Level
3 Communications, LLC's estimate of costs to be incurred could change
substantially should one or more of the vendors be unable to timely deliver
Year 2000 compliant products. Level 3 Communications, LLC does not own the
proprietary hardware technology or third party software source code utilized in
its business and therefore, Level 3 Communications, LLC cannot actually
renovate the hardware or third party software identified as having Year 2000
support issues. The standard components supplied by vendors for the customer
delivery systems have been tested in laboratory settings and certified as to
their compliance.

With respect to the contingency plans for Level 3 Communications, LLC, such
plans generally fall into two categories. Concerning the customer delivery
systems of Level 3 Communications, LLC, Level 3 Communications, LLC has certain
redundant and backup facilities, such as on-site generators. With respect to
systems obtained from third party vendors, contingency plans are developed by
Level 3 Communications, LLC on a case by case basis where deemed appropriate.

PKSIS. PKSIS and its subsidiaries use software and related technologies
throughout its business that may be affected by the date change in the Year
2000. The inability of systems to appropriately recognize the Year 2000 could
result in a disruption of PKSIS operations. PKSIS has two main lines of
business: computer outsourcing and systems integration. The computer
outsourcing business is managed by PKS Computer Services LLC, or PKSCS. The
systems integration is managed by PKSSI.

PKSCS generally faces two primary Year 2000 issues with respect to its
business. First, PKSCS must evaluate the Year 2000 readiness of its internal
support systems. Second, PKSCS must assess and, if necessary, upgrade the
operating systems which PKSCS provides for its outsourcing customers. PKSCS
outsourcing customers are responsible for their own application code
remediation.

PKSCS established a corporate-wide Year 2000 program in 1997, which in
relation to other business projects and objectives has been assigned a high
priority, including the designation of a full-time year 2000 director. PKSCS is
progressing through a comprehensive program to evaluate and address the effect
of the Year 2000 on its internal operations and support systems, and the
operating systems which PKSCS is responsible for providing to its outsourcing
customers. Due to the nature of

S-38

its business, PKSCS has developed and is administering approximately twenty
separate Year 2000 project plans. Approximately eighteen of these plans are
devoted to the specific operating systems software upgrades to be undertaken
by PKSCS for its outsourcing customers according to software vendor
specifications. The remaining plans focus upon Year 2000 issues relating to
PKSCS internal support systems. PKSCS is utilizing both internal and external
resources in implementing these plans. These PKSCS plans generally consist of
the following phases:

(I) Assessment--Awareness, commitment, and evaluation, which includes a
detailed inventory of systems and services that the Year 2000 may
impact.

(II) Detailed Plan--Establishment of priorities, development of specific
action steps and allocation of resources to address the issues as
outlined in Phase I.

(III) Implementation--Completion of the necessary changes per vendor
specifications, (that is, replacement or retirement) as outlined in
Phase II.

(IV) Verification--With respect to PKSCS' internal support systems,
determining whether the conversions implemented in Phase III have
resolved the Year 2000 problem so that date related calculations will
function properly, both as individual units and on an integrated basis.

(V) Completion--The final rollout of components into an operational
unit.

With respect to its Year 2000 plans, PKSCS currently has activities
underway in each of Phases III through V. The current stage of activities
varies based upon the type of component, system, and/or customer service at
issue. Some PKSCS customers have delayed or postponed operating system
upgrades to be performed by PKSCS as a result of the customer's delay in its
application code remediation schedule.

PKSSI generally faces two primary Year 2000 issues with respect to its
business. First, PKSSI provides a wide variety of information technology
services to its customers which could potentially expose PKSIS to contractual
liability for Year 2000 related risks if services are not performed in a
timely or satisfactory manner. Second, PKSSI must evaluate and, if necessary,
upgrade or replace its internal business support systems which may have date
dependencies. PKSSI believes the primary internal systems affected by the Year
2000 issue which could have an impact on its business are desktop and network
hardware and software. PKSSI previously completed its Year 2000 assessment of
desktop hardware and software, and, based on vendor representations,
determined that material upgrades or replacements were not required. PKSSI is
continuing to validate these findings and currently plans to do so throughout
the remainder of 1999. PKSSI is also in the process of communicating with its
vendors to assess its servers and communications hardware for Year 2000
readiness.

In fiscal year 1998, approximately 57% of the revenue generated by PKSSI
related to projects involving Year 2000 assessment and renovation services
performed by PKSSI for its customers. This is a reduction from 80% in 1997.
Some of these contracts require PKSSI to identify date affected fields in
certain application software of its customers and, in many cases, PKSSI
undertakes efforts to remediate those date-affected fields so that Year 2000
data may be processed. Thus, Year 2000 issues affect certain services PKSSI
provides to its customers. This exposes PKSSI to potential risks that may
include problems with services provided by PKSSI to its customers and the
potential for claims arising under PKSSI's customer contracts. In some cases
PKSSI has contractual warranties which could require PKSSI to perform Year
2000 related services after the year 2000. PKSSI attempts to contractually
limit its exposure to liability for Year 2000 compliance issues. However,
there can be no assurance as to the effectiveness of such contractual
limitations.

S-39

The following chart describes the status of PKSIS' Year 2000 program with
respect to computer outsourcing services and systems integration services.

Business Functions Current Areas of Focus Operational Impact Current Status
- ------------------ ---------------------- ------------------ --------------

Computer Large & Mid-Range CPU Inability to continue Mid Phase III to
Outsourcing OEM Software critical processing Phase V
Service OS Systems of customer's
Network Equipment systems
Support Facilities

Internal Support Systems Failures of critical Mid Phase III to
& Business Processes Internal Support Services Phase V

Systems Internal Support Systems Failures of critical Assessment of
Integration & Business Processes Internal Support Services desktop hardware
Services and software has
been completed and
is being validated.
Assessment of
services and
communications
hardware is
expected to be
completed by the
end of the third
quarter of 1999.

PKSIS has significant relationships and dependencies with regard to systems
and technology provided and supported by third party vendors and service
providers. In particular, the computer outsourcing business of PKSCS is
dependent upon third parties who provide telecommunication services, electrical
utilities and mainframe and midrange hardware and software providers. As part
of its Year 2000 program, PKSIS has sought to obtain formal Year 2000
compliance representation from vendors who provide products and services to
PKSIS. The vendor compliance process is being performed concurrently with
PKSIS' ongoing Year 2000 remediation activities. PKSCS is also working with its
outsourcing customers to inform them of certain dependencies which exist which
may affect PKSIS' Year 2000 efforts and certain critical actions which PKSIS
believes must be undertaken by the customer in order to allow PKSIS to
implement its Year 2000 efforts concerning the operating software system
provided by PKSCS for its customers.

To date, PKSCS has received written responses from approximately 40% of the
vendors from whom it has sought Year 2000 compliance statements. With respect
to those key third party vendors and suppliers who have failed to respond in
writing, PKSIS is following up directly with such vendors and suppliers and
obtaining information from other sources, such as disclosures made publicly
available on company websites.

Because of this reliance on third party vendors, PKSIS' estimate of costs to
be incurred could change substantially should one or more of the vendors be
unable to timely deliver Year 2000 compliant products. PKSCS does not own the
proprietary hardware technology or third party software

S-40

source code utilized in its business and therefore, PKSCS cannot actually
renovate the hardware or software identified as having Year 2000 support
issues.

The expenses associated with PKSIS' Year 2000 efforts, as well as the
related potential effect on PKSIS' earnings, are not expected to have a
material effect on the future operating results or financial condition of Level
3. There can be no assurance, however, that the Year 2000 problem, and any loss
incurred by any customers of PKSIS as a result of the Year 2000 problem, will
not have a material adverse effect on Level 3's financial condition and results
of operations.

With respect to the contingency plans for PKSCS, such plans generally fall
into two categories: internal support and operating systems. Concerning the
internal support systems of PKSCS, PKSCS has certain redundant and backup
facilities, such as on-site generators, water supply and pumps. PKSCS has
undertaken contingency plans with respect to these internal systems by
performing due diligence with the vendors of these systems in order to
investigate the Year 2000 compliance status of these systems, and such systems
are tested on a monthly basis. With respect to the operating systems obtained
from third party vendors and maintained by PKSCS for its outsourcing customers,
contingency plans are developed by PKSCS and its customers on a case by case
basis as requested, contracted and paid for by PKSCS' customers. However, there
is no contingency plan for the failure of operating system software to properly
handle Year 2000 date processing. If the operating system software provided to
PKSIS by third party vendors fails at the PKSCS data center, such vendor
supplied software is expected to fail everywhere and no immediate work around
could be supplied by PKSCS. In the event computer hardware supplied by PKSCS
for its outsourcing customer fails, some customers have contracted for
contingency plans through disaster recovery arrangements with a third party
which supplies disaster recovery services.

Costs of Year 2000 Issues. Level 3 currently expects to incur approximately
$12.5 million of costs in aggregate, through the end of 1999. These costs
primarily arise from direct costs of Level 3 employees verifying equipment and
software as Year 2000 ready. However, Level 3 does not separately track the
internal employee costs incurred for its Year 2000 projects. Level 3 does track
all material costs incurred for its Year 2000 projects as well as all costs
incurred by the Year 2000 program office. Level 3 has estimated the time and
effort expended by its employees on Year 2000 projects based on an analysis of
Year 2000 project plans.

PKSIS incurred approximately $4.2 million of costs to implement its Year
2000 program through 1998, and currently expects to incur an additional
approximately $3.6 million of costs in aggregate, through the end of 1999.
These costs primarily arise from direct costs of PKSCS employees working on
upgrades per vendor specifications of operating system software for PKSCS
outsourcing customers and the cost of vendor supplied operating systems
software upgrades and the cost of additional hardware. However, PKSIS does not
separately track the internal costs incurred for its Year 2000 projects and
does not track the cost and time its employees spend on Year 2000 projects.
PKSCS has estimated the time and effort expended by its employees on Year 2000
projects based on an analysis of Year 2000 project plans. Labor costs for
PKSCS' Year 2000 projects were estimated to be $2.1 million for 1998 and are
estimated to be approximately $1 million dollars for 1999 through September
1999, when such projects are currently scheduled for completion. These labor
costs will necessarily increase if such projects take longer to complete. Costs
for software upgrades, additional equipment costs and a test system for PKSCS'
Year 2000 projects were estimated to be $2.1 million for 1998 and are estimated
to be $2.5 million for 1999. Such costs are not available for PKSSI but are not
believed to be material. Year 2000 costs for PKSSI are believed to be
substantially less than PKSCS and focus primarily on the cost of evaluating
and, if necessary, upgrading network and desktop hardware and software. The
costs incurred by PKSSI for performing Year 2000 services for its customers are
included within PKSSI's pricing for such services.

S-41

Risks Associated with Year 2000 Issues. Due to the complexity of the issues
presented by the Year 2000 date change and the proposed solutions, and the
interdependence of external vendor support services, it is difficult to assess
with any degree of accuracy the future effect of a failure in any one aspect or
combination of aspects of the Company's Year 2000 activities. The Company
cannot provide assurance that actual results will not differ from management's
estimates due to the complexity of upgrading the systems and related
technologies surrounding the Year 2000 issue.

Failure by the Company to complete its Year 2000 activities in a timely or
complete manner, within its estimate of projected costs, or failure by third
parties, such as financial institutions and related networks, software
providers, local telephone companies, long distance providers and electricity
providers among others, to correct their systems, with which the Company's
systems interconnect, could have a material effect on the Company's future
results of operations and financial position. Other factors which might cause a
material difference from management's estimate would include, but not be
limited to, the availability and cost of personnel with appropriate skills and
abilities to locate and upgrade relevant computer systems and similar
uncertainties, as well as the related effects on the Company of the Year 2000
problem on the economy in general, or on the Company's business partners and
customers in particular.

Market Risk--June 30, 1999

Level 3 is subject to market risks arising from changes in interest rates,
equity prices and foreign exchange rates. The Company's exposure to and
policies regarding interest rate risk has not changed significantly from
December 31, 1998.

Level 3 continues to hold positions in certain publicly traded entities,
primarily Commonwealth Telephone and RCN. The Company accounts for these two
investments using the equity method. The market value of these investments is
$1.5 billion as of June 30, 1999, which is significantly higher than their
carrying value of $362 million. The Company does not currently have plans to
dispose of these investments, however, if any such transaction occurred, the
value received for the investments would be affected by the market value of the
underlying stock at the time of any such transaction. A 20% decrease in the
price of Commonwealth Telephone and RCN stock would result in approximately a
$308 million decrease in fair value of these investments. The Company does not
currently utilize financial instruments to minimize its exposure to price
fluctuations in equity securities.

The Company's Business Plan includes developing and constructing networks in
Europe and Asia. As of June 30, 1999, the Company has invested significant
amounts of capital in Europe and will continue to expand its presence in Europe
and Asia in the second half of 1999. To date, the Company has not utilized
financial instruments to minimize its exposure to foreign currency
fluctuations. The Company will continue to analyze risk management strategies
to reduce foreign currency exchange risk in the future.

The change in equity security prices is based on hypothetical movements and
is not necessarily indicative of the actual results that may occur. Future
earnings and losses will be affected by actual fluctuations in interest rates,
equity prices and foreign currency rates.

S-42

INDUSTRY OVERVIEW

History and Industry Development

Telecommunications Industry. Prior to its court-ordered breakup in 1984 (the
"Divestiture"), AT&T largely monopolized the telecommunications services in the
United States even though technological developments had begun to make it
economically possible for companies (primarily entrepreneurial enterprises) to
compete for segments of the communications business.

The present structure of the U.S. telecommunications market is largely the
result of the Divestiture. As part of the Divestiture, seven local exchange
holding companies were created to offer services in geographically defined
areas called LATAs. The RBOCs were separated from the long distance provider,
AT&T, resulting in the creation of two distinct market segments: local exchange
and long distance. The Divestiture provided for direct, open competition in the
long distance segment.

The Divestiture did not provide for competition in the local exchange
market. However, several factors served to promote competition in the local
exchange market, including: (i) customer desire for an alternative to the
RBOCs, also referred to as the ILECs; (ii) technological advances in the
transmission of data and video requiring greater capacity and reliability than
ILEC networks were able to accommodate; (iii) a monopoly position and rate of
return-based pricing structure which provided little incentive for the ILECs to
upgrade their networks; and (iv) the significant fees, called "access charges,"
that long distance carriers were required to pay to the ILECs to access the
ILECs' networks.

The first competitors in the local exchange market, designated as CAPs by
the FCC, were established in the mid-1980s. Most of the early CAPs were
entrepreneurial enterprises that operated limited networks in the central
business districts of major cities in the United States where the highest
concentration of voice and data traffic is found. Since most states prohibited
competition for local switched services, early CAP services primarily consisted
of providing dedicated, unswitched connections to long distance carriers and
large businesses. These connections allowed high-volume users to avoid the
relatively high prices charged by ILECs for dedicated, unswitched connections.

As CAPs proliferated during the latter part of the 1980s, certain federal
and state regulators issued rulings which favored competition and promised to
open local markets to new entrants. These rulings allowed CAPs to offer a
number of new services, including, in certain states, a broad range of local
exchange services, including local switched services. Companies providing a
combination of CAP and switched local services are sometimes referred to as
CLECs. This pro-competitive trend continued with the passage of the
Telecommunications Act of 1996 (the "Telecom Act"), which provided a legal
framework for introducing competition to local telecommunications services
throughout the United States.

Over the last three years, several significant transactions have been
announced representing consolidation of the U.S. telecom industry. Among the
ILECs, Bell Atlantic and NYNEX merged in August 1997, Pacific Telesis Group and
SBC Communications merged in April 1997, SBC Communications and Ameritech have
proposed a merger and GTE and Bell Atlantic have proposed a merger. Long
distance providers have sought to enhance their positions in local markets,
through transactions such as AT&T's acquisition of Teleport Communications
Group and of Tele-Communications, Inc., WorldCom's mergers with MFS and Brooks
Fiber Properties and Qwest's proposed acquisition of US West. They have also
sought to otherwise improve their competitive positions, through transactions
such as WorldCom's merger with MCI.

Many international markets resemble that of the United States prior to the
Divestiture. In many countries, traditional telecommunications services have
been provided through a monopoly provider,

S-43

frequently controlled by the national government, such as a Post, Telegraph and
Telephone Company. In recent years, there has been a trend toward
liberalization of many of these markets, particularly in Europe. Led by the
introduction of competition in the United Kingdom, the European Union mandated
open competition as of January 1998. Similar trends are emerging, albeit more
slowly, in Asia.

Internet Industry. The Internet is a global collection of interconnected
computer networks that allows commercial organizations, educational
institutions, government agencies and individuals to communicate
electronically, access and share information and conduct business. The Internet
originated with the ARPAnet, a restricted network that was created in 1969 by
the United States Department of Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency to
provide efficient and reliable long distance data communications among the
disparate computer systems used by government-funded researchers and academic
organizations. The networks that comprise the Internet are connected in a
variety of ways, including by the public switched telephone network and by high
speed, dedicated leased lines. Communications on the Internet are enabled by
Internet Protocol, an inter-networking standard that enables communication
across the Internet regardless of the hardware and software used.

Over time, as businesses have begun to utilize e-mail, file transfer and,
more recently, intranet and extranet services, commercial usage has become a
major component of Internet traffic. In 1989, the U.S. government effectively
ceased directly funding any part of the Internet backbone. In the mid-1990s,
contemporaneous with the increase in commercial usage of the Internet, a new
type of provider called an ISP became more prevalent. ISPs offer access, e-
mail, customized content and other specialized services and products aimed at
allowing both commercial and residential customers to obtain information from,
transmit information to, and utilize resources available on the Internet.

ISPs generally operate networks composed of dedicated lines leased from
ILECs, CLECs and ISPs using Internet Protocol based switching and routing
equipment and server-based applications and databases. Customers are connected
to the ISP's POP by facilities obtained by the customer or the ISP from either
ILECs or CLECs through a dedicated access line or the placement of a circuit-
switched local telephone call to the ISP.

Internet Protocol Communications Technology. There are two widely used
switching technologies in currently deployed communications networks: circuit-
switching systems and packet-switching systems. Circuit-switch based
communications systems establish a dedicated channel for each communication
(such as a telephone call for voice or fax), maintain the channel for the
duration of the call, and disconnect the channel at the conclusion of the call.
Packet-switch based communications systems format the information to be
transmitted, such as e-mail, voice, fax and data into a series of shorter
digital messages called "packets." Each packet consists of a portion of the
complete message plus the addressing information to identify the destination
and return address.

Packet-switch based systems offer several advantages over circuit-switch
based systems, particularly the ability to commingle packets from several
communications sources together simultaneously onto a single channel. For most
communications, particularly those with bursts of information followed by
periods of "silence," the ability to commingle packets provides for superior
network utilization and efficiency, resulting in more information being
transmitted through a given communication channel. There are, however, certain
disadvantages to packet-switch based systems as currently implemented. Rapidly
increasing demands for data, in part driven by the Internet traffic volumes,
are straining capacity and contributing to latency (delays) and interruptions
in communications transmissions.

On June 23, 1999 Level 3 announced a minimum four year, $250 million
strategic agreement with Lucent Technologies to purchase Lucent systems,
including software switches or "softswitches." The minimum purchase commitment
is subject to certain conditions and has the potential to grow to $1 billion
over five years.

S-44

Telecommunications Services Market

Overview of U.S. Market. The traditional U.S. market for telecommunications
services can be divided into three basic sectors: long distance services, local
exchange services and Internet access services. In 1998, it is estimated that
local exchange services accounted for revenues of $96.8 billion, long distance
services generated revenues of $110.5 billion and Internet access revenues
totaled $8.3 billion. Revenues for both local exchange and long distance
services include amounts charged by long distance carriers and subsequently
paid to ILECs (or, where applicable, CLECs) for long distance access.

Long Distance Services. A long distance telephone call can be envisioned as
consisting of three segments. Starting with the originating customer, the call
travels along an ILEC or CLEC network to a long distance carrier's POP. At the
POP, the call is combined with other calls and sent along a long distance
network to a POP on the long distance carrier's network near where the call
will terminate. The call is then sent from this POP along an ILEC or CLEC
network to the terminating customer. Long distance carriers provide only the
connection between the two local networks, and pay access charges to LECs for
originating and terminating calls.

The following diagram is a simplified illustration of a typical long
distance call:

[GRAPHIC]

Local Exchange Services. A local call is one that does not require the
services of a long distance carrier. In general, the local exchange carrier
connects end user customers within a LATA and also provides the local portion
of most long distance calls.

S-45

The following diagram is a simplified illustration of a typical local call:

[GRAPHIC]

Internet Service. Internet services are generally provided in at least two
distinct segments. A local network connection is required from the ISP customer
to the ISP's local facilities. For large, communication-intensive users and for
content providers, these connections are typically unswitched, dedicated
connections provided by ILECs or CLECs, either as independent service providers
or, in some cases, by a company which is both a CLEC and an ISP. For
residential and small/medium business users, these connections are generally
PSTN connections obtained on a dial-up access basis as a local exchange
telephone call. Once a local connection is made to the ISP's local facilities,
information can be transmitted and obtained over a packet-switched Internet
Protocol data network, which may consist of segments provided by many
interconnected networks operated by a number of ISPs. This collection of
interconnected networks makes up the Internet. A key feature of Internet
architecture and packet-switching is that a single dedicated channel between
communication points is never established, which distinguishes Internet-based
services from the PSTN.

The following diagram is a simplified illustration of a typical Internet
access service:

[GRAPHIC]

Overview of International Market. The traditional market for
telecommunications services outside of the United States can also be divided
into three basic sectors: long distance services, local exchange services and
Internet access services. In 1998, it is estimated that local exchange services
accounted for revenues of $124.6 billion, long distance services generated
revenues of $199.6 billion and Internet access revenues totaled $7.1 billion.

S-46

Internet Protocol Network and Interconnection. The Company designed the
Level 3 network to be optimized for Internet Protocol based communications,
rather than circuit-switch based communications such as that utilized by the
PSTN. The network was designed with the goal of providing the Company with the
ability to adapt its facilities, hardware and software to future technology
developments in packet-switch based communications systems.

There are many Internet Protocol networks currently in operation. While
generally adequate for data transmission needs, these networks usually are not
configured to provide the voice quality, real-time communications requirements
of a traditional telephone call. With current technology, this quality can only
be achieved by providing a substantial cushion of communications capacity. In
addition, existing voice-over Internet Protocol services generally require
either customized end-user equipment or the dialing of "access codes" or the
following of other similar special procedures to initiate a call. There are
also concerns about the reliability and security of existing Internet Protocol
voice networks.

The Company has developed its Internet Protocol voice services so that
customers will not be required to dial access codes or follow other special
procedures to initiate a call. The Company and other technology providers have
developed, and we are commercially testing, softswitch technology to enable the
transmission of traffic seamlessly between a router-based Internet Protocol
network and the circuit-based PSTN. When commercially deployed, this technology
will provide the Level 3 network with the same ubiquity of the PSTN.
Specifically, this technology will provide Level 3 with (1) the ability to
originate PSTN telephone traffic from an ILEC's switch (when the origination
point is not on the Level 3 network), (2) route the traffic over the Level 3
network and (3) deliver the traffic either (a) directly to its destination (if
the destination is on the Level 3 network) or (b) to an interconnection point
where the traffic is transferred back to the PSTN (the routing of traffic to
this interconnection point will be determined based on a least-cost routing
criteria). Level 3 expects to be able to obtain the benefits of packet-switch
based communications protocols on its network, while allowing its customers to
use their existing equipment, telephone numbers and dialing procedures, without
additional access codes, for routing the call to the Level 3 network. Level 3
believes that by building its own network with significant excess capacity,
expandability and the latest technological advances in network design and
equipment and having the ability to route calls over the PSTN in the event of
service disruptions, the other significant issues associated with Internet
Protocol voice transmission (quality, latency, reliability and security) will
have been satisfactorily addressed. The Company began commercially testing its
Internet Protocol long distance voice and fax transmission services in the
second quarter of 1999. In its testing, the Company is evaluating the
scalability of the softswitch technology and the necessary business support
systems required to commercially launch its Internet Protocol long distance
voice and fax services. The Company and others are developing similar
technology for local voice and fax transmissions. The Company currently
anticipates that it will begin commercial testing of Internet Protocol local
voice and fax transmission services in the first half of 2000. See "Risk
Factors--A failure to commercially deploy satisfactory voice or fax technology
for Internet Protocol networks could adversely affect our business."

On November 16, 1998, Level 3 and Bell Communications Research Inc.
announced the merger of their respective specifications for a new protocol
designed to bridge between the current circuit-based PSTN and emerging Internet
Protocol based networks. The merged specification, called the Media Gateway
Control Protocol, or MGCP, represents a combination of the Internet Protocol
Device Control, or lPDC, specification developed by a consortium formed by
Level 3 and made up of leading communications hardware and software companies,
and the Simple Gateway Control protocol, developed by Bell Communications
Research and Cisco Systems. The MGCP specification is available without a fee
to service providers and hardware and software vendors interested in
implementing it in their networks and equipment.

The significance of MGCP is that when implemented it will provide customers
with a seamless interconnection between traditional PSTN and the newer Internet
Protocol technology networks. Level 3 believes that this integration will
enable customers to benefit from the lower cost of Internet

S-47

Protocol network services, including voice and fax, without modifying existing
telephone and fax equipment or dialing access codes. Level 3 plans to use MGCP
in the development of its own network.

On May 13, 1999, a group of leading telecommunications companies announced
the formation of the International Softswitch Consortium, or the "Consortium."
Level 3 was one of the founding members of this Consortium. The purpose of the
organization is to promote open standards and protocols and new application
development for the distributed set of hardware and software platforms that are
referred to as softswitches and can seamlessly interconnect the PSTN with
information and applications currently available only over the Internet. The
Consortium is the first group to focus exclusively on interconnection between
Internet Protocol networks and the PSTN, and is promoting worldwide
compatibility and interoperability of these networks. The Consortium's charter
also calls for it to act as a catalyst in stimulating independent software
vendors to develop value-added services for service providers and network users
of Internet Protocol networks.

S-48

BUSINESS

Level 3 engages in the communications, information services and coal mining
businesses through ownership of operating subsidiaries and substantial equity
positions in public companies. In late 1997, the Company announced the Business
Plan to increase substantially its information services business and to expand
the range of services it offers by building an advanced, international
facilities based communications network based on Internet Protocol technology.

History

The Company was incorporated as Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. in Delaware in 1941
to continue a construction business founded in Omaha, Nebraska in 1884. In
subsequent years, the Company invested a portion of the cash flow generated by
its construction activities in a variety of other businesses. The Company
entered the coal mining business in 1943, the telecommunications business
(consisting of MFS and, more recently, an investment in C-TEC Corporation and
its successors RCN, Commonwealth Telephone and Cable Michigan, Inc. ) in 1988,
the information services business in 1990 and the alternative energy business,
through an investment in MidAmerican, in 1991. Level 3 also has made
investments in several development-stage ventures.

In the last three years, the Company has distributed to its stockholders a
portion of its telecommunications business, split off its construction business
and sold its investments in the alternative energy sector. In 1995, the Company
distributed to the holders of Class D Stock all of its shares of MFS. In the
seven years from 1988 to 1995, the Company invested approximately $500 million
in MFS; at the time of the distribution to stockholders in 1995, the Company's
holdings in MFS had a market value of approximately $1.75 billion. In December
1996, MFS was purchased by WorldCom in a transaction valued at $14.3 billion.

In December 1997, the Company's stockholders ratified the decision of the
Board to effect the split-off separating the Construction Group. As a result of
the split-off, which was completed on March 31, 1998, the Company no longer
owns any interest in the Construction Group. In conjunction with the split-off,
the Company changed its name to "Level 3 Communications, Inc.," and the
Construction Group changed its name to "Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc."

In January 1998, the Company completed the sale to MidAmerican of its energy
investments, consisting primarily of a 24% equity interest in MidAmerican. The
Company received proceeds of approximately $1.16 billion from this sale, and as
a result recognized an after-tax gain of approximately $324 million in 1998.

On November 6, 1998, Avalon Cable of Michigan, Inc. acquired all the
outstanding stock of Cable Michigan. Level 3 received approximately $129
million in cash for its interest in Cable Michigan and recognized a pre-tax
gain of approximately $90 million.

Business Plan

Since late 1997, the Company has substantially increased the emphasis it
places on and the resources devoted to its communications and information
services business. Since that time, the Company has become a facilities based
provider (that is, a provider that owns or leases a substantial portion of the
plant, property and equipment necessary to provide its services) of a broad
range of integrated communications services. The Company has expanded
substantially the business of its subsidiary PKSIS and is creating, through a
combination of construction, purchase and leasing of facilities and other
assets, an advanced, international, facilities based communications network.
The Company designed the Level 3 network based on Internet Protocol technology
in order to leverage the efficiencies of this technology to provide lower cost
communications services.

S-49

Market and Technology Opportunity. The Company believes that, as technology
advances, a comprehensive range of both consumer and business communications
and information services will be provided over networks utilizing Internet
Protocol technology. These services will include traditional voice services and
fax transmission, as well as other data services such as Internet access and
virtual private networks. The Company believes this shift has begun, and over
time should accelerate, for the following reasons:

. Efficiency. As a packet-switched technology, Internet Protocol
technology generally uses network capacity more efficiently than the
traditional circuit-switched PSTN. This is because capacity in a packet
switched network is shared between end points only when they are
communicating at any given time, whereas in circuit switched networks,
capacity is reserved between end points communicating even when no
information is actually being transmitted. Therefore, services including
voice, e-mail and file transfer can be provided for lower cost over a
network using Internet Protocol technology.

. Open Protocol. Internet Protocol technology is an open protocol (a non-
proprietary standard) which allows for market driven development of new
services and applications for Internet Protocol networks. In contrast,
the PSTN is based on proprietary protocols, which are governed and
maintained by international standards bodies that are generally
controlled by government-affiliated entities and slower to accept
change.

. Improving Technologies. The Company and other technology companies have
developed solutions to address problems associated with certain Internet
Protocol based applications that use the public Internet. For example,
typical voice over Internet Protocol solutions are characterized by
cumbersome two-stage dialing requirements, latency (delay through the
network which can negatively affect timing sensitive communications such
as voice and fax), quality and concerns about adequate security and
reliability. Level 3's Internet Protocol voice technology, now being
commercially tested, provides a seamless interconnection with the PSTN
using softswitch architecture.

. Open Architecture. The open architecture of Level 3's distributed
network enables new competition among suppliers for the individual
components of the Internet Protocol voice switching system. The Company
believes that this competition amongst vendors will enable more rapid
improvement in the price/performance ratio of individual network
components and thereby lower network cost.

Level 3's Strategy. The Company is seeking to capitalize on the benefits of
Internet Protocol technology by pursuing the Business Plan. Key elements of the
Company's strategy include:

. Become the Low Cost Provider of Communications Services. Our network is
designed to provide high quality communications services at a lower
cost. For example, the Level 3 network is being constructed using
multiple conduits to allow the Company to cost-effectively deploy future
generations of optical networking components and thereby expand capacity
and reduce unit costs. In addition, the Company's strategy is to
maximize the use of open, non-proprietary interfaces in the design of
its network software and hardware. This approach is intended to provide
Level 3 with the ability to purchase the most cost-effective network
equipment from multiple vendors. New technologies such as packet-
switching will also enhance the efficiencies of our network.

. Combine Latest Generations of Fiber and Electronics. In order to achieve
unit cost reductions for transmission capacity, Level 3 has designed its
network with multiple conduits to deploy successive generations of fiber
to exploit improvements in transmission electronics. Optimizing
transmission electronics to exploit specific generations of fiber optic
technology currently provides transmission capacity on the new fiber
more cost effectively than deploying new electronics on previous
generations of fiber.

S-50

. Offer a Comprehensive Range of Communications Services. The Company
provides a comprehensive range of communications services over the Level
3 network, including private line, colocation, Internet access and
managed modem. The Company is currently commercially testing voice and
fax transmission services. We are also offering dark fiber along our
local and intercity networks on a long term lease basis.

. Provide Seamless Interconnection to the PSTN. The Company and other
technology providers have developed, and we are currently commercially
testing, technology to allow seamless interconnection of the Level 3
network with the PSTN for long distance voice and fax transmissions. The
Company and others are developing similar technology for local voice and
fax transmission services. A seamless interconnection will allow
customers to use Level 3's Internet Protocol based services without
modifying existing telephone and fax equipment or existing dialing
procedures (that is, without the need to dial access codes or follow
other similar special procedures). The Company's managed modem service
currently uses softswitch technology to seamlessly interconnect to the
PSTN.

. Accelerate Market Roll-out. To support the launch of its services and
develop a customer base in advance of completing the construction of its
network, Level 3 has begun offering services in 21 U.S. cities and in
London, Paris, Amsterdam and Frankfurt over a combination of leased
local and intercity facilities. Over time, these leased networks will be
displaced by networks that the Company is constructing.

. Expand Target Market Opportunities. The Company's distribution strategy
is to utilize a direct sales force focused on communications intensive
and web centric businesses. These businesses include ISPs, application
service providers, content providers, systems integrators, next
generation carriers, web-hosting companies, streaming media companies
and Internet Protocol based storage providers. Providing continually
declining bandwidth costs to these companies is at the core of the
Company's market enabling strategy.

. Develop Advanced Business Support Systems. The Company is developing a
substantial, scalable and web-enabled business support system
infrastructure specifically designed to enable the Company to offer
services efficiently to its targeted customers. The Company believes
that this system will reduce its operating costs, give its customers
direct control over some of the services they buy from the Company and
allow the Company to grow rapidly without redesigning the architecture
of its business support system.

. Leverage Existing Information Services Capabilities. The Company is
expanding its existing capabilities in computer network systems
integration, consulting, outsourcing and software reengineering, with
particular emphasis on the conversion of legacy software systems to
systems that are compatible with Internet Protocol networks and web
browser access.

. Attract and Motivate High Quality Employees. The Company has developed
programs designed to attract and retain employees with the technical
skills necessary to implement the Business Plan. The programs include
the Company's Shareworks stock purchase plan and its Outperform Stock
Option program.

Competitive Advantages. The Company believes that it has the following
competitive advantages that, together with its strategy, will assist it in
implementing the Business Plan:

. Experienced Management Team. Level 3 has assembled a management team
that it believes is well suited to implement the Business Plan. Most of
Level 3's senior management was involved in leading the development and
marketing of telecommunications products and in designing, constructing
and managing intercity, metropolitan and international networks.

. A More Readily Upgradable Network Infrastructure. Level 3's network
design takes advantage of recent innovations, incorporating many of the
features that are not present in

S-51

older communication networks, and provides Level 3 flexibility to take
advantage of future developments and innovations. Level 3 has designed
the transmission network to optimize all aspects of fiber and
electronics simultaneously as a system to deliver the lowest unit cost
to its customers. As fiber and transmission electronic technology
changes, Level 3 expects to realize new unit cost improvements by
deploying the latest fiber and transmission electronics technology in
available empty or spare conduit in the multiple conduit Level 3
network. The Company believes that the spare conduit design of the Level
3 network will enable Level 3 to effect this deployment more quickly and
at lower cost than other carriers.

. Integrated End-to-End Network Platform. Level 3's strategy is to deploy
network infrastructure in major metropolitan areas and to link these
networks with significant intercity networks in North America and
Europe. The Company believes that the integration of its local and
intercity networks will expand the scope and reach of its on-net
customer coverage, and facilitate the uniform deployment of
technological innovations as the Company manages its future upgrade
paths.

. Systems Integration Capabilities. The Company believes that its ability
to offer computer outsourcing and systems integration services,
particularly services relating to allowing a customer's legacy systems
to be accessed with web browsers, will provide additional opportunities
for selling the Company's products and services.

The Level 3 Network

An important element of the Business Plan is the development of the Level 3
network, an advanced, international, facilities based communications network
optimized for Internet Protocol technology. Today, the Company is primarily
offering its communications services using local and intercity facilities that
are leased from third parties. This enables the Company to offer services
during the construction of its own facilities. Over time, the portion of the
Company's network that is owned by the Company will increase and the portion
of the facilities leased will decrease. Over the next two to three years, the
Company's network is expected to encompass:

. an intercity network covering nearly 16,000 miles in North America;

. leased or owned local networks in 56 North American markets;

. an intercity network covering approximately 4,750 miles across Europe;

. leased or owned local networks in 23 European and Pacific Rim markets;
and

. transoceanic capacity, including a 1.28 Tbps transatlantic cable system.

See "Risk Factors--Difficulties in constructing our network could increase its
estimated costs and delay its scheduled completion."

Intercity Networks. The Company's nearly 16,000 mile fiber optic intercity
network in North America will consist of the following:

. Rights-of-way ("ROW") from a number of third parties including
railroads, highway commissions and utilities. The Company has procured
these rights from sources that maximize the security and quality of the
Company's installed network. The Company has secured 100% of the ROW
required for the planned North American intercity network. It has
obtained these rights pursuant to agreements with railroads, state and
local departments of transportation, utilities, pipeline companies and
others.

. Multiple conduits connecting local networks in approximately 200 North
American cities. In 56 of those cities, the Company expects to have
local networks. In general, Level 3 will install groups of 10 to 12
conduits in its intercity network. The Company believes that the
availability of spare conduit will allow it to deploy future
technological innovations in optical networking components as well as
providing Level 3 with the flexibility to offer conduit to other
entities.

S-52

. Initial installation of optical fiber strands designed to accommodate
dense wave division multiplexing transmission technology. This fiber
allows deployment of equipment which transmits signals on 32 or more
individual wavelengths of light per strand, thereby significantly
increasing the capacity of the Company's network relative to older
networks which generally use optical fiber strands that transmit fewer
wavelengths of light per strand. In addition, the Company believes that
the installation of newer optical fibers will allow a combination of
greater wavelengths of light per strand, higher digital transmission
speeds and greater spacing of network electronics. The Company also
believes that each new generation of optical fiber will allow increases
in the performance of these aspects of the fiber and will result in
lower unit costs.

. High speed SONET transmission equipment employing self-healing
protection switching and designed for high quality and reliable
transmission.

. A design that maximizes the use of open, non-proprietary hardware and
software interfaces to allow less costly upgrades as hardware and
software technology improves.

To support the launch of its services in the third quarter of 1998, the
Company leased intercity capacity from two providers, connecting the first 21
Level 3 North American markets. This leased capacity will be displaced over
time by Level 3's North American intercity network.

On July 20, 1998, Level 3 entered into a network construction cost-sharing
agreement with INTERNEXT, LLC, a subsidiary of NEXTLINK Communications, Inc.
The agreement, which is valued at $700 million, calls for INTERNEXT to acquire
the right to use 24 fibers and certain associated facilities installed along
the entire route of Level 3's North American intercity network in the United
States. INTERNEXT will pay Level 3 as segments of the intercity network are
completed which will reduce the overall cost of the network to the Company. The
network as provided to INTERNEXT will not include the necessary electronics
that allow the fiber to carry communications transmissions. Also, under the
terms of the agreement, INTERNEXT has the right to an additional conduit for
its exclusive use and to share costs and capacity in certain future fiber cable
installations in Level 3 conduits.

S-53

The following diagram depicts the currently planned North American intercity
network when fully constructed:

[GRAPHIC]

The North American intercity network is expected to be completed during the
first quarter of 2001. Deployment of the North American intercity network will
be accomplished through simultaneous construction efforts in multiple
locations, with different portions being completed at different times. As of
August 1, 1999, the Company had completed 3,375 route miles of the intercity
network and had an additional approximately 7,000 route miles under
construction.

In Europe, the Company is deploying an approximately 4,750 mile fiber optic
intercity network with characteristics similar to those of the North American
intercity network. As in North America, the Company will provide initial
service in Europe over a leased line and dark fiber network that will be
displaced over time by the intercity network owned by the Company. In the
Pacific Rim, the Company currently intends to provide service over a leased
line intercity network and long term leases of submarine cable capacity.

On April 29, 1999, Level 3 announced that it had finalized contracts
relating to construction of Ring 1 of its European network in France, Belgium,
the Netherlands, Germany and the United Kingdom. Ring 1, which is approximately
2,000 miles, will connect Paris, Frankfurt, Amsterdam, Brussels and London. The
network is expected to be ready for service by September 2000. Ring 1 is part
of the approximate 4,750 mile intercity network that will ultimately connect a
minimum of 13 local city networks in Europe. This European network will be
linked to the Level 3 North American intercity network by the Level 3
transatlantic 1.28 Tbps cable system currently under development, also expected
to be ready for service by September 2000.

On July 26, 1999, the Company also announced two important developments of
its European network build with agreements with Eurotunnel and Alcatel.
Eurotunnel will install and supply Level 3 with multiple cross-Channel cables
between the United Kingdom and France through the high-security service tunnel.
The first of these cables will be completed by the first quarter of 2000.
Subsequent cables will be installed to upgrade and expand the network as and
when required or when new fiber technology becomes available. Alcatel will
provide Level 3 with a cross-Channel undersea cable link between the United
Kingdom and Belgium. Alcatel will design, develop, and install an undersea
cable to link the Level 3 network between the United Kingdom and Belgium. The
cable system is already under development and will be complete by the end of
1999.

S-54

In addition, on May 4, 1999, Level 3 and Colt Telecom Group plc announced an
agreement to share costs for the construction of European networks. The
agreement calls for Level 3 to share construction costs of Colt's planned 1,600
mile intercity German network linking Berlin, Cologne, Dusseldorf, Frankfurt,
Hamburg, Munich and Stuttgart. In return, Colt will share construction costs of
Ring 1 of Level 3's planned European network.

The Company has entered into transoceanic capacity agreements that will link
Level 3's North American, European and Pacific Rim intercity networks. One
agreement provides for Level 3's participation in the construction of an
undersea cable system that will connect Japan and the United States by mid-year
2000. The remaining agreements relate to the Company's transatlantic capacity.
These agreements are in addition to the agreement relating to the Company's
1.28 Tbps transatlantic cable system.

Local Market Infrastructure. The Company's local facilities include fiber
optic networks, in a SONET ring configuration, connecting Level 3's intercity
network gateway sites to ILEC and CLEC central offices, long distance carrier
POPs, buildings housing communication-intensive end users and Internet peering
and transit facilities.

The Company has secured approximately 2.7 million square feet of space for
its gateway facilities as of August 1999 and has completed the buildout of
approximately 1.2 million square feet of this space. The Company's gateway
facilities are being designed to house local sales staff, operational staff,
the Company's transmission and Internet Protocol routing/switching facilities
and technical space to accommodate colocation of equipment by high-volume Level
3 customers, such as ISPs, in an environmentally controlled, secure site with
direct access to the Level 3 network through dual, fault tolerant connections.
The Company has gateway facilities, which vary in size, in New York City,
Washington, D.C., Philadelphia, Atlanta, Boston, Dallas, Houston, Chicago,
Detroit, Denver, Seattle, San Francisco, San Jose, Los Angeles, San Diego,
Manchester, New Hampshire, Providence, Jersey City, Cincinnati, Stamford and
St. Louis. The Company is offering private line, colocation services, Internet
access and managed modem at its gateway sites in these cities. The availability
of these services varies by location.

As of August 1, 1999, local network development was underway in 22 U.S.
cities. Also as of August 1, 1999, the total number of U.S. cities with
operational facilities based local metropolitan networks was 14.

As of August 1, 1999, the Company had 144 approved ILEC colocation
applications in 28 cities and completed construction in 126 of these central
offices. As of August 1, 1999, the Company had entered into interconnection
agreements with RBOCs covering 28 cities.

The Company has negotiated master leases with several CLECs and ILECs to
obtain leased capacity from those providers so that the Company can provide its
clients with local transmission capabilities before its own local networks are
complete and in locations not directly accessed by the Company's owned
facilities.

The launches of services in London and Frankfurt followed the Company's
acquisitions of BusinessNet Limited, a leading UK ISP, in January 1999 and
miknet Internet Based Services GmbH, a leading German ISP, in September 1998.
In addition, in June 1999, the Company completed the construction of its
metropolitan network in the City of London. The Company launched its
international gateway in London in January 1999 and Paris, Amsterdam and
Frankfurt in June 1999. The 75,000 square foot office and operations facility
in London is the hub of European operations

S-55

and houses the operational center and network equipment, along with additional
space for expansion and colocation services. In addition, in July 1999, Level 3
acquired a building with an additional approximately 263,000 square feet of
space to serve as colocation technical space in London. The Company is
currently offering services in and among London, Paris, Amsterdam and
Frankfurt.

Communications and Information Services

In connection with the Business Plan, the Company is substantially
increasing the emphasis it places on and the resources devoted to its
communications and information services business. The Company is building on
the strengths of its information services business and the benefits of the
Level 3 network to offer a broad range of other services to business and other
end users.

As the Business Plan is being implemented, the Company is offering a
comprehensive range of communications services, including the following:

. Private Line and Special Access. Private line and special access
services are established as a permanent physical connection between
locations for the exclusive use of the customer. The Company is offering
the following types of special access and private line services:

. Private Line. This type of link is a dedicated line connecting two
end-user locations for voice and data applications, including ISPs.

. Carrier-to-Carrier Special Access. This type of link connects
carriers (long distance providers, wireless providers, ILECs and
CLECs) to other carriers.

. End-user to Long Distance Provider Special Access. This type of link
connects an end-user, such as a large business, with the local POP
of its chosen long distance provider.

The Company is currently offering its local special access and private
line services with available transmission speeds from T1 to OC3 and OC48
and its long distance services will be offered at speeds from T1 to OC3
and OC48. The Company is initially marketing its special access and
private line services to ISPs, resellers and medium to large corporate
customers.

. Colocation. The Company is offering its customers and other service
providers the ability to locate their communications and networking
equipment at Level 3's gateway sites in a safe and secure technical
operating environment. The demand for these colocation services has
increased as companies expand into geographic areas in which they do not
have appropriate space or technical personnel to support their equipment
and operations. At its operational colocation sites, the Company is
offering customers AC/DC power, optional UPS power, emergency back-up
generator power, HVAC, fire protection and security. Level 3 is also
offering high-speed, reliable connectivity to the Level 3 leased network
and other networks, including both local and wide area networks, the
PSTN and Internet. These sites are being monitored and maintained 24
hours a day, seven days a week.

Level 3 is offering customers, including ISPs, the opportunity to
colocate their web-server computers at the Company's larger gateway
sites, enabling them to take advantage of the marketing, customer
service, internal company information networks ("intranets") and other
benefits offered by such web presence. By colocating its web-server in a
Level 3 facility, a customer has the ability to deploy a high-quality,
high-reliability Internet presence without investing capital in data
center space, multiple high-speed connections or other capital intensive
infrastructure. Although the customer is responsible for maintaining the
content and performance of its server, the Company's technicians will be
available to monitor basic server operation. The Company will also offer
redundant infrastructure consisting of multiple routers and connections
to Internet backbones and is also offering Internet Protocol services
such as e-mail, news feeds and domain name services.

S-56

. Internet Access. The Company is offering Internet access to business
customers, other carriers and ISPs. These services include high-capacity
Internet connections ranging from T1 to OC3 transmission speeds. The
Company has peering arrangements with approximately 60 domestic ISPs and
approximately 30 international ISPs and is currently purchasing transit
from two major ISPs.

. Managed Modem. The Company is offering to its customers an outsourced,
turn-key infrastructure solution for the management of dial up access to
either the public Internet or a corporate data network that may include
access to the public Internet ("Managed Modem"). This service is the
first offered by the Company that uses softswitch technology to
seamlessly interconnect to the PSTN. While ISPs are provided a fully
managed dial-up network infrastructure for access to the public
Internet, corporate customers that purchase Managed Modem services
receive connectivity for remote users to support data applications such
as telecommuting, e-mail retrieval, and client/server applications. For
Managed Modem customers, Level 3 arranges for the provision of local
network coverage, dedicated local telephone numbers (which the Managed
Modem customer distributes to its customers in the case of an ISP or to
its employees in the case of a corporate customer), racks and modems as
well as dedicated connectivity from the customer's location to the Level
3 gateway facility. Level 3 also provides monitoring of this
infrastructure 24 hours a day, seven days a week. By providing a turn-
key infrastructure modem solution, Level 3 believes that this product
allows its customers to save both capital and operating costs.

. Voice and Fax. Level 3 began commercial testing of its Internet Protocol
long distance voice and fax service using softswitch technology in the
first quarter of 1999. Level 3 intends to introduce local, long distance
and international Internet Protocol based voice and fax services that
are accessed using existing telephone and fax equipment and existing
dialing procedures. The Company expects that these services will be
offered at a quality level equal to that of the PSTN.

. Special Services. The Company is offering dark fiber along its local and
intercity networks on a long term lease basis. A customer can obtain
dark fiber in any combination of three ways: (1) segment by segment, (2)
full ring or (3) the entire Level 3 network. Level 3 offers colocation
space in its gateway and intercity retransmission facilities to these
customers for the placement of their transmission electronics. Although
Level 3 will not be responsible for the management of the customer's
transmission electronics, Level 3 is contemplating providing
installation and maintenance services for this equipment on a fee for
service basis.

Level 3 currently offers, through its subsidiary PKSIS, computer operations
outsourcing and systems integration services to customers located throughout
the United States as well as abroad. The Company's systems integration services
help customers define, develop and implement cost-effective information
services. The computer outsourcing services offered by the Company include
networking and computing services necessary for older mainframe-based systems
and newer client/server-based systems. The Company provides its outsourcing
services to clients that want to focus their resources on core businesses,
rather than expend capital and incur overhead costs to operate their own
computing environments. PKSIS believes that it is able to utilize its expertise
and experience, as well as operating efficiencies, to provide its outsourcing
customers with levels of service equal to or better than those achievable by
the customers themselves, while at the same time reducing the customers' cost
for such services. This service is particularly useful for those customers
moving from older computing platforms to more modern client/server networks.

PKSIS offers reengineering services that allow companies to convert older
legacy software systems to modern networked computing systems, with a focus on
reengineering software to enable older software application and data
repositories to be accessed by web browsers over the Internet or

S-57

over private or limited access Internet Protocol networks. Through its Suite
2000SM line of services, PKSIS provides customers with a multi-phased service
for converting programs and applications so that date-related information is
accurately processed and stored before and after the year 2000. PKSIS also
provides customers with a combination of workbench tools and methodologies that
provide a complete strategy for converting mainframe-based application systems
to client/server architecture, while at the same time ensuring Year 2000
compliance. See "Risk Factors--Our Year 2000 compliance efforts may not
succeed, and PKS Systems Integration LLC may have liability from its Year 2000
customer projects."

Distribution Strategy

Level 3's distribution strategy is to utilize a direct sales force focused
on communications intensive and web centric businesses. These businesses
include ISPs, application service providers, content providers, systems
integrators, next generation carriers, web-hosting companies, streaming media
companies and Internet Protocol based storage providers. Level 3 believes that
these companies are the most significant drivers of bandwidth demand. The past
distinctions between retail and wholesale have been blurred as these
communications intensive and web centric businesses purchase Level 3 services,
add value to our services and then remarket the services to end-users.
Bandwidth constitutes a significant portion of these companies' cost structure
and their needs for bandwidth in many cases are growing at an exponential rate.
Providing continually declining bandwidth costs to these companies is at the
core of Level 3's market enabling strategy.

Level 3 expects that approximately 80% of its sales will be to web centric
companies that package communications services into value added services and
directly sell into the residential and business markets. The remaining
approximately 20% of Level 3's sales will be to other carriers and corporations
that are communications intensive and have high growth in communications and
information services consumption. Level 3 has segmented its sales organization
into four channels to implement this distribution strategy. These include a
Carrier Sales Group, an ISP/Web Centric Sales Group, an Enterprise Sales Group
and a Value Added Partner Group.

Business Support System

In order to pursue its sales and distribution strategies, the Company is
developing a set of integrated software applications designed to automate the
Company's operational processes. Through the development of a robust, scalable
business support system, the Company believes that it has the opportunity to
develop a competitive advantage relative to traditional telecommunications
companies. Whereas traditional telecommunications companies operate extensive
legacy business support systems with compartmentalized architectures that limit
their ability to scale rapidly and introduce enhanced services and features,
the Company has developed a business support system architecture intended to
maximize both reliability and scalability. See "Risk Factors--Our Business Plan
requires the development of effective business support systems to implement
customer orders and to provide and bill for services."

Key design aspects of the business support system development program are:

. integrated modular applications to allow the Company to upgrade specific
applications as new products are available;

. a scalable architecture that allows certain functions that would
otherwise have to be performed by Level 3 employees to be performed by
the Company's alternative distribution channel participants;

. phased completion of software releases designed to allow the Company to
test functionality on an incremental basis;

. "web-enabled" applications so that on-line access to all order entry,
network operations, billing, and customer care functions is available to
all authorized users, including Level 3's customers and resellers;

S-58

. use of a three-tiered, client/server architecture that is designed to
separate data and applications, and is expected to enable continued
improvement of software functionality at minimum cost; and

. maximum use of pre-developed or "shrink wrapped" applications, which
will interface to Level 3's enterprise resource planning suites.

The first three releases of the business support system have been delivered
and contain functionality necessary to support the set of services presently
offered. See "--Communications and Information Services."

Interconnection and Peering

As a result of the Telecom Act, properly certificated companies may, as a
matter of law, interconnect with ILECs on terms designed to help ensure
economic, technical and administrative equality between the interconnected
parties. The Telecom Act provides, among other things, that ILECs must offer
competitors the services and facilities necessary to offer local switched
services. See "--Regulation."

As of August 1, 1999, the Company had entered into interconnection
agreements covering 28 cities. The Company may be required to negotiate new or
renegotiate existing interconnection agreements as Level 3 expands its
operations in current and additional markets in the future.

Peering agreements between the Company and ISPs are necessary in order for
the Company to exchange traffic with those ISPs without having to pay transit
costs. The Company has peering arrangements with approximately 60 domestic ISPs
and approximately 30 international ISPs and is currently purchasing transit
from two major ISPs. The basis on which the large national ISPs make peering
available or impose settlement charges is evolving as the provision of Internet
access and related services has expanded. Recently, companies that have
previously offered peering have cut back or eliminated peering relationships
and are establishing new, more restrictive criteria for peering. In order to
maintain certain of its peering relationships, Level 3 will have to meet these
more restrictive criteria. See "Risk Factors--Burdensome peering and transit
arrangements result in higher costs."

Employee Recruiting and Retention

As of June 30, 1999, Level 3 had 2,237 employees in the communications
portion of its business and PKSIS had approximately 945 employees, for a total
of 3,182 employees. The Company believes that its ability to implement the
Business Plan will depend in large part on its ability to attract and retain
substantial numbers of additional qualified employees. In order to attract and
retain highly qualified employees, the Company believes that it is important to
provide (i) a work environment that encourages each individual to perform to
his or her potential, (ii) a work environment that facilitates cooperation
towards shared goals and (iii) a compensation program designed to attract the
kinds of individuals the Company seeks and to align employees' interests with
the Company's. The Company believes the Business Plan and its relocation to new
facilities in the Denver metropolitan area help provide such a work
environment. With respect to compensation programs, while the Company believes
financial rewards alone are not sufficient to attract and retain qualified
employees, the Company believes a properly designed compensation program is a
necessary component of employee recruitment and retention. In this regard the
Company's philosophy is to pay annual cash compensation which, if the Company's
annual goals are met, is moderately greater than the cash compensation paid by
competitors. The Company's non-cash benefit programs (including medical and
health insurance, life insurance, disability insurance, etc.) are designed to
be comparable to those offered by its competitors. See "Risk Factors--We may be
unable to hire and retain sufficient qualified personnel; the loss of any of
our key executive officers could adversely affect us."

S-59

The Company believes that the qualified candidates it seeks place particular
emphasis on equity-based long term incentive ("LTI") programs. The Company
currently has two complementary programs: (i) the equity-based "Shareworks"
program, which helps ensure that all employees have an ownership interest in
the Company and are encouraged to invest risk capital in the Company's stock;
and (ii) an innovative Outperform Stock Option ("OSO") program applicable to
the Company's employees. The Shareworks program currently enables employees to
contribute up to 7% of their compensation toward the purchase of restricted
common stock. If an employee remains employed by the Company for three years
from the date of purchase, the shares will vest and be matched by the Company
with a grant of an equal number of shares of its common stock. The Shareworks
program also provides that, subject to satisfactory Company performance, the
Company's employees will be eligible annually for grants by the Company of its
restricted common stock of up to 3% of the employees' compensation, which
shares will vest three years from the employee's initial grant date.

The Company has adopted the OSO program, which differs from LTI programs
generally adopted by the Company's competitors that make employees eligible for
conventional non-qualified stock options ("NQSOs"). While widely adopted, the
Company believes such NQSO programs reward employees when company stock price
performance is inferior to investments of similar risks, dilute public
stockholders in a manner not directly proportional to performance and fail to
provide a preferred return on stockholders' invested capital over the return to
option holders. The Company believes that the OSO program is superior to an
NQSO-based program with respect to these issues while, at the same time,
providing employees a success-based reward balancing the associated risk.

The OSO program was designed by the Company so that its stockholders receive
a market related return on their investment before OSO holders receive any
return on their options. The Company believes that the OSO program aligns
directly employees' and stockholders' interests by basing stock option value on
the Company's ability to outperform the market in general, as measured by the
S&P 500 Index. The value received for options under the OSO plan is based on a
formula involving a multiplier related to how much our common stock outperforms
the S&P 500 Index. Participants in the OSO program do not realize any value
from options unless our common stock price outperforms the S&P 500 Index. To
the extent that our common stock outperforms the S&P 500, the value of OSOs to
an option holder may exceed the value of NQSOs.

Subsequent to the split-off of the Construction Group from its other
businesses, the Company adopted the recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123.
Under SFAS No. 123, the fair value of an OSO (as computed in accordance with
accepted option valuation models) on the date of grant is amortized over the
vesting period of the OSO. The recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123 are
applied prospectively upon adoption. As a result, they are applied to all stock
awards granted in the year of adoption and are not applied to awards granted in
previous years unless those awards are modified or settled in cash after
adoption of the recognition provisions. While the Company has not yet
determined the total effect of adopting the recognition provisions of SFAS No.
123, the adoption resulted in non-cash charges to operations in 1998 of
approximately $39 million and will result in OSO program non-cash charges to
operations for future periods that the Company believes will also be material.
The amount of the non-cash charge will be dependent upon a number of factors,
including the number of options granted and the fair value estimated at the
time of grant.

Competition

The communications and information services industry is highly competitive.
Many of the Company's existing and potential competitors in the communications
and information services industry have financial, personnel, marketing and
other resources significantly greater than those of the Company, as well as
other competitive advantages including existing customer bases. Increased
consolidation and strategic alliances in the industry resulting from the
Telecom Act, the opening of the U.S. market to foreign carriers, technological
advances and further deregulation could give rise to significant new
competitors to the Company.

S-60

In the special access and private line services market, the Company's
primary competitors are IXCs, ILECs and CLECs. Most of these competitors have a
significant base of customers for whom they are currently providing colocation
services. Due to the high costs to CLECs of switching colocation sites, the
Company may have a competitive disadvantage relative to these competitors. The
market for the colocation of web-servers is extremely competitive. In this
market, the Company competes with ISPs and many others, including IXCs,
companies that provide only web hosting/Internet Protocol colocation services
and a number of companies in the computer industry.

For voice and fax services, the Company will compete primarily with national
and regional network providers. There are currently three principal facilities-
based long distance fiber optic networks (AT&T, Sprint and MCI WORLDCOM), as
well as numerous ILEC and CLEC networks. Others, including Qwest, IXC and
Williams, are building additional networks that employ advanced technology
similar to that of the Level 3 network and offer significantly more capacity to
the marketplace. The additional capacity that is expected to become available
in the next several years may cause significant decreases in the prices for
services. The ability of the Company to compete effectively in this market will
depend upon its ability to maintain high quality services at prices equal to or
below those charged by its competitors. Interexchange Carriers and certain
CLECs with excess fiber optic strands may be competitors in the dark fiber
business. In the long distance market, the Company's primary competitors will
include AT&T, MCI WORLDCOM and Sprint, all of whom have extensive experience in
the long distance market. In addition, the Telecom Act will allow the RBOCs and
others to enter the long distance market. These providers are also competitors
in the provision of internet access. In local markets the Company will compete
with ILECs and CLECs, many of whom have extensive experience in the local
market. While the Company believes that Internet Protocol technology will prove
to be a viable technology for the transmission of voice and fax services,
technology is not yet in place that will enable the Company to provide voice
and fax services at an acceptable level of quality. The Company may not be able
to develop or acquire such technology. See "Risk Factors--A failure to
commercially deploy satisfactory voice or fax technology for Internet Protocol
networks could adversely affect our business."

The communications and information services industry is subject to rapid and
significant changes in technology. For instance, recent technological advances
permit substantial increases in transmission capacity of both new and existing
fiber, and the introduction of new products or emergence of new technologies
may reduce the cost or increase the supply of certain services similar to those
which the Company plans on providing. Accordingly, in the future the Company's
most significant competitors may be new entrants to the communications and
information services industry, which are not burdened by an installed base of
outmoded equipment.

Regulation

The Company's communications and information services business will be
subject to varying degrees of federal, state, local and international
regulation.

Federal Regulation

The FCC regulates interstate and international telecommunications services.
The FCC imposes extensive regulations on common carriers such as ILECs that
have some degree of market power. The FCC imposes less regulation on common
carriers without market power, such as the Company. The FCC permits these
nondominant carriers to provide domestic interstate services (including long
distance and access services) without prior authorization; but it requires
carriers to receive an authorization to construct and operate
telecommunications facilities, and to provide or resell telecommunications
services, between the United States and international points. The Company has
obtained FCC authorization to provide international services on a facilities
and resale basis. The Company has filed tariffs for its interstate and
international long distance services with the FCC.

S-61

Under the Telecom Act, any entity, including cable television companies, and
electric and gas utilities, may enter any telecommunications market, subject to
reasonable state regulation of safety, quality and consumer protection. Because
implementation of the Telecom Act is subject to numerous federal and state
policy rulemaking proceedings and judicial review, there is still uncertainty
as to what impact it will have on the Company. The Telecom Act is intended to
increase competition. The Telecom Act opens the local services market by
requiring ILECs to permit interconnection to their networks and establishing
ILEC obligations with respect to:

. Reciprocal Compensation. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to complete calls
originated by competing carriers under reciprocal arrangements at prices
based on a reasonable approximation of incremental cost or through
mutual exchange of traffic without explicit payment.

. Resale. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to permit resale of their
telecommunications services without unreasonable restrictions or
conditions. In addition, ILECs are required to offer wholesale versions
of all retail services to other telecommunications carriers for resale
at discounted rates, based on the costs avoided by the ILEC in the
wholesale offering.

. Interconnection. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to permit their
competitors to interconnect with their facilities. Requires all ILECs to
permit interconnection at any technically feasible point within their
networks, on nondiscriminatory terms and at prices based on cost (which
may include a reasonable profit). At the option of the carrier seeking
interconnection, colocation of the requesting carrier's equipment in an
ILEC's premises must be offered, except where the ILEC can demonstrate
space limitations or other technical impediments to colocation.

. Unbundled Access. Requires all ILECs to provide nondiscriminatory access
to unbundled network elements (including certain network facilities,
equipment, features, functions, and capabilities) at any technically
feasible point within their networks, on nondiscriminatory terms and at
prices based on cost (which may include a reasonable profit).

. Number Portability. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to permit, to the
extent technically feasible, users of telecommunications services to
retain existing telephone numbers without impairment of quality,
reliability or convenience when switching from one telecommunications
carrier to another.

. Dialing Parity. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to provide "1+" equal
access to competing providers of telephone exchange service and toll
service, and to provide nondiscriminatory access to telephone numbers,
operator services, directory assistance, and directory listing, with no
unreasonable dialing delays.

. Access to Rights-of-Way. Requires all ILECs and CLECs to permit
competing carriers access to poles, ducts, conduits and rights-of-way at
regulated prices.

ILECs are required to negotiate in good faith with carriers requesting any
or all of the above arrangements. If the negotiating carriers cannot reach
agreement within a prescribed time, either carrier may request binding
arbitration of the disputed issues by the state regulatory commission. Where an
agreement has not been reached, ILECs remain subject to interconnection
obligations established by the FCC and state telecommunications regulatory
commissions.

In August 1996, the FCC released a decision (the "Interconnection Decision")
establishing rules implementing the above-listed requirements and providing
guidelines for review of interconnection agreements by state public utility
commissions. The United States Court of Appeals for the Eighth Circuit (the
"Eighth Circuit") vacated certain portions of the Interconnection Decision. On
January 25, 1999, the Supreme Court reversed the Eighth Circuit with respect to
the FCC's jurisdiction to issue regulations governing local interconnection
pricing (including regulations governing reciprocal compensation). The Supreme
Court also found that the FCC had authority to promulgate a "pick and choose"
rule and upheld most of the FCC's rules governing access to unbundled network
elements. The Supreme Court, however, remanded to the FCC the standard by which
the FCC identified the network elements that must be made available on an
unbundled basis.

S-62

The Eighth Circuit decisions and their recent reversal by the Supreme Court
continue to cause uncertainty about the rules governing the pricing, terms and
conditions of interconnection agreements. The Supreme Court's action in
particular may require or trigger the renegotiation of existing agreements.
Although state public utilities commissions have continued to conduct
arbitrations, and to implement and enforce interconnection agreements during
the pendency of the Eighth Circuit proceedings, the Supreme Court's recent
ruling and further proceedings on remand (either at the Eighth Circuit or the
FCC) may affect the scope of state commissions' authority to conduct such
proceedings or to implement or enforce interconnection agreements. They could
also result in new or additional rules being promulgated by the FCC. Given the
general uncertainty surrounding the effect of the Eighth Circuit decisions and
the recent decision of the Supreme Court reversing them, the Company may not be
able to continue to obtain or enforce interconnection terms that are acceptable
to it or that are consistent with its business plans.

The Telecom Act also codifies the ILECs' equal access and nondiscrimination
obligations and preempts inconsistent state regulation. The Telecom Act
contains special provisions that modify previous court decrees that prevented
RBOCs from providing long distance services and engaging in telecommunications
equipment manufacturing. These provisions permit a RBOC to enter the long
distance market in its traditional service area if it satisfies several
procedural and substantive requirements, including obtaining FCC approval upon
a showing that the RBOC has entered into interconnection agreements (or, under
some circumstances, has offered to enter into such agreements) in those states
in which it seeks long distance relief, the interconnection agreements satisfy
a 14-point "checklist" of competitive requirements, and the FCC is satisfied
that the RBOC's entry into long distance markets is in the public interest. To
date, several petitions by RBOCs for such entry have been denied by the FCC,
and none have been granted. The Telecom Act permitted the RBOCs to enter the
out-of-region long distance market immediately upon its enactment.

In October 1996, the FCC adopted an order in which it eliminated the
requirement that non-dominant carriers such as the Company maintain tariffs on
file with the FCC for domestic interstate services. This order applies to all
non-dominant interstate carriers, including AT&T. The order does not apply to
the RBOCs or other local exchange providers. The FCC order was issued pursuant
to authority granted to the FCC in the Telecom Act to "forbear" from regulating
any telecommunications services provider if the FCC determines that the public
interest will be served. On February 13, 1997, the United States Court of
Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit stayed the implementation of the
FCC order pending its review of the order on the merits. Currently, that
temporary stay remains in effect.

If the stay is lifted and the FCC order becomes effective,
telecommunications carriers such as the Company will no longer be able to rely
on the filing of tariffs with the FCC as a means of providing notice to
customers of prices, terms and conditions on which they offer their interstate
services. The obligation to provide non-discriminatory, just and reasonable
prices remains unchanged under the Communications Act of 1934. While tariffs
provided a means of providing notice of prices, terms and conditions, the
Company intends to rely primarily on its sales force and direct marketing to
provide such information to its customers.

The Company's costs of providing long distance services, as well as its
revenues from providing local services, will both be affected by changes in the
"access charge" rates imposed by ILECs on long distance carriers for
origination and termination of calls over local facilities. The FCC has made
major changes in the interstate access charge structure. In a December 24, 1996
order, the FCC removed restrictions on ILECs' ability to lower access prices
and relaxed the regulation of new switched access services in those markets
where there are other providers of access services. On August 5, 1999 the FCC
adopted an order granting price cap LECs additional pricing flexibility,
implementing certain access charge reforms and seeking comments on others. The
order provides certain immediate regulatory relief to price cap carriers and
sets a framework of "triggers" to provide

S-63

those companies with greater pricing flexibility to set interstate access rates
as competition increases. The order also initiated a rulemaking to determine
whether the FCC should regulate the access charges of CLECs. If this increased
pricing flexibility is not effectively monitored by federal regulators, it
could have a material adverse effect on the Company's ability to price its
interstate access services competitively. A May 16, 1997 order substantially
increased the amounts that ILECs subject to the FCC's price cap rules ("price
cap LECs") recover through monthly flat-rate charges and substantially
decreased the amounts that these LECs recover through traffic sensitive (per-
minute) access charges. Several parties appealed the May 16th order. On August
19, 1998, the Eighth Circuit upheld the FCC's access charge reform rules.

Beginning in June 1997, every RBOC advised CLECs that they did not consider
calls in the same local calling area from their customers to CLEC customers,
who are ISPs, to be local calls under the interconnection agreements between
the RBOCs and the CLECs. The RBOCs claim that these calls are exchange access
calls for which exchange access charges would be owed. The RBOCs claimed,
however, that the FCC exempted these calls from access charges so that no
compensation is owed to the CLECs for transporting and terminating such calls.
As a result, the RBOCs threatened to withhold, and in many cases did withhold,
reciprocal compensation for the transport and termination of such calls. To
date, thirty-three state commissions have ruled on this issue in the context of
state commission arbitration proceedings or enforcement proceedings. In thirty-
one states, to date, the state commission has determined that reciprocal
compensation is owed for such calls. Several of these cases are presently on
appeal. Reviewing courts have upheld the state commissions in six decisions
rendered to date on appeal. Appeals from these decisions are pending in the
Fifth, Ninth and the U.S. Circuit Courts of Appeal. The Seventh Circuit upheld
the Illinois Commerce Commission decision on June 18, 1999. On February 25,
1999, the FCC issued a Declaratory Ruling on the issue of inter-carrier
compensation for calls bound to ISPs. The FCC ruled that the calls are largely
jurisdictionally interstate calls, not local calls. The FCC, however,
determined that this issue was not dispositive of whether inter-carrier
compensation is owed. The FCC noted a number of factors which would allow the
state commissions to leave their decisions requiring the payment of
compensation undisturbed. The Company cannot predict the effect of the FCC's
ruling on existing state decisions, or the outcome of pending appeals or of
additional pending cases. The FCC also issued proposed rules to address inter-
carrier compensation in the future.

The FCC has to date treated ISPs as "enhanced service providers," exempt
from federal and state regulations governing common carriers, including the
obligation to pay access charges and contribute to the universal service fund.
Nevertheless, regulations governing disclosure of confidential communications,
copyright, excise tax, and other requirements may apply to the Company's
provision of Internet access services. The Company cannot predict the
likelihood that state, federal or foreign governments will impose additional
regulation on the Company's Internet business, nor can it predict the impact
that future regulation will have on the Company's operations.

In December 1996, the FCC initiated a Notice of Inquiry regarding whether to
impose regulations or surcharges upon providers of Internet access and
information services (the "Internet NOI"). The Internet NOI sought public
comment upon whether to impose or continue to forebear from regulation of
Internet and other packet-switched network service providers. The Internet NOI
specifically identifies Internet telephony as a subject for FCC consideration.
On April 10, 1998, the FCC issued a Report to Congress on its implementation of
the universal service provisions of the Telecom Act. In that Report, the FCC
stated, among other things, that the provision of transmission capacity to ISPs
constitutes the provision of telecommunications and is, therefore, subject to
common carrier regulations. The FCC indicated that it would reexamine its
policy of not requiring an ISP to contribute to the universal service
mechanisms when the ISP provides its own transmission facilities and engages in
data transport over those facilities in order to provide an information
service. Any such contribution by a facilities based ISP would be related to
the ISP's provision of the underlying telecommunications services. In the
Report, the FCC also indicated that it would examine the

S-64

question of whether certain forms of "phone-to-phone Internet Protocol
telephony" are information services or telecommunications services. It noted
that the FCC did not have an adequate record on which to make any definitive
pronouncements on that issue at this time, but that the record the FCC had
reviewed suggests that certain forms of phone-to-phone Internet Protocol
telephony appear to have similar functionality to non-Internet Protocol
telecommunications services and lack the characteristics that would render them
information services. If the FCC were to determine that certain Internet
Protocol telephony services are subject to FCC regulations as
telecommunications services, the FCC noted it may find it reasonable that the
ISPs pay access charges and make universal service contributions similar to
non-Internet Protocol based telecommunications service providers. The FCC also
noted that other forms of Internet Protocol telephony appear to be information
services. The Company cannot predict the outcome of these proceedings or other
FCC proceedings that may effect the Company's operations or impose additional
requirements, regulations or charges upon the Company's provision of Internet
access services.

On May 8, 1997, the FCC issued an order establishing a significantly
expanded federal universal service subsidy regime. For example, the FCC
established new universal service funds to support telecommunications and
information services provided to qualifying schools and libraries (with an
annual cap of $2.25 billion) and to rural health care providers (with an annual
cap of $400 million). The FCC also expanded the federal subsidies for local
exchange telephone services provided to low-income consumers. Providers of
interstate telecommunications service, such as the Company, as well as certain
other entities, must pay for these programs. The Company's contribution to
these universal service funds will be based on its telecommunications service
end-user revenues. The extent to which the Company's services are viewed as
telecommunications services or as information services will impact the amount
of the Company's contributions, if any. As indicated in the preceding
paragraph, that issue has not been resolved. Currently, the FCC assesses such
payments on the basis of a provider's revenue for the previous year. The
Company is currently unable to quantify the amount of subsidy payments that it
will be required to make and the effect that these required payments will have
on its financial condition because of uncertainties concerning the size of the
universal fund and uncertainties concerning the classification of its services.
In the May 8th order, the FCC also announced that it will soon revise its rules
for subsidizing service provided to consumers in high cost areas, which may
result in further substantial increases in the overall cost of the subsidy
program. Several parties appealed the May 8th order. The Fifth Circuit Court of
Appeals recently upheld the FCC in most respects, but rejected the FCC's effort
to base contributions on intrastate and international revenues. The FCC's
universal service program may also be altered as a result of the agency's
reconsideration of its policies, or by future Congressional action.

State Regulation

The Telecom Act is intended to increase competition in the
telecommunications industry, especially in the local exchange market. With
respect to local services, ILECs are required to allow interconnection to their
networks and to provide unbundled access to network facilities, as well as a
number of other procompetitive measures. Because the implementation of the
Telecom Act is subject to numerous state rulemaking proceedings on these
issues, it is currently difficult to predict how quickly full competition for
local services, including local dial tone, will be introduced.

State regulatory agencies have jurisdiction when Company facilities and
services are used to provide intrastate services. A portion of the Company's
traffic may be classified as intrastate and therefore subject to state
regulation. The Company expects that it will offer more intrastate services
(including intrastate switched services) as its business and product lines
expand and state regulations are modified to allow increased local services
competition. To provide intrastate services, the Company generally must obtain
a certificate of public convenience and necessity from the state regulatory
agency and comply with state requirements for telecommunications utilities,
including state tariffing requirements. The Company currently is authorized to
provide telecommunications services in all fifty states and the District of
Columbia, other than Alaska and Oklahoma.

S-65

The Company has pending applications for authority to provide
telecommunications services in Alaska and Oklahoma.

Local Regulation

The Company's networks will be subject to numerous local regulations such as
building codes and licensing. Such regulations vary on a city-by-city, county-
by-county and state-by-state basis. To install its own fiber optic transmission
facilities, the Company will need to obtain rights-of-way over privately and
publicly owned land. Rights-of-way that are not already secured may not be
available to the Company on economically reasonable or advantageous terms.

Canadian Regulation

The Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commission (the "CRTC")
generally regulates long distance telecommunications services in Canada.
Regulatory developments over the past several years have terminated the
historic monopolies of the regional telephone companies, bringing significant
competition to this industry for both domestic and international long distance
services, but also lessening regulation of domestic long distance companies.
Resellers, which, as well as facilities-based carriers, now have
interconnection rights, but which are not obligated to file tariffs, may not
only provide transborder services to the U.S. by reselling the services
provided by the regional companies and other entities but also may resell the
services of the monopoly international carrier, Teleglobe Canada ("Teleglobe"),
including offering international switched services provisioned over leased
lines. Although the CRTC formerly restricted the practice of "switched hubbing"
over leased lines through intermediate countries to a third country, the CRTC
recently lifted this restriction. The Teleglobe monopoly on international
services and submarine cable landing rights terminated as of October 1, 1998,
although the provision of Canadian international facilities based services
remains restricted to "Canadian carriers" with majority ownership by Canadians.
Ownership of non-international facilities are limited to Canadian carriers but
the Company can own international submarine cables landing in Canada. The
Company cannot, under current or foreseen law, enter the Canadian market as a
provider of facilities-based domestic services. Pending proceedings address
issues such as the scope of contribution charges payable to the telephone
companies to offset some of the capital and operating costs of interconnection
as well as deregulation of the long distance services of the incumbent regional
telephone companies.

While competition is now emerging in other Canadian telecommunications
market segments, the Company believes that the regional companies continue to
retain a substantial majority of the local and calling card markets. Beginning
in May 1997, the CRTC released a number of decisions opening to competition the
Canadian local telecommunications services market, which decisions were made
applicable in the territories of all Stentor member companies except SaskTel
(although Saskatchewan has subsequently allowed local service competition in
that province). As a result, networks operated by CLECs may now be
interconnected with the networks of the ILECs. Facilities based CLECs are
subject to the same majority Canadian ownership "Canadian carrier" requirements
as facilities-based long distance carriers. CLECs have the same status as
ILECs, but they do not have universal service or customer tariff-filing
obligations. CLECs are subject to certain consumer protection safeguards and
other CRTC regulatory oversight requirements. CLECs must file interconnection
tariffs for services to interexchange service providers and wireless service
providers. Certain ILEC services must be provided to CLECs on an unbundled
basis and subject to mandatory pricing, including central office codes,
subscriber listings, and local loops in small urban and rural areas. For a
five-year period, certain other important CLEC services must be provided on an
unbundled basis at mandated prices. ILECs, which, unlike CLECs, remained fully
regulated, will not be subject to rate of return regulation for an initial
four-year period beginning May 1, 1997, but their services must not be priced
below cost. Interexchange contribution payments are now pooled and distributed
among ILECs and CLECs according to a formula based on their respective
proportions of

S-66

residential lines, with no explicit contribution payable from local business
exchange or directory revenues. CLECs must pay an annual telecommunications fee
based on their proportion of total CLEC operating revenues. All bundled and
unbundled local services (including residential lines and other bulk services)
may now be resold, but ILECs need not provide these services to resellers at
wholesale prices. Transmission facilities-based local and long distance
carriers (but not resellers) are entitled to colocate equipment in ILEC central
offices pursuant to terms and conditions of tariffs and intercarrier
agreements. Certain local competition issues are still to be resolved. The CRTC
has ruled that resellers cannot be classified as CLECs, and thus are not
entitled to CLEC interconnection terms and conditions.

The Company's Other Businesses

The Company's other businesses include its investment in the C-TEC Companies
(as defined), coal mining, the SR91 Tollroad (as defined) and certain other
assets. The Company recently completed the sale of its interests in United
Infrastructure Company, MidAmerican and Kiewit Investment Management Corp.

C-TEC Companies

On September 30, 1997, C-TEC completed a tax-free restructuring, which
divided C-TEC into three public companies (the "C-TEC Companies"): C-TEC, which
changed its name to Commonwealth Telephone, RCN and Cable Michigan. The
Company's interests in the C-TEC Companies are held through a holding company
(the "C-TEC Holding Company"). The Company owns 90% of the common stock of the
C-TEC Holding Company, and preferred stock of the C-TEC Holding Company with a
liquidation value of approximately $482 million as of June 30, 1999. The
remaining 10% of the common stock of the C-TEC Holding Company is held by David
C. McCourt, a director of the Company who was formerly the Chairman of C-TEC.
In the event of a liquidation of the C-TEC Holding Company, the Company would
first receive the liquidation value of the preferred stock. Any excess of the
value of the C-TEC Holding Company above the liquidation value of the preferred
stock would be split according to the ownership of the common stock.

Commonwealth Telephone. Commonwealth Telephone is a Pennsylvania public
utility providing local telephone service to a 19-county, 5,191 square mile
service territory in Pennsylvania. Commonwealth Telephone services
approximately 287,000 main access lines. Commonwealth Telephone also provides
network access and long distance services to IXCs. Commonwealth Telephone's
business customer base is diverse in size as well as industry, with very little
concentration. A subsidiary, Commonwealth Communications Inc. provides
telecommunications engineering and technical services to large corporate
clients, hospitals and universities in the northeastern United States. Another
subsidiary, Commonwealth Long Distance operates principally in Pennsylvania,
providing switched services and resale of several types of services, using the
networks of several long distance providers on a wholesale basis. As of June
30, 1999, the C-TEC Holding Company owned approximately 48.2% of the
outstanding common stock of Commonwealth Telephone.

On October 23, 1998, Commonwealth Telephone completed a rights offering of
3.7 million shares of its common stock. In the offering, Level 3 exercised all
rights it received and purchased approximately 1.8 million additional shares of
Commonwealth Telephone common stock for an aggregate subscription price of
$37.7 million.

RCN. RCN is a full service provider of local, long distance, Internet and
cable television services primarily to residential users in densely populated
areas in the Northeast. RCN operates as a competitive telecommunications
service provider in New York City and Boston. RCN also owns cable television
operations in New York, New Jersey and Pennsylvania; a 40% interest in

S-67

Megacable, S.A. de C.V., Mexico's second largest cable television operator; and
has long distance operations (other than the operations in certain areas of
Pennsylvania). RCN is developing advanced fiber optic networks to provide a
wide range of telecommunications services, including local and long distance
telephone, video programming and data services (including high speed Internet
access), primarily to residential customers in selected markets in the Boston
to Washington, D.C. and San Francisco to San Diego corridors. During the first
quarter of 1998, RCN acquired Ultranet Communications, Inc. and Erols Internet,
Inc., two ISPs with operations in the Boston to Washington, D.C. corridor. As
of June 30, 1999, the C-TEC Holding Company owned approximately 35.1% of the
outstanding common stock of RCN.

Cable Michigan. Cable Michigan was a cable television operator in the State
of Michigan which, as of December 31, 1997, served approximately 204,000
subscribers including approximately 39,400 subscribers served by Mercom.
Clustered primarily around the Michigan communities of Grand Rapids, Traverse
City, Lapeer and Monroe (Mercom), Cable Michigan's systems serve a total of
approximately 400 municipalities in suburban markets and small towns. On June
4, 1998, Cable Michigan announced that it had agreed to be acquired by Avalon
Cable. Level 3 received approximately $129 million in cash when the transaction
closed on November 6, 1998.

Coal Mining

The Company is engaged in coal mining through its subsidiary, KCP, Inc.
("KCP"). KCP has a 50% interest in three mines, which are operated by a
subsidiary of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. ("New PKS"). Decker Coal Company
("Decker") is a joint venture with Western Minerals, Inc., a subsidiary of The
RTZ Corporation PLC. Black Butte Coal Company ("Black Butte") is a joint
venture with Bitter Creek Coal Company, a subsidiary of Union Pacific Resources
Group Inc. Walnut Creek Mining Company ("Walnut Creek") is a general
partnership with Phillips Coal Company, a subsidiary of Phillips Petroleum
Company. The Decker mine is located in southeastern Montana, the Black Butte
mine is in southwestern Wyoming, and the Walnut Creek mine is in east-central
Texas. The coal mines use the surface mining method. For a discussion of
certain risks associated with the coal mining business, see "Risk Factors--
Environmental liabilities from our historical operations could be material,"
"--Significant future declines in cash flow from coal operations" and "--
Potential liabilities and claims arising from our coal operations could be
significant."

The coal produced from the KCP mines is sold primarily to electric
utilities, which burn coal in order to produce steam to generate electricity.
Approximately 89% of sales are made under long-term contracts, and the
remainder are made on the spot market. Approximately 77%, 79% and 80% of KCP's
revenues in 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively, were derived from long-term
contracts with Commonwealth Edison Company (with Decker and Black Butte) and
The Detroit Edison Company (with Decker). The primary customer of Walnut Creek
is the Texas-New Mexico Power Company ("TNP"). KCP also has other sales
commitments, including those with Sierra Pacific, Idaho Power, Solvay Minerals,
Pacific Power & Light, Minnesota Power, and Mississippi Power, that provide for
the delivery of approximately 13 million tons through 2005. The level of cash
flows generated in recent periods by the Company's coal operations will not
continue after the year 2000 because the delivery requirements under the
Company's current long-term contracts decline significantly.

Under a mine management agreement, KCP pays a subsidiary of New PKS an
annual fee equal to 30% of KCP's adjusted operating income. The fee for the six
months ended June 30, 1999 was $14 million.

The coal industry is highly competitive. KCP competes not only with other
domestic and foreign coal suppliers, some of whom are larger and have greater
capital resources than KCP, but also with alternative methods of generating
electricity and alternative energy sources. In 1997, KCP's production
represented 1.4% of total U.S. coal production. Demand for KCP's coal is
affected by

S-68

economic, political and regulatory factors. For example, recent "clean air"
laws may stimulate demand for low sulfur coal. KCP's western coal reserves
generally have a low sulfur content (less than one percent) and are currently
useful principally as fuel for coal-fired, steam-electric generating units.

KCP's sales of its western coal, like sales by other western coal producers,
typically provide for delivery to customers at the mine. A significant portion
of the customer's delivered cost of coal is attributable to transportation
costs. Most of the coal sold from KCP's western mines is currently shipped by
rail to utilities outside Montana and Wyoming. The Decker and Black Butte mines
are each served by a single railroad. Many of their western coal competitors
are served by two railroads and such competitors' customers often benefit from
lower transportation costs because of competition between railroads for coal
hauling business. Other western coal producers, particularly those in the
Powder River Basin of Wyoming, have lower stripping ratios (that is, the amount
of overburden that must be removed in proportion to the amount of minable coal)
than the Black Butte and Decker mines, often resulting in lower comparative
costs of production. As a result, KCP's production costs per ton of coal at the
Black Butte and Decker mines can be as much as four and five times greater than
production costs of certain competitors. KCP's production cost disadvantage has
contributed to its agreement to amend its long-term contract with Commonwealth
Edison Company to provide for delivery of coal from alternate source mines
rather than from Black Butte. Because of these cost disadvantages, KCP does not
expect that it will be able to enter into long-term coal purchase contracts for
Black Butte and Decker production as the current long-term contracts expire. In
addition, these cost disadvantages may adversely affect KCP's ability to
compete for spot sales in the future.

The Company is required to comply with various federal, state and local laws
and regulations concerning protection of the environment. KCP's share of land
reclamation expenses for the six months ended June 30, 1999 was approximately
$3 million. KCP's share of accrued estimated reclamation costs was $95 million
at June 30, 1999. The Company did not make significant capital expenditures for
environmental compliance with respect to the coal business in 1998. The Company
believes its compliance with environmental protection and land restoration laws
will not affect its competitive position since its competitors in the mining
industry are similarly affected by such laws. However, failure to comply with
environmental protection and land restoration laws, or actual reclamation costs
in excess of the Company's accruals, could have an adverse effect on the
Company's business, results of operations, or financial condition.

SR91 Tollroad

The Company has invested $12.9 million for a 65% equity interest and lent
$6.2 million to California Private Transportation Company L.P. ("CPTC"), which
developed, financed, and currently operates the 91 Express Lanes, a ten mile,
four-lane tollroad in Orange County, California (the "SR91 Tollroad"). The
fully automated highway uses an electronic toll collection system and variable
pricing to adjust tolls to demand. Capital costs at completion were $130
million, $110 million of which was funded with debt that was not guaranteed by
Level 3. However, certain defaults by Level 3 on its outstanding debt and
certain judgments against Level 3 can result in default under this debt of
CPTC. Revenue collected over the 35-year franchise period is used for operating
expenses, debt repayment, and profit distributions. The SR91 Tollroad opened in
December 1995 and achieved operating break-even in 1996. Approximately 93,100
customers have registered to use the tollroad as of July 1999, and weekday
volumes typically exceed 22,300 vehicles per day during July 1999.

S-69

Legal Proceedings

In August 1999, the Company was named as a defendant in Schweizer vs. Level
3 Communications, Inc., et al., a purported national class action, filed in the
District Court, County of Boulder, State of Colorado which involves the
Company's right to install its fiber optic cable network in easements and
right-of-ways crossing the plaintiffs' land. In general, the Company obtained
the rights to construct its network from railroads, utilities, and others, and
is installing its network along the rights-of-way so granted. Plaintiffs in the
purported class action assert that they are the owners of lands over which the
Company's fiber optic cable network passes, and that the railroads, utilities,
and others who granted the Company the right to construct and maintain its
network did not have the legal ability to do so. The action purports to be on
behalf of a national class of owners of land over which the Company's network
passes or will pass. The complaint seeks damages on theories of trespass,
unjust enrichment and slander of title and property, as well as punitive
damages. Although the Company is not aware of any additional similar claims,
the Company may in the future receive claims and demands related to rights-of-
way issues similar to the issues in the Schweizer litigation that may be based
on similar or different legal theories. Although it is too early for the
Company to reach a conclusion as to the ultimate outcome of this litigation,
management believes that the Company has substantial defenses to the claims
asserted in the Schweitzer action (and any similar claims which may be named in
the future), and intends to defend them vigorously.

The Company and its subsidiaries are parties to many other legal
proceedings. Management believes that any resulting liabilities for these legal
proceedings, beyond amounts reserved, will not materially affect the Company's
financial condition, future results of operations, or future cash flows.

S-70

MANAGEMENT

Directors and Executive Officers

Set forth below is information as of September 1, 1999 about each director
and each executive officer of the Company. The executive officers of the
Company have been determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC.

Name Age Position
---- --- --------

Walter Scott, Jr........ 68 Chairman of the Board
James Q. Crowe.......... 50 President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
R. Douglas Bradbury..... 48 Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Director
Kevin J. O'Hara......... 38 Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer
Colin V.K. Williams..... 59 Executive Vice President
Ivan Barkhorn........... 48 Senior Vice President
Michael D. Jones........ 42 Senior Vice President
Thomas C. Stortz........ 48 Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary
Philip B. Fletcher...... 66 Director
William L. Grewcock..... 73 Director
Richard R. Jaros........ 47 Director
Robert E. Julian........ 60 Director
David C. McCourt........ 42 Director
Kenneth E. Stinson...... 56 Director
Michael B. Yanney....... 65 Director

Other Management

Set forth below is information as of September 1, 1999 about the following
members of senior management of the Company.

Name Age Position
---- --- --------

Jimmy D. Byrd........... 38 President and Chief Executive Officer of PKSIS
Daniel P. Caruso........ 36 Senior Vice President
Donald H. Gips.......... 39 Senior Vice President
Joseph M. Howell, III... 53 Senior Vice President
Gail P. Smith........... 39 Senior Vice President
Thomas Sweeney.......... 38 Senior Vice President
Ronald J. Vidal......... 38 Senior Vice President
Sureel A. Choksi........ 26 Vice President and Treasurer

Walter Scott, Jr. has been the Chairman of the Board of the Company since
September 1979, and a director of the Company since April 1964. Mr. Scott has
been Chairman Emeritus of New PKS since the split-off. Mr. Scott is also a
director of New PKS, Berkshire Hathaway Inc., Burlington Resources Inc.,
MidAmerican, ConAgra, Inc., Commonwealth Telephone, RCN, U.S. Bancorp and
Valmont Industries, Inc.

James Q. Crowe has been the President and Chief Executive Officer of the
Company since August 1997, and a director of the Company since June 1993. Mr.
Crowe was President and Chief Executive Officer of MFS from June 1993 to June
1997. Mr. Crowe also served as Chairman of the Board of WorldCom from January
1997 until July 1997, and as Chairman of the Board of MFS from 1992 through
1996. Mr. Crowe is presently a director of New PKS, Commonwealth Telephone, RCN
and InaCom Communications, Inc.

R. Douglas Bradbury has been Executive Vice President and Chief Financial
Officer of the Company since August 1997, and a director of the Company since
March 1998. Mr. Bradbury served as Chief Financial Officer of MFS from 1992 to
1996, Senior Vice President of MFS from 1992 to 1995, and Executive Vice
President of MFS from 1995 to 1996.

S-71

Kevin J. O'Hara has been Executive Vice President of the Company since
August 1997, and Chief Operating Officer of the Company since March 1998. Prior
to that, Mr. O'Hara served as President and Chief Executive Officer of MFS
Global Network Services, Inc. from 1995 to 1997, and as Senior Vice President
of MFS and President of MFS Development, Inc. from October 1992 to August 1995.
From 1990 to 1992, he was a Vice President of MFS Telecom, Inc. ("MFS
Telecom").

Colin V.K. Williams has been Executive Vice President of the Company since
July 1998 and President of Level 3 International, Inc. since July 1998. Prior
to joining the company, Mr. Williams was Chairman of WorldCom International,
Inc., where he was responsible for the international communications business
and the development and operation of WorldCom's fiber networks overseas. In
1993 Mr. Williams initiated and built the international operations of MFS.
Prior to joining MFS, Mr. Williams was Corporate Director, Business Development
at British Telecom from 1988 until 1992.

Ivan Barkhorn has been Senior Vice President of Sales and Marketing
Operations at the Company since May 1999. He was a founding partner at Colorado
Strategy Group from 1993 to 1999 and a partner at McKinsey & Company from 1982
to May 1993.

Michael D. Jones has served as Senior Vice President and Chief Information
Officer of the Company since December 1998. Prior to that, Mr. Jones was Vice
President and Chief Information Officer of Corporate Express, Inc. from May
1994 to May 1998.

Thomas C. Stortz has been Senior Vice President, General Counsel and
Secretary of the Company since September 1998. Prior to that, he served as Vice
President and General Counsel of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. and Kiewit
Construction Group, Inc. from April 1991 to September 1998. He has served as a
director of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc., RCN, C-TEC, Kiewit Diversified Group Inc.
and CCL Industries, Inc.

Philip B. Fletcher has been a director of the Company since February 1999.
Mr. Fletcher was Chairman of the Board of ConAgra, Inc. from May 1993 until
September 1998. Mr. Fletcher was Chief Executive Officer of ConAgra, Inc. from
September 1992 to September 1997. Mr. Fletcher is a director of ConAgra, Inc.
and chairman of its executive committee.

William L. Grewcock has been a director of the Company since January 1968.
Prior to the split-off, Mr. Grewcock was Vice Chairman of the Company for more
than five years. He is presently a director of New PKS.

Richard R. Jaros has been a director of the Company since June 1993 and
served as President of the Company from 1996 to 1997. Mr. Jaros served as
Executive Vice President of the Company from 1993 to 1996 and Chief Financial
Officer of the Company from 1995 to 1996. He also served as President and Chief
Operating Officer of CalEnergy from 1992 to 1993, and is presently a director
of MidAmerican, Commonwealth Telephone and RCN.

Robert E. Julian has been a director of the Company since March 31, 1998.
Mr. Julian has also been Chairman of the Board of PKSIS since 1995. From 1992
to 1995 Mr. Julian served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial
Officer of the Company.

David C. McCourt has been a director of the Company since March 31, 1998.
Mr. McCourt has also served as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of
Commonwealth Telephone and RCN since October 1997. From 1993 to 1997 Mr.
McCourt served as Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of C-TEC.

S-72

Kenneth E. Stinson has been a director of the Company since January 1987.
Mr. Stinson has been Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of New
PKS since the Split-Off. Prior to the Split-Off, Mr. Stinson was Executive Vice
President of the Company for more than the last five years. Mr. Stinson is also
a director of ConAgra, Inc. and Valmont Industries, Inc.

Michael B. Yanney has been a director of the Company since March 31, 1998.
He has served as Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer
of America First Companies L.L.C. for more than the last five years. Mr. Yanney
is also a director of Burlington Northern Santa Fe Corporation, RCN, Forest Oil
Corporation and Mid-America Apartment Communities, Inc.

Jimmy D. Byrd has been the President and Chief Executive Officer of PKSIS
since March 1999. Mr. Byrd was President and General Manager of the New South
Wales Office of Corporate Express, Inc. and Chief Information Officer of
Corporate Express, Inc. Australia/New Zealand from 1997 to 1999. From 1993 to
1997 he was Vice President and CIO for Temple-Inland, Inc., was a National
Sales Manager for Visual Information Technologies from 1990 to 1993 and was an
Advisory Marketing Representative for IBM from 1982 to 1990.

Daniel P. Caruso has been Senior Vice President, Network Services of the
Company since October 1997. Prior to that, Mr. Caruso was Senior Vice
President, Local Service Delivery of WorldCom from December 1992 to September
1997 and was a member of the senior management of Ameritech from June 1986 to
November 1992.

Donald H. Gips has been Senior Vice President, Corporate Development of the
Company since November 1998. Prior to that, Mr. Gips served in the White House
as Chief Domestic Policy Advisor to Vice President Gore from April 1997 to
April 1998. Before working at the White House, Mr. Gips was at the Federal
Communications Commission as the International Bureau Chief and Director of
Strategic Policy from January 1994 to April 1997. Prior to his government
service, Mr. Gips was a management consultant at McKinsey and Company.

Joseph M. Howell, III has been Senior Vice President, Corporate Marketing of
the Company since October 1997. Prior to that, Mr. Howell was Senior Vice
President of MFS/WorldCom from 1993 to 1997.

Gail P. Smith has been Senior Vice President, International Sales and
Marketing of the Company since December 1998. Prior to that, Ms. Smith was Vice
President and General Manager of WorldCom International Networks from November
1994 to July 1997 and European Marketing Director during the start-up phase of
MFS International.

Thomas P. Sweeney has been Senior Vice President, Marketing of the Company
since December 1997. Prior to that, Mr. Sweeney was Vice President, Sales
Operations of MFS Intelenet, Inc. ("MFS Intelenet") from 1995 to 1996, Senior
Vice President, Marketing of MFS Intelenet from 1996 to 1997 and Senior Vice
President, Business Development of MFS/WorldCom during 1997.

Ronald J. Vidal has been Senior Vice President, New Ventures of the Company
since October 1997. Prior to that, Mr. Vidal was a Vice President of
MFS/WorldCom from September 1992 to October 1997. Mr. Vidal joined the Company
in construction project management in July 1983.

Sureel A. Choksi has been Vice President and Treasurer of the Company since
January 1999. Prior to that, Mr. Choksi was a Director of Finance at the
Company from 1997 to 1998, an Associate at TeleSoft Management, LLC in 1997 and
an Analyst at Gleacher Natwest from 1995 to 1997.

The Board is divided into three classes, designated Class I, Class II and
Class III, each class consisting, as nearly as may be possible, of one-third of
the total number of directors constituting the Board. The Class I Directors
consist of Walter Scott, Jr., James Q. Crowe and Philip B. Fletcher; the

S-73

Class II Directors consist of William L. Grewcock, Richard R. Jaros, Robert E.
Julian and David C. McCourt; and the Class III Directors consist of R. Douglas
Bradbury, Kenneth E. Stinson and Michael B. Yanney. There is one vacancy among
the Class I Directors. The term of the Class I Directors will terminate on the
date of the 2001 annual meeting of stockholders; the term of the Class II
Directors will terminate on the date of the 2002 annual meeting of
stockholders; and the term of the initial Class III Directors will terminate on
the date of the 2000 annual meeting of stockholders. At each annual meeting of
stockholders, successors to the class of directors whose term expires at that
annual meeting will be elected for three-year terms. The Company's officers are
elected annually to serve until each successor is elected and qualified or
until his death, resignation or removal.

S-74

SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the
beneficial ownership of our common stock, as of August 31, 1999, by the
Company's directors, executive officers, and directors and executive officers
as a group, and the only person known by the Company to beneficially own more
than 5% of the outstanding common stock.

Percent of common
Number of shares of stock beneficially
Name common stock owned
- ---- ------------------- ------------------

Walter Scott, Jr.(1)................... 34,980,455 10.3%
James Q. Crowe(2)...................... 11,039,614 3.2
R. Douglas Bradbury(3)................. 2,705,190 *
Kevin J. O'Hara(4)..................... 1,855,160 *
Colin V.K. Williams.................... 426,344 *
Philip B. Fletcher..................... 5,000 *
William L. Grewcock(5)................. 11,525,428 3.4
Richard R. Jaros(6).................... 3,497,498 1.0
Robert E. Julian....................... 3,993,580 1.2
David C. McCourt....................... 115,000 *
Kenneth E. Stinson..................... 724,728 *
Michael B. Yanney...................... 115,620 *
Directors and Executive Officers as a
Group (16 persons)(7)................. 72,064,077 21.2
Donald L. Sturm(8)..................... 18,373,750 5.9

- --------
* Less than 1%.
(1) Includes 99,700 shares of common stock held by the Suzanne Scott
Irrevocable Trust as to which Mr. Scott shares voting and investment
powers. Excludes 383,502 shares of common stock issuable upon conversion of
$25 million in principal amount of notes that Mr. Scott has indicated he
will purchase in the offering.
(2) Includes 712,000 shares of common stock held by The Elmwood Trust, of which
Mr. Crowe is the sole beneficiary.
(3) Includes 400,000 shares of common stock subject to vested non-qualified
stock options.
(4) Includes 46,000 shares of common stock held by Kevin J. O'Hara Family LTD
Partnership. Includes 200,000 shares of common stock subject to vested non-
qualified stock options.
(5) Includes 1,154,640 shares of common stock held by Grewcock Family Limited
Partnership. Includes 351,230 shares of common stock held by the Bill &
Berniece Grewcock Foundation as to which Mr. Grewcock shares voting and
investment powers.
(6) Includes 370,000 shares of common stock held by the Jaros Family Limited
Partnership. Includes 1,269,500 shares of common stock held by Mr. Jaros
and 730,000 shares of common stock subject to options held by a grantor
trust, of which Mr. Jaros is the residual beneficiary. See "Certain
Transactions and Relationships."
(7) Includes 892,995 shares of common stock subject to vested non-qualified
stock options.
(8) Mr. Sturm's business address is 3033 East First Avenue, Denver, Colorado
80206. Based solely on Mr. Sturm's Schedule 13D dated May 5, 1998, adjusted
for a subsequent stock dividend, Mr. Sturm owns 15,610,310 shares of common
stock, and has voting and investment power with respect to 2,613,440 shares
held by trusts and partnerships established for family members and
beneficially owns 150,000 shares as a member of the board of directors of
the University of Denver.

S-75

CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS AND RELATIONSHIPS

Certain Relationships and Related Transactions

All share information has been adjusted to reflect the Company's 2-for-1
stock split, effected as a stock dividend in August 1998.

In connection with his retention as Chief Executive Officer of the Company,
Mr. Crowe entered into an engagement agreement (the "Engagement Agreement")
with the Company. Under the Engagement Agreement, the Company acquired from Mr.
Crowe, Mr. Bradbury and an additional individual, Broadband Capital Group,
L.L.C., a company formed to develop investment opportunities, for a purchase
price of $68,523, the owners' cash investment in that company. Pursuant to the
Engagement Agreement, the Company sold 10,000,000 shares of the Company's
former Class D Diversified Group Convertible Exchangeable Common Stock, par
value $.0625 per share (the "Class D Stock") to Mr. Crowe and 2,500,000 shares
of Class D Stock to Mr. Bradbury, in each case at $5.425 per share. The
Engagement Agreement also provided that the Company would make available for
sale, from time to time prior to the consummation of the Split-off, to certain
employees of the Company designated by Mr. Crowe in connection with the
implementation of the Business Plan, up to an aggregate of 10,500,000 shares of
Class D Stock.

The Company entered into a separation agreement with Mr. Jaros, a director
of the Company, in connection with the resignation of Mr. Jaros as an executive
officer of the Company effective July 31, 1997. Under the separation agreement,
the Company paid Mr. Jaros $262,350 as an executive bonus payment in 1998.

On July 1, 1998, the Company issued 187,706 shares of its common stock to
Mr. Colin V.K. Williams, an Executive Vice President of the Company, in
connection with the Company's acquisition of UltraLine (Bermuda) Limited, a
company owned by Mr. Williams. The value of the transaction, based upon the
trading price of its common stock on that date, was approximately $5 million.

On June 18, 1998, Level 3 entered into a contract with Peter Kiewit Sons,
Inc. for the construction of Level 3's nearly 16,000 mile North American
intercity network. Construction, which is expected to be completed during the
first quarter of 2001, will cost an estimated $2 billion. As of June 30, 1999,
Level 3 incurred costs under this contract of approximately $429 million. In
addition, Level 3 has retained PKS as the general contractor for the
construction of Level 3's campus headquarters facility being built in the City
of Broomfield, Colorado. As of June 30, 1999, Level 3 incurred costs under this
contract of approximately $60 million.

In connection with the Split-off, Level 3 and PKS entered into various
agreements intended to implement the Split-off, including a separation
agreement and a tax-sharing agreement.

Separation Agreement. Level 3 and PKS entered into a separation agreement
(the "Separation Agreement") relating to the allocation of certain risks and
responsibilities between PKS and Level 3 after the Split-off and certain other
matters. The Separation Agreement provides that each of PKS and Level 3 will
indemnify the other with respect to the activities of its subsidiary business
groups, except as specifically provided under other agreements between the
companies. The cross-indemnities are intended to allocate financial
responsibility to PKS for liabilities arising out of the construction
businesses formerly conducted by Level 3, and to allocate to Level 3 financial
responsibility for liabilities arising out of the non-construction businesses
conducted by Level 3. The Separation Agreement also allocates between PKS and
Level 3 certain corporate-level risk exposures not readily allocable to either
the construction businesses or the non-construction businesses.

The Separation Agreement provides that each of Level 3 and PKS will be
granted access to certain records and information in the possession of the
other company, and requires that each of

S-76

Level 3 and PKS retain all such information in its possession for a period of
ten years following the Split-off. Under the Separation Agreement, each company
is required to give the other company prior notice of any intention to dispose
of any such information.

The Separation Agreement provides that, except as otherwise set forth
therein or in any related agreement, costs and expenses in connection with the
Split-off will be paid 82.5% by Level 3 and 17.5% by PKS. On March 18, 1998,
Level 3 and PKS entered into an amendment to the Separation Agreement that
provides that PKS will bear substantially all of those expenses if the Level 3
Board determined to force conversion of all outstanding Class R Stock of Level
3 on or before July 15, 1998 (a "Forced Conversion Determination").

The Level 3 Board made such a determination and, accordingly, substantially
all of those expenses will be borne by PKS.

Tax Sharing Agreement. Level 3 and PKS have entered into a tax sharing
agreement (the "Tax Sharing Agreement") that defines each company's rights and
obligations with respect to deficiencies and refunds of federal, state and
other taxes relating to operations for tax years (or portions thereof) ending
prior to the Split-off and with respect to certain tax attributes of Level 3
and PKS after the Split-off. Under the Tax Sharing Agreement, with respect to
periods (or portions thereof) ending on or before the Split-off, Level 3 and
PKS generally will be responsible for paying the taxes relating to such returns
(including any subsequent adjustments resulting from the redetermination of
such tax liabilities by the applicable taxing authorities) that are allocable
to the non-construction business and the construction business, respectively.

The Tax Sharing Agreement also provides that Level 3 and PKS will indemnify
the other from certain taxes and expenses that would be assessed on PKS and
Level 3, respectively, if the Split-off were determined to be taxable, but
solely to the extent that such determination arose out of the breach by Level 3
or PKS, respectively, of certain representations made to the Internal Revenue
Service in connection with the private letter ruling issued with respect to the
Split-off. Under the Tax Sharing Agreement, if the Split-off were determined to
be taxable for any other reason, those taxes and certain other taxes associated
with the Split-off (together, "Split-off Taxes") would be allocated 82.5% to
Level 3 and 17.5% to PKS. The Tax Sharing Agreement, however, provides that
Split-off Taxes will be allocated one-half to each of Level 3 and PKS if a
Forced Conversion Determination is made. As a result of the Forced Conversion
Determination, the Split-off Taxes would be so allocated. Finally, the Tax
Sharing Agreement provides, under certain circumstances, for certain liquidated
damage payments from Level 3 to PKS if the Split-off were determined to be
taxable, which are intended to compensate stockholders of PKS indirectly for
taxes assessed upon them in that event. Those liquidated damage payments,
however, are reduced because of the Forced Conversion Determination.

Mine Management Agreement. In 1992, PKS and Level 3 entered into a mine
management agreement (the "Mine Management Agreement") pursuant to which a
subsidiary of PKS, Kiewit Mining Group Inc. ("KMG"), provides mine management
and related services for Level 3's coal mining properties. In consideration of
the provision of such services, KMG receives a fee equal to thirty percent of
the adjusted operating income of the coal mining properties. The term of the
Mine Management Agreement expires on January 1, 2016.

In connection with the Split-off, the Mine Management Agreement was amended
to provide KMG with a right of offer in the event that Level 3 were to
determine to sell any or all of its coal mining properties. Under the right of
offer, Level 3 would be required to offer to sell those properties to KMG at
the price that Level 3 would seek to sell the properties to a third party. If
KMG were to decline to purchase the properties at that price, Level 3 would be
free to sell them to a third party for an amount greater than or equal to that
price. If Level 3 were to sell the properties to a third party, thus
terminating the Mine Management Agreement, it would be required to pay KMG an
amount equal to the discounted present value to KMG of the Mine Management
Agreement, determined, if necessary, by an appraisal process.

S-77

DESCRIPTION OF OTHER INDEBTEDNESS OF LEVEL 3

The following is a description of Level 3's material indebtedness other than
the notes. The following summaries of the existing issues of Level 3's senior
notes are qualified in their entirety by reference to the indentures to which
each issue of senior notes relates. Copies of these indentures are available on
request to Level 3.

Proposed Secured Credit Facility

Certain Level 3 subsidiaries propose to enter into a $1.375 billion senior
secured credit facility that has been underwritten by a syndicate of banks and
other financial institutions led by Chase Securities, Inc., as sole manager and
lead arranger, Chase Securities Inc., Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P., J.P.
Morgan Securities Inc. and Salomon Smith Barney Inc., as co-syndication agents,
and The Chase Manhattan Bank, as administrative agent. The credit facility will
consist of a $450 million tranche A term loan facility, a $275 million tranche
B term loan facility and a $650 million revolving credit facility. Level 3
expects that its subsidiaries will borrow $475 million under these facilities
at the closing of the proposed secured credit facility. The proposed secured
credit facility is currently in general syndication and is subject to customary
conditions for a transaction of this type, including completion of definitive
documentation and finalization of terms and conditions. Level 3 expects to
close the proposed secured credit facility by the end of September 1999.

All obligations under the revolving credit facility will be secured by
substantially all the assets of Level 3 and, subject to certain exceptions, its
wholly owned domestic subsidiaries (other than the borrower under the term loan
facilities). Such assets will also secure a portion of the term loan facilities
in an amount equal to $100 million plus, with certain exceptions, the undrawn
amount of the revolving credit facility. Additionally, all obligations under
the term loan facilities will be secured by the equipment that is purchased
with the proceeds of the term loan facilities and the lease rentals derived
from the lease of such equipment to the Company's operating subsidiaries. Level
3 and, subject to certain exceptions, all its domestic subsidiaries (other than
the borrower under the term loan facilities) will guarantee all obligations
under the revolving credit facility. Level 3 and, subject to certain
exceptions, all its domestic subsidiaries will guarantee all obligations under
the term loan facilities.

The revolving credit facility and the tranche A term loan facility mature
eight years after the date of the proposed credit agreement, and the tranche B
term loan facility matures on January 15, 2008.

Amounts drawn under the revolving credit facility and the term loans will
bear interest, at the option of the Company, at the alternate base rate or
reserve-adjusted London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) plus, in each case,
applicable margins based upon, in the case of the revolving credit facility and
the tranche A term loan facility, the ratings established by Moody's and S&P
for the highest rated senior unsecured long-term debt of Level 3. The
applicable margins for the revolving credit facility and the tranche A term
loan facility range from 50 to 175 basis points over the alternate base rate
and from 150 to 275 basis points over LIBOR and are fixed for the tranche B
term loan facility at 2.50% over the alternate base rate and 3.50% over LIBOR.

Beginning on March 31, 2004, the revolving credit facility provides for
automatic and permanent quarterly reductions of the amount available for
borrowing under that facility, commencing at$17.25 million per quarter and
increasing to approximately $61 million per quarter. The tranche A term loan
facility amortizes in consecutive quarterly payments beginning on March 31,
2004, commencing at $9 million per quarter and increasing to $58.5 million per
quarter. The tranche B term loan facility amortizes with substantially all of
the scheduled payments due in equal amounts from March 31, 2007 to January 15,
2008.

The credit agreement will require that indebtedness outstanding under the
term loan facilities be paid with all of the net proceeds with respect to
certain asset sales and, beginning December 31, 2003, with 50% of excess cash
flow for each fiscal year.

S-78

The credit agreement will contain customary negative covenants restricting
and limiting the ability of Level 3, the borrowers and any other restricted
subsidiary to engage in certain activities, including but not limited to:

. limitations on indebtedness and the incurrence of liens,

. restrictions on sale lease-back transactions, consolidations, mergers,
sale of assets, transactions with affiliates and investments, and

. restrictions on issuance of preferred stock, dividends and distributions
on capital stock, and other similar distributions, including
distributions to Level 3 by its subsidiaries.

The credit agreement will also require Level 3 and the borrowers to comply
with specific financial and operational tests and maintain financial ratios,
including a:

. minimum intercity route miles completed test;

. minimum markets with fiber networks test;

. minimum telecom revenue test;

. maximum total debt to contributed capital ratio;

. maximum total debt to total telecommunications revenue ratio;

. maximum senior debt to gross property, plant and equipment ratio; and

. beginning December 31, 2004, maximum total debt to EBITDA.

The proposed secured credit facility will contain customary events of
default, including an event of default upon certain changes of control of Level
3 and certain defaults under other indebtedness having an outstanding principal
amount exceeding $25 million.

Neither the closing of the proposed secured credit facility nor the closing
of this offering of notes is conditioned upon the closing of the other
transaction. Although Level 3 anticipates that the proposed secured credit
facility will be substantially as described above, its final terms may differ
from this description.

9 1/8% Senior Notes Due 2008

On April 28, 1998, the Company issued $2 billion aggregate principal amount
of 9 1/8% senior notes due 2008 under an indenture between Level 3 and IBJ
Schroder Bank & Trust Company, now known as IBJ Whitehall Bank & Trust Company,
as trustee. The 9 1/8% senior notes are senior unsecured obligations of the
Company. They rank equally in right of payment with Level 3's 10 1/2% senior
discount notes and all other existing and future senior unsecured indebtedness
of Level 3. The notes bear interest at a rate of 9 1/8% per annum, payable
semiannually in arrears on May 1 and November 1.

Level 3 may redeem the 9 1/8% senior notes, in whole or in part, at any time
on or after May 1, 2003. If a redemption occurs before May 1, 2006, Level 3
will pay a premium on the principal amount of the 9 1/8% senior notes redeemed.
This premium decreases annually from approximately 4.5% for a redemption during
the twelve month period beginning on May 1, 2003 to approximately 1.5% for a
redemption during the twelve month period beginning on May 1, 2005.

In addition, at any time prior to May 1, 2001, Level 3 may redeem up to 35%
of the original aggregate principal amount of the 9 1/8% senior notes with the
net proceeds of specified public or private offerings of its common stock at a
redemption price equal to 109.125% of the principal amount of the notes
redeemed, plus any accrued and unpaid interest, if any. At least 65% of the
aggregate principal amount of 9 1/8% senior notes must remain outstanding after
such a redemption.

If an event treated as a change in control of Level 3 occurs, Level 3 will
be obligated to offer to purchase all of the outstanding notes at a purchase
price of 101% of the principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if
any.

S-79

The indenture relating to the 9 1/8% senior notes places restrictions on the
ability of Level 3 and some of its subsidiaries to:

. incur additional indebtedness;

. pay dividends or make other restricted payments and transfers;

. create liens;

. sell assets;

. issue or sell capital stock of some of its subsidiaries;

. enter into transactions, including transactions with affiliates; and

. in the case of Level 3, consolidate, merge or sell substantially all of
Level 3's assets.

The holders of the 9 1/8% senior notes may force Level 3 to immediately
repay the principal on the 9 1/8% senior notes, including interest to the
acceleration date, if certain defaults exist under other indebtedness having an
outstanding principal amount of at least $25 million.

10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes Due 2008

On December 2, 1998, the Company issued $833.815 million aggregate principal
amount at maturity of 10 1/2% senior discount notes due 2008 under an indenture
between Level 3 and IBJ Whitehall Bank & Trust Company, as trustee. The 10 1/2%
senior discount notes are senior unsecured obligations of the Company. They
rank equally in right of payment with the 9 1/8% senior notes and all other
existing and future senior unsecured indebtedness of Level 3.

The issue price of the 10 1/2% senior discount notes was approximately 60%
of the principal amount at maturity. The notes accrete at a rate of 10 1/2% per
year, compounded semiannually, to 100% of their principal amount by December 1,
2003. Cash interest will not begin to accrue on the 10 1/2% senior discount
notes until December 1, 2003, unless Level 3 elects to commence the accrual on
or after December 1, 2001. After December 1, 2003, interest will accrue at a
rate of 10 1/2% and will be payable semiannually on June 1 and December 1,
beginning June 1, 2004.

Level 3 may redeem the 10 1/2% senior discount notes, in whole or in part,
at any time on or after December 1, 2003. If a redemption occurs before
December 1, 2006, Level 3 will pay a premium on the accreted value of the 10
1/2% senior discount notes redeemed. This premium decreases annually from
approximately 5.25% for a redemption during the twelve month period beginning
on December 1, 2003 to approximately 1.75% for a redemption during the twelve
month period beginning on December 1, 2005.

In addition, at any time prior to December 1, 2001, Level 3 may redeem up to
35% of the original aggregate principal amount at maturity of the 10 1/2%
senior discount notes with the net proceeds of specified public or private
offerings of its common stock at a redemption price equal to 110.5% of the
accreted value of the notes redeemed, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. At
least 65% of the aggregate principal amount at maturity of the notes must
remain outstanding after a such redemption.

If an event treated as a change in control of Level 3 occurs, Level 3 will
be obligated to offer to purchase all of the outstanding notes at a purchase
price of 101% of the accreted value, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any.

The indenture relating to the 10 1/2% senior discount notes places certain
restrictions on the actions of Level 3 and some of its subsidiaries which are
substantially similar to those contained in the indenture relating to the 9
1/8% senior notes. The indenture also contains a provision relating to the
acceleration of the 10 1/2% senior discount notes that is substantially similar
to that contained in the indenture relating to the 9 1/8% senior notes.

S-80

DESCRIPTION OF NOTES

The notes will be issued under an indenture to be dated as of September 20,
1999, between Level 3 and IBJ Whitehall Bank & Trust Company, as trustee, the
form of which is filed as an exhibit to the registration statement of which the
accompanying prospectus is a part, and a first supplemental indenture to be
dated as of September 20, 1999 (collectively referred to herein as the "notes
indenture" or the "indenture"), between Level 3 and the trustee. Wherever
particular defined terms of the notes indenture (including the notes) are
referred to, such defined terms are incorporated herein by reference (the notes
are referred to in the notes indenture as "Securities"). The following
summaries of certain provisions of the notes indenture do not purport to be
complete and are subject to, and are qualified in their entirety by reference
to, the detailed provisions of the notes and the notes indenture, including the
definitions therein of certain terms.

General

The notes will be unsecured, direct, general, subordinated obligations of
Level 3, will be limited to $750,000,000 aggregate principal amount (plus up to
an additional $112,500,000 aggregate principal amount to cover sales of notes
in excess of $750,000,000 aggregate principal amount) and will mature on
September 15, 2009. Payment in full of the principal amount of the notes will
be due on September 15, 2009 at a price of 100% of the principal amount
thereof.

The notes will bear interest at the rate per annum shown on the front cover
of this prospectus supplement from September 20, 1999 or from the most recent
Interest Payment Date to which interest has been paid or provided for, payable
semi-annually on March 15 and September 15 of each year, commencing March 15,
2000, until the principal thereof is paid or made available for payment, to the
person in whose name the note is registered at the close of business on the
preceding March 1 or September 1, as the case may be.

The notes will be convertible into shares of common stock initially at the
conversion rate stated on the front cover of this prospectus supplement,
subject to adjustment upon the occurrence of certain events described under "--
Conversion Rights," at any time following the initial issue date of the notes
and before the close of business on the Business Day immediately preceding
September 15, 2009, unless previously repurchased or unless Level 3 has caused
the conversion rights of holders of notes to expire, as specified below under
"--Expiration of Conversion Rights."

The notes are subject to repurchase by Level 3 at the option of the holders,
as described below under "--Repurchase at Option of Holders Upon a Change of
Control."

The principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the notes will be
payable, and the notes may be surrendered for registration of transfer,
exchange and conversion, at the office or agency of the trustee in the Borough
of Manhattan, The City of New York. In addition, payment of interest may, at
the option of Level 3, be made by check mailed to the address of the person
entitled thereto as it appears in the Security Register. See "--Payment and
Conversion." Payments, transfers, exchanges and conversions relating to
beneficial interests in notes issued in book-entry form will be subject to the
procedures applicable to global notes described below.

Level 3 initially will appoint the trustee at its Corporate Trust Office as
paying agent, transfer agent, registrar and conversion agent for the notes. In
such capacities, the trustee will be responsible for, among other things, (1)
maintaining a record of the aggregate holdings of notes represented by the
global note, as defined below, and accepting notes for exchange and
registration of transfer, (2) ensuring that payments of principal, premium, if
any, and interest received by the trustee from Level 3 in respect of the notes
are duly paid to DTC or its nominees, (3) transmitting to Level 3 any notices
from holders of the notes, (4) accepting conversion notices and related
documents and transmitting the relevant items to Level 3 and (5) delivering
certificates for common stock issued upon conversion of the notes.

S-81

Level 3 will cause each transfer agent to act as a registrar and will cause
to be kept at the office of such transfer agent a register in which, subject to
such reasonable regulations as it may prescribe, Level 3 will provide for
registration of transfers of the notes. Level 3 may vary or terminate the
appointment of any paying agent, transfer agent or conversion agent, or appoint
additional or other such agents or approve any change in the office through
which any such agent acts, provided that there shall at all times be maintained
by Level 3, a paying agent, a transfer agent and a conversion agent in the
Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York. Level 3 will cause notice of any
resignation, termination or appointment of the trustee or any paying agent,
transfer agent or conversion agent, and of any change in the office through
which any such agent will act, to be provided to holders of the notes.

No service charge will be made for any registration of transfer or exchange
of notes, but Level 3 may require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax
or other governmental charge payable in connection therewith.

Form, Denomination, Transfer, Exchange and Book-Entry Procedures

Notes will be issued only in fully registered form, without interest
coupons, in minimum denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples in excess
thereof. Notes sold in the offering will be issued only against payment
therefor in immediately available funds.

The notes initially will be represented by one or more notes in registered,
global form, without interest coupons (collectively, the "global notes" or
"global note"). The global notes will be deposited upon issuance with the
trustee as custodian for DTC, in New York, New York, and registered in the name
of DTC or its nominee, in each case for credit to an account of a direct or
indirect participant in DTC as described below.

Transfers of beneficial interests in the global notes will be subject to the
applicable rules and procedures of DTC and its direct or indirect participants,
which may change from time to time.

Except as set forth below, the global notes may be transferred, in whole and
not in part, only to another nominee of DTC or to a successor of DTC or its
nominee. Beneficial interests in the global notes may not be exchanged for
notes in certificated form except in the limited circumstances described below
under "--Exchanges of Book-Entry Notes for Certificated Notes."

Exchanges of Book-Entry Notes for Certificated Notes

A beneficial interest in a global note may not be exchanged for a note in
certificated form unless (1) DTC (x) notifies Level 3 that it is unwilling or
unable to continue as Depositary for the global note or (y) has ceased to be a
clearing agency registered under the Exchange Act and in either case Level 3
thereupon fails to appoint a successor Depositary within 90 days, (2) Level 3,
at its option, notifies the trustee in writing that it elects to cause the
issuance of the notes in certificated form or (3) there shall have occurred and
be continuing an Event of Default or any event which after notice or lapse of
time or both would be an Event of Default with respect to the notes. In all
cases, certificated notes delivered in exchange for any global note or
beneficial interests therein will be registered in the names, and issued in any
approved denominations, requested by or on behalf of the Depositary, in
accordance with its customary procedures.

Certain Book-entry Procedures for Global Notes

The descriptions of the operations and procedures of DTC that follow are
provided solely as a matter of convenience. These operations and procedures are
solely within the control of DTC and are subject to changes by them from time
to time. Level 3 takes no responsibility for these operations and procedures
and urges investors to contact DTC or its participants directly to discuss
these matters.

S-82

DTC has advised Level 3 as follows: DTC is a limited purpose trust company
organized under the laws of the State of New York, a member of the Federal
Reserve System, a "clearing corporation" within the meaning of the Uniform
Commercial Code and a "Clearing Agency" registered pursuant to the provisions
of Section 17A of the Exchange Act. DTC was created to hold securities for its
participants ("participants") and facilitate the clearance and settlement of
securities transactions between participants through electronic book-entry
changes in accounts of its participants, thereby eliminating the need for
physical transfer and delivery of certificates. Participants include securities
brokers and dealers, banks, trust companies and clearing corporations and may
include certain other organizations. Certain of such participants, or their
representatives, together with other entities, own DTC. Indirect access to the
DTC system is available to other entities such as banks, brokers, dealers and
trust companies that clear through or maintain a custodial relationship with a
participant, either directly or indirectly ("indirect participants").

DTC has advised Level 3 that its current practice, upon the issuance of a
global note, is to credit, on its internal system, the respective principal
amount of the individual beneficial interests represented by such global note
to the accounts with DTC of the participants through which such interests are
to be held. Ownership of beneficial interests in the global note will be shown
on, and the transfer of that ownership will be effected only through, records
maintained by DTC or its nominees, with respect to interests of participants,
and the records of participants and indirect participants, with respect to
interests of persons other than participants.

As long as DTC, or its nominee, is the registered holder of a global note,
DTC or such nominee, as the case may be, will be considered the sole owner and
holder of the notes represented by such global note for all purposes under the
indenture and the notes. Except in the limited circumstances described above
under "--Exchanges of Book-Entry Notes for Certificated Notes," owners of
beneficial interests in a global note will not be entitled to have any portions
of such global note registered in their names, will not receive or be entitled
to receive physical delivery of notes in definitive form and will not be
considered the owners or holders of the global note, or any notes represented
thereby, under the notes indenture or the notes. Accordingly, each person
owning a beneficial interest in the global note must rely on the procedures of
DTC and, if such person is not a participant, those of the participant through
which such person owns its interest, in order to exercise any rights of a
holder under the indenture or such note.

Investors may hold their interests in the global note directly through DTC,
if they are participants in such system, or indirectly through organizations
that are participants in such system. All interests in a global note will be
subject to the procedures and requirements of DTC.

The laws of some states require that certain persons take physical delivery
in definitive form of securities that they own. Consequently, the ability to
transfer beneficial interests in a global note to such persons may be limited
to that extent. Because DTC can act only on behalf of its participants, which
in turn act on behalf of indirect participants and certain banks, the ability
of a person having beneficial interests in a global note to pledge such
interest to persons or entities that do not participate in the DTC system, or
otherwise take actions in respect of such interests, may be affected by the
lack of a physical certificate evidencing such interests.

Cash payment of the principal of, interest on, or the repurchase of the
global note will be made to DTC or its nominee, as the case may be, as the
registered owner of the global note by wire transfer of immediately available
funds on each relevant payment date. Neither Level 3, the trustee nor any of
their respective agents will have any responsibility or liability for any
aspect of the records relating to or payments made on account of beneficial
ownership interests in a global note including any delay by DTC or any
participant or indirect participant in identifying the beneficial ownership
interests, and Level 3 and the trustee may conclusively rely on, and shall be
protected in relying on, instructions from DTC for all purposes.

S-83

Level 3 expects that DTC or its nominee, upon receipt of any cash payment of
principal, interest or the repurchase price in respect of a global note
representing any notes held by it or its nominee, will immediately credit
participants' accounts with payments in amounts proportionate to their
respective beneficial interests in the principal amount of such global note for
such notes as shown on the records of DTC or its nominee (adjusted as necessary
so that such payments are made with respect of whole notes only), unless DTC
has reason to believe that it will not receive payment on such payment date.
Level 3 also expects that payments by participants to owners of beneficial
interests in such global note held through such participants will be governed
by standing instructions and customary practices, as is now the case with
securities held for the accounts of customers registered in "street name." Such
payments will be the responsibility of such participants.

Notice of the expiration of conversion rights will be sent to DTC or its
nominee.

Neither DTC nor its nominee will consent or vote with respect to the notes.
Under its usual procedures, DTC mails an omnibus proxy to the issuer as soon as
possible after the record date. The omnibus proxy assigns DTC's, or its
nominee's, consenting or voting rights to those participants to whose accounts
the notes are credited on the record date identified in a listing attached to
the omnibus proxy.

Interests in the global notes will trade in DTC's Same-Day Funds Settlement
System, and secondary market trading activity in such interests will therefore
settle in immediately available funds, subject in all cases to the rules and
procedures of DTC and its participants. Transfers between participants in DTC
will be effected in accordance with DTC's procedures, and will be settled in
same-day funds.

DTC has advised Level 3 that it will take any action permitted to be taken
by a holder of notes, including the presentation of notes for exchange as
described below and the conversion of notes, only at the direction of one or
more participants to whose account with DTC interests in the global notes are
credited and only in respect of such portion of the aggregate principal amount
of the notes as to which such participant or participants has or have given
such direction. However, if there is an Event of Default, as defined below,
under the notes, DTC reserves the right to exchange the global notes for notes
in certificated form, and to distribute such notes to its participants.

Although DTC has agreed to the foregoing procedures in order to facilitate
transfers of beneficial ownership interests in the global note among
participants, it is under no obligation to perform or continue to perform such
procedures, and such procedures may be discontinued at any time.

None of Level 3, the trustee nor any of their respective agents will have
any responsibility for the performance by DTC, its participants or indirect
participants of their respective obligations under the rules and procedures
governing its operations, including maintaining, supervising or reviewing the
records relating to, or payments made on account of, beneficial ownership
interests in global notes.

Payment and Conversion

The principal of the notes will be payable in U.S. dollars, against
surrender thereof at the Corporate Trust Office of the trustee in the Borough
of Manhattan, The City of New York, in U.S. currency by dollar check or by
transfer to a dollar account maintained by the holder with a bank in New York
City. Payment of interest on a note may be made by dollar check mailed to the
address of the person entitled thereto as such address shall appear in the
Security Register, or, upon written application by the holder to the Security
Registrar setting forth instructions not later than the relevant Record Date,
by transfer to a dollar account maintained by the holder with a bank in the
United States.

S-84

Payments in respect of the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest
on any global note registered in the name of DTC or its nominee will be payable
by the trustee to DTC or its nominee in its capacity as the registered holder
under the notes indenture. Under the terms of the notes indenture, Level 3 and
the trustee will treat the persons in whose names the notes, including the
global notes, are registered as the owners thereof for the purpose of receiving
such payments and for any and all other purposes whatsoever. Consequently,
neither Level 3, the trustee nor any agent of Level 3 or the trustee has or
will have any responsibility or liability for:

(1) any aspect of DTC's records or any participant's or indirect
participant's records relating to or payments made on account of beneficial
ownership interests in the global notes, or for maintaining, supervising or
reviewing any of DTC's records or any participant's or indirect
participant's records relating to the beneficial ownership interests in the
global notes, or

(2) any other matter relating to the actions and practices of DTC or any
of its participants or indirect participants.

Any payment on a note due on any day that is not a Business Day need not be
made on such day, but may be made on the next succeeding Business Day with the
same force and effect as if made on such due date, and no interest shall accrue
on such payment for the period from and after such date. "Business Day," when
used with respect to any place of payment, place of conversion or any other
place, as the case may be, means each Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and
Friday that is not a day on which banking institutions in such place of
payment, place of conversion or other place, as the case may be, are authorized
or obligated by law or executive order to close.

Notes may be surrendered for conversion at the Corporate Trust Office of the
trustee in the Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York. In the case of
global notes, conversion will be effected by DTC upon notice from the holder of
a beneficial interest in a global note in accordance with its rules and
procedures. Notes surrendered for conversion must be accompanied by a
conversion notice and any payments in respect of interest, as applicable, as
described below under "--Conversion Rights."

All moneys (1) deposited with the trustee or any paying agent or (2) then
held by Level 3 in trust for the payment of principal, premium, if any, or
interest on any notes which remain unclaimed at the end of two years after such
payment has become due and payable will be repaid to Level 3, and the holder of
such note will thereafter look only to Level 3 for payment thereof.

Conversion Rights

The holder of any note will have the right, at the holder's option, to
convert any portion of the principal amount of a note that is an integral
multiple of $1,000 into shares of common stock at any time following the
original issue date of the notes and prior to the close of business on the
Business Day immediately preceding the maturity date, unless previously
repurchased or unless Level 3 has caused the conversion rights of holders to
expire. See "--Repurchase at Option of Holders Upon a Change of Control" and
"--Expiration of Conversion Rights." The notes may be converted at a conversion
rate equal to the number of shares per $1,000 principal amount of notes shown
on the front cover of this prospectus supplement (the "Conversion Rate"),
subject to adjustment in certain events as described below. The right to
convert a note delivered for repurchase will terminate (1) at the close of
business on the Business Day immediately preceding the Repurchase Date, as
defined below, for such note, unless Level 3 defaults in making the payment due
upon repurchase, and (2) if Level 3 has exercised its right in accordance with
the terms of the notes indenture to cause the conversion right of holders to
expire, on the conversion expiration date.

The right of conversion attaching to any note may be exercised by the holder
by delivering the note at the Corporate Trust Office of the trustee in the
Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York, accompanied by a duly signed and
completed notice of conversion, a copy of which may be obtained

S-85

from the trustee. The conversion date will be the date on which the note and
the duly signed and completed notice of conversion are so delivered. As
promptly as practicable on or after the conversion date, Level 3 will issue
and deliver to the trustee a certificate or certificates for the number of
full shares of common stock issuable upon conversion, together with payment in
lieu of any fraction of a share; such certificate will be sent by the trustee
to the Conversion Agent for delivery to the holder. Such shares of common
stock issuable upon conversion of the notes, in accordance with the provisions
of the notes indenture, will be fully paid and nonassessable and will also
rank pari passu with the other shares of the common stock outstanding from
time to time.

Holders that surrender notes for conversion on a date that is not an
Interest Payment Date are not entitled to receive any interest for the period
from the next preceding Interest Payment Date to the date of conversion,
except as described below. However, holders of notes on a Regular Record Date,
including notes surrendered for conversion after the Regular Record Date, will
receive the interest payable on such notes on the next succeeding Interest
Payment Date. Accordingly, any note surrendered for conversion during the
period from the close of business on a Regular Record Date to the opening of
business on the next succeeding Interest Payment Date must be accompanied by
payment of an amount equal to the interest payable on such Interest Payment
Date on the principal amount of notes being surrendered for conversion;
provided, however, that no such payment will be required upon the conversion
of any note, or portion thereof, that is eligible to be delivered for
repurchase if, as a result, the right to convert such note would terminate
during the period between such Regular Record Date and the close of business
on the next succeeding Interest Payment Date.

No other payment or adjustment for interest, or for any dividends in
respect of common stock, will be made upon conversion. Holders of common stock
issued upon conversion will not be entitled to receive any dividends payable
to holders of common stock as of any record date before the close of business
on the conversion date. No fractional shares will be issued upon conversion
but, in lieu thereof, an appropriate amount will be paid in cash by Level 3
based on the market price of the common stock at the close of business on the
date of conversion.

A holder delivering a note for conversion will not be required to pay any
taxes or duties in respect of the issue or delivery of common stock on
conversion. However, Level 3 shall not be required to pay any tax or duty that
may be payable in respect of any transfer involved in the issue or delivery of
the common stock in a name other than that of the holder of the note.
Certificates representing shares of common stock will not be issued or
delivered unless the person requesting such issue has paid to Level 3 the
amount of any such tax or duty or has established to the satisfaction of Level
3 that such tax or duty has been paid.

The Conversion Rate is subject to adjustment in certain events, including
without duplication:

(a) dividends, and other distributions, payable in common stock on
shares of stock of Level 3,

(b) the issuance to all holders of common stock of rights, options or
warrants entitling them to subscribe for or purchase common stock (or
securities convertible into common stock) at less than the then Average
Current Market Price (determined as provided in the indenture) of such
common stock as of the record date for holders entitled to receive such
rights, options or warrants,

(d) distributions to all holders of common stock of evidences of
indebtedness of Level 3, shares of capital stock, cash or assets, including
securities, but excluding those dividends, rights, options, warrants and
distributions referred to in clauses (a) and (b) above, dividends and
distributions paid exclusively in cash and distributions upon mergers or
consolidations to which the next succeeding paragraph applies,

S-86

(e) distributions consisting exclusively of cash, excluding any cash
portion of distributions referred to in (d) above, or cash distributed upon
a merger or consolidation to which the next succeeding paragraph applies,
to all holders of common stock in an aggregate amount that, combined
together with (1) other such all-cash distributions made within the
preceding 12 months in respect of which no adjustment has been made and (2)
any cash and the fair market value of other consideration payable in
respect of any tender offer by Level 3 or any of its subsidiaries for
common stock concluded within the preceding 12 months in respect of which
no adjustment has been made, exceeds 10% of Level 3's market
capitalization, being the product of the Average Current Market Price of
the common stock on the record date for such distribution and the number of
shares of common stock then outstanding, and

(f) the successful completion of a tender offer made by Level 3 or any
of its subsidiaries for common stock which involves an aggregate
consideration that, together with (1) any cash and other consideration
payable in a tender offer by Level 3 or any of its subsidiaries for common
stock expiring within the 12 months preceding the expiration of such tender
offer in respect of which no adjustment has been made and (2) the aggregate
amount of any such all-cash distributions referred to in (e) above to all
holders of common stock within the 12 months preceding the expiration of
such tender offer in respect of which no adjustments have been made,
exceeds 10% of Level 3's market capitalization on the expiration of such
tender offer.

Level 3 reserves the right to make such increases in the Conversion Rate in
addition to those required in the foregoing provisions as it considers to be
advisable in order that any event treated for United States federal income tax
purposes as a dividend of stock or stock rights will not be taxable to the
recipients. No adjustment of the Conversion Rate will be required to be made
until the cumulative adjustments amount to 1.0% or more of the Conversion Rate.
Level 3 shall compute any adjustments to the Conversion Rate pursuant to this
paragraph and will give notice to the holders of any such adjustments.

In case of any consolidation or merger of Level 3 with or into another
person or any merger of another person into Level 3, other than a merger which
does not result in any reclassification, conversion, exchange or cancelation of
the common stock, or in the case of any sale or transfer of all or
substantially all of the assets of Level 3, each note then outstanding will,
without the consent of the holder of any note, become convertible only into the
kind and amount of securities, cash and other property receivable upon such
consolidation, merger, sale or transfer by a holder of the number of shares of
common stock into which such note was convertible immediately prior thereto,
assuming such holder of common stock failed to exercise any rights of election
and that such note was then convertible.

Level 3 from time to time may increase the Conversion Rate by any amount for
any period of at least 20 days (which increase is irrevocable during such
period), in which case Level 3 shall give at least 15 days' notice of such
increase, if the Board of Directors has made a determination that such increase
would be in the best interests of Level 3, which determination shall be
conclusive. No such increase shall be taken into account for purposes of
determining whether the Current Market Price of the common stock exceeds the
Conversion Price, as defined below, by 105% in connection with an event which
otherwise would be a Change of Control or for purposes of determining whether
the Current Market Price exceeds 140% in connection with an event which
otherwise would allow the Company to cause the conversion rights of holders of
notes to expire.

If at any time Level 3 makes a distribution of property to its shareholders
that would be taxable to such shareholders as a dividend for United States
federal income tax purposes, e.g., distributions of evidences of indebtedness
or assets of Level 3, but generally not stock dividends on common stock or
rights to subscribe for common stock, and, pursuant to the anti-dilution
provisions of the

S-87

notes indenture, the number of shares into which notes are convertible is
increased, such increase may be deemed for United States federal income tax
purposes to be the payment of a taxable dividend to holders of notes. See
"Certain United States Tax Considerations."

Subordination

The payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the notes,
including amounts payable on any repurchase, will be subordinated in right of
payment to the extent set forth in the notes indenture to the prior full and
final payment in cash of all Senior Debt of Level 3. "Senior Debt" means the
principal of, and premium, if any, and interest, including all interest
accruing subsequent to the commencement of any bankruptcy or similar
proceeding, whether or not a claim for post-petition interest is allowable as a
claim in any such proceeding, on, and all fees and other amounts payable in
connection with, the following, whether absolute or contingent, secured or
unsecured, due or to become due, outstanding on the date of the notes indenture
or thereafter created, incurred or assumed:

(a) indebtedness of Level 3 evidenced by a credit or loan agreement,
note, bond, debenture or other written obligation,

(b) all obligations of Level 3 for money borrowed,

(c) all obligations of Level 3 evidenced by a note or similar instrument
given in connection with the acquisition of any businesses, properties or
assets of any kind,

(d) obligations of Level 3 (1) as lessee under leases required to be
capitalized on the balance sheet of the lessee under generally accepted
accounting principles and (2) as lessee under other leases for facilities,
capital equipment or related assets, whether or not capitalized, entered
into or leased for financing purposes,

(e) all obligations of Level 3 under interest rate and currency swaps,
caps, floors, collars, hedge agreements, forward contracts or similar
agreements or arrangements,

(f) all obligations of Level 3 with respect to letters of credit,
bankers' acceptances and similar facilities, including reimbursement
obligations with respect to the foregoing,

(g) all obligations of Level 3 issued or assumed as the deferred
purchase price of property or services, but excluding trade accounts
payable and accrued liabilities arising in the ordinary course of business,

(h) all obligations of the type referred to in clauses (a) through (g)
above of another person and all dividends of another person, the payment of
which, in either case, Level 3 has assumed or guaranteed, or for which
Level 3 is responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, jointly or
severally, as obligor, guarantor or otherwise, or which is secured by a
lien on the property of Level 3, and

(i) renewals, extensions, modifications, replacements, restatements and
refundings of, or any indebtedness or obligation issued in exchange for,
any such indebtedness or obligation described in clauses (a) through (h) of
this paragraph;

provided, however, that Senior Debt shall not include the notes or any such
indebtedness or obligation if the terms of such indebtedness or obligation,
or the terms of the instrument under which, or pursuant to which it is
issued expressly provide that such indebtedness or obligation is not
superior in right of payment to the notes.

No payment in respect of the notes, whether on account of principal of or
premium, if any, or interest on, or repurchase of, the notes or otherwise
(other than with the money, securities or proceeds held under any defeasance
trust established in accordance with the notes indenture provided that the
establishment of such defeasance trust is permitted by the terms of all Senior
Debt)

S-88

may be made by Level 3 if (1) a default in the payment of principal, premium,
if any, or interest, including a default under any redemption or repurchase
obligation, or other amounts with respect to Senior Debt occurs or (2) any
other default occurs and is continuing with respect to Senior Debt that permits
the holders thereof to accelerate (with notice, lapse of time or both) the
maturity thereof. Payments on the notes may and shall be resumed (a) in the
case of a payment default, upon the date on which such default is cured or
waived and (b) in the case of a nonpayment default, the date on which such
nonpayment default is cured or waived if the maturity of such Senior Debt has
not been accelerated.

In addition, upon any acceleration of the principal due on the notes as a
result of an Event of Default or payment or distribution of assets of Level 3
to creditors upon any dissolution, winding up, liquidation or reorganization,
whether voluntary or involuntary, marshaling of assets, assignment for the
benefit of creditors, or in bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or other
similar proceedings, of Level 3, all principal, premium, if any, interest and
other amounts payable on all Senior Debt must be paid in full in cash before
the holders of the notes are entitled to receive any payment (other than with
the money, securities or proceeds held under any defeasance trust established
in accordance with the notes indenture provided that the establishment of such
defeasance trust is permitted by the terms of all Senior Debt). By reason of
such subordination, in the event of insolvency, creditors of Level 3 who are
holders of Senior Debt may recover more, ratably, than the holders of the
notes, and such subordination may result in a reduction or elimination of
payments to the holders of the notes. As of June 30, 1999 Level 3 had
approximately $2.531 billion of Senior Debt outstanding. Assuming that on June
30, 1999 Level 3 had entered into its proposed secured credit facility and its
subsidiaries had borrowed $475 million under that credit facility, Level 3
would have had $3.006 billion of outstanding Senior Debt, including $475
million of its subsidiaries' debt guaranteed by Level 3, and Level 3's
subsidiaries would have had $900 million in additional borrowings available
under that credit facility guaranteed by Level 3 on a senior basis.

Substantially all of our operating assets are held directly by our
subsidiaries. Holders of any preferred stock of any of our subsidiaries and
creditors of any of our subsidiaries, including trade creditors, have and will
have claims relating to the assets of that subsidiary that are senior to the
notes. As a result, the notes will be structurally subordinated to all
preferred stock, indebtedness and other liabilities, including trade payables
and lease obligations, of Level 3's subsidiaries and any right of Level 3 to
receive any assets of its subsidiaries upon their liquidation or
reorganization, and the consequent right of the holders of the notes to
participate in those assets, will be effectively subordinated to the claims of
that subsidiary's creditors, including trade creditors, except to the extent
that Level 3 itself is recognized as a creditor of such subsidiary, in which
case the claims of Level 3 would still be subordinate to any security interest
in the assets of such subsidiary and any indebtedness of such subsidiary senior
to that held by Level 3. The proposed secured credit facility will be
indebtedness of our subsidiaries, will be structurally senior to the notes, and
will be secured by substantially all of the Company's assets and, subject to
certain exceptions, the assets of the Company's wholly owned domestic
subsidiaries. In addition, the proposed secured credit facility will restrict
the ability of Level 3's subsidiaries to pay dividends and make loans and
advances to Level 3.

The notes indenture does not limit the ability of Level 3 or any of its
subsidiaries to incur indebtedness, including Senior Debt.

Expiration of Conversion Rights

On or after September 15, 2002, Level 3 may, at its option, cause the
conversion rights of holders of notes to expire. Level 3 may exercise this
option only if for at least 20 trading days within any period of 30 consecutive
trading days, including the last trading day of such period, the Current Market
Price of common stock exceeded 140% of the Conversion Price, subject to
adjustment in certain circumstances. In order to exercise its option to cause
the conversion rights of holders of notes to expire, Level 3 must issue a press
release for publication on the Dow Jones News Service

S-89

(or a comparable news service) announcing the conversion expiration date prior
to the opening of business on the second trading day after any period in which
the condition in the preceding sentence has been met, but in no event prior to
September 15, 2002. The press release shall announce the conversion expiration
date and provide the current conversion price of the notes and the Current
Market Price of the common stock, in each case as of the close of business on
the trading day next preceding the date of the press release. The term
"Conversion Price" means $1,000 divided by the Conversion Rate.

Notice of the expiration of conversion rights will be given by Level 3 by
first-class mail to the holders of the notes not more than four business days
after Level 3 issued the press release. Conversion rights will terminate at the
close of business on the conversion expiration date which will be a date
selected by Level 3 not less than 30 nor more than 60 days after the date on
which Level 3 issues the press release announcing its intention to terminate
conversion rights of the notes.

The term "Current Market Price" of common stock for any day means the last
reported per share sale price, regular way on such day, or, if no sale takes
place on such day, the average of the reported closing per share bid and asked
prices on such day, regular way, in either case as reported on the Nasdaq
National Market or, if the common stock is not quoted or admitted to trading on
such quotation system, on the principal national securities exchange or
quotation system on which the common stock may be listed or admitted to trading
or quoted, or, if not listed or admitted to trading or quoted on any national
securities exchange or quotation system, the average of the closing per share
bid and asked prices of the common stock on the over-the-counter market on the
day in question as reported by the National Quotation Bureau Incorporated, or
similar generally accepted reporting service, or, if not so available in such
manner, as furnished by any Nasdaq member firm selected from time to time by
the board of directors of Level 3 for that purpose, or, if not so available in
such manner, as otherwise determined in good faith by the board of directors of
Level 3.

Repurchase at Option of Holders Upon a Change of Control

If a Change of Control, as defined below, occurs, each holder of notes shall
have the right, at the holder's option, to require Level 3 to repurchase all of
such holder's notes, or any portion of the principal amount thereof that is
equal to $5,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000 in excess thereof, on the
date (the "Repurchase Date") that is no earlier than 30 nor later than 60 days
after the date of the Company Notice, as defined below, at a price equal to
100% of the principal amount of the notes to be repurchased, together with
interest accrued to the Repurchase Date (the "Repurchase Price"). Level 3's
obligation to make or consummate such a repurchase ceases upon defeasance of
the indenture.

Level 3 may, at its option, in lieu of paying the Repurchase Price in cash,
pay the Repurchase Price in common stock valued at 95% of the average of the
closing sales prices of the common stock for the five trading days immediately
preceding and including the third day prior to the Repurchase Date; provided
that payment may not be made in common stock unless Level 3 satisfies certain
conditions with respect thereto prior to the Repurchase Date as provided in the
notes indenture.

Within 30 days after the occurrence of a Change of Control, Level 3 is
obligated to give to all holders of the notes notice, as provided in the notes
indenture (the "Company Notice"), of the occurrence of such Change of Control
and of the repurchase right arising as a result thereof. Level 3 must also
deliver a copy of the Company Notice to the trustee. To exercise the repurchase
right, a holder of notes must deliver on or before the 30th day after the date
of the Company Notice written notice to the trustee of the holder's exercise of
such right, together with the notes with respect to which the right is being
exercised.

S-90

A "Change of Control" at such time after the original issuance of the notes
means the occurrence of the following events:

(1) if any "person" or group" (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d)
and 14(d) of the Exchange Act or any successor provisions to either of the
foregoing), including any group acting for the purpose of acquiring,
holding, voting or disposing of securities within the meaning of Rule 13d-
5(b)(1) under the Exchange Act, other than any one or more of the Permitted
Holders, as defined below, becomes the "beneficial owner" (as defined in
Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act, except that a person will be deemed to
have "beneficial ownership" of all shares that any such person has the
right to acquire, whether such right is exercisable immediately or only
after the passage of time), directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the
total voting power of the Voting Stock of Level 3; provided, however, that
the Permitted Holders are the "beneficial owners" (as defined in Rule 13d-3
under the Exchange Act, except that a person will be deemed to have
"beneficial ownership" of all shares that any such person has the right to
acquire, whether such right is exercisable immediately or only after the
passage of time), directly or indirectly, in the aggregate of a lesser
percentage of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of Level 3 than
such other person or group (for purposes of this clause (1), such person or
group shall be deemed to beneficially own any voting stock of a corporation
(the "specified corporation") held by any other corporation (the "parent
corporation") so long as such person or group beneficially owns, directly
or indirectly, in the aggregate a majority of the total voting power of the
Voting Stock of such parent corporation); or

(2) the sale, transfer, assignment, lease, conveyance or other
disposition, directly or indirectly, of all or substantially all the assets
of Level 3 and its subsidiaries, considered as a whole (other than a
disposition of such assets as an entirety or virtually as an entirety to a
wholly owned subsidiary or one or more Permitted Holders) shall have
occurred; or

(3) during any period of two consecutive years, individuals who at the
beginning of such period constituted the board of directors of Level 3
(together with any new directors whose election or appointment by such
board or whose nomination for election by the stockholders of Level 3 was
approved by a vote of a majority of the directors then still in office who
were either directors at the beginning of such period or whose election or
nomination for election was previously so approved) cease for any reason to
constitute a majority of the board of directors of Level 3 then in office;
or

(4) the stockholders of Level 3 shall have approved any plan of
liquidation or dissolution of Level 3;

provided, however, that a Change of Control shall not be deemed to have
occurred if the Current Market Price of the common stock for any five trading
days within the period of 10 consecutive trading days beginning immediately
after the later of the Change of Control or the public announcement of the
Change of Control shall equal or exceed 105% of the Conversion Price of the
notes in effect on each such trading day; provided further that if the Change
of Control results in the reclassification, conversion, exchange of outstanding
shares of common stock of Level 3, such 10 consecutive trading day period shall
be measured as ending immediately before the Change of Control.

"Permitted Holders" means the members of Level 3's board of directors on
April 28, 1998 and their respective estates, spouses, ancestors, and lineal
descendants, the legal representatives of any of the foregoing and the trustees
of any bona fide trusts of which the foregoing are the sole beneficiaries or
the grantors, or any person of which the foregoing "beneficially owns" (as
defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act) at least 66 2/3% of the total
voting power of the voting stock of such person.

"Voting Stock" of any person means Capital Stock of such person which
ordinarily has voting power for the election of directors (or persons
performing similar functions) of such person, whether

S-91

at all times or only for so long as no senior class of securities has such
voting power by reason of any contingency. "Capital Stock" of any person means
any and all shares, interests, participations or other equivalents (however
designated) of corporate stock or equity participations, including partnership
interests, whether general or limited, of such person and any rights (other
than debt securities convertible or exchangeable into any equity interest),
warrants or options to acquire an equity interest in such person.

Rule 13e-4 under the Exchange Act requires the dissemination of certain
information to security holders in the event of an issuer tender offer and may
apply in the event that the repurchase option becomes available to holders of
the notes. Level 3 will comply with this rule to the extent applicable at that
time.

Level 3 may, to the extent permitted by applicable law, at any time purchase
notes in the open market or by tender at any price or by private agreement. Any
note so purchased by Level 3 may, to the extent permitted by applicable law, be
reissued or resold or may, at Level 3's option, be surrendered to the trustee
for cancelation. Any notes surrendered as aforesaid may not be reissued or
resold and will be canceled promptly.

The foregoing provisions would not necessarily afford holders of the notes
protection in the event of highly leveraged or other transactions involving
Level 3 that may adversely affect holders.

Level 3's ability to repurchase notes upon the occurrence of a Change of
Control is subject to important limitations. Level 3 anticipates that the
occurrence of a Change of Control will constitute an event of default under its
proposed secured credit facility. Moreover, the occurrence of a Change in
Control could cause an event of default under, or be prohibited or limited by,
the terms of other Senior Debt of Level 3. As a result, in each case, any
repurchase of the notes would, absent a waiver, be prohibited under the
subordination provisions of the notes indenture until the Senior Debt is paid
in full. Level 3's obligation to purchase the notes under this covenant will,
unless consents are obtained, require Level 3 to repay either prior to or
concurrently with the note repurchase all Senior Debt then outstanding that
would by its terms prohibit the note repurchase, including both series of Level
3's existing senior notes and the proposed secured credit facility.

Further, Level 3 may not have the financial resources and may not be able to
arrange financing, to pay the Repurchase Price for all the notes that might be
delivered by holders of notes seeking to exercise the repurchase right. Level
3's ability to repurchase notes with cash may also be limited by the terms of
its subsidiaries' borrowing arrangements due to dividend or other restrictions.
The proposed secured credit facility will restrict the ability of Level 3's
subsidiaries to pay dividends and make loans and advances to Level 3. Any
failure by Level 3 to repurchase the notes when required following a Change of
Control would result in an Event of Default under the notes indenture whether
or not such repurchase is permitted by the subordination provisions of the
notes indenture. Any such default may, in turn, cause a default under Senior
Debt of Level 3. See "--Subordination".

Mergers and Sales of Assets by Level 3

Level 3 may not consolidate with or merge into any other person or convey,
transfer, sell or lease its properties and assets substantially as an entirety
to any person, and Level 3 shall not permit any person to consolidate with or
merge into Level 3 or convey, transfer, sell or lease such person's properties
and assets substantially as an entirety to Level 3, unless:

(a) the person formed by such consolidation or into or with which Level
3 is merged or the person to which the properties and assets of Level 3 are
so conveyed, transferred, sold or leased, is a corporation, limited
liability company, partnership or trust organized and existing under the
laws of the United States, any State thereof or the District of Columbia
and, if other than Level 3, shall expressly assume the due and punctual
payment of the principal of and, premium, if any, and interest on the notes
and the performance of the other covenants of Level 3 under the notes
indenture,

S-92

(b) immediately after giving effect to such transaction, no Event of
Default, and no event which, after notice or lapse of time or both, would
become an Event of Default, shall have occurred and be continuing, and

(c) an officer's certificate and legal opinion relating to the
conditions described in (a) and (b) above is delivered to the trustee.

Events of Default

The following will be Events of Default under the notes indenture:

(a) failure to pay principal of or premium, if any, on any note when
due, whether or not such payment is prohibited by the subordination
provisions of the notes indenture,

(b) failure to pay any interest on any note when due, continuing for 30
days, whether or not such payment is prohibited by the subordination
provisions of the notes indenture,

(c) failure to pay when due the Repurchase Price of any notes required
to be repurchased pursuant to the provisions described under "--Repurchase
at Option of Holders Upon Change of Control", whether or not a Company
Notice is prohibited by the subordination provisions of the notes
indenture,

(d) failure to perform or comply with provisions described under "--
Mergers and Sales of Assets by Level 3,"

(e) failure to perform any other covenant of Level 3 in the notes
indenture, continuing for 60 days after written notice to Level 3 by the
trustee or the holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal amount of
outstanding notes,

(f) failure to pay when due any indebtedness for money borrowed by Level
3 or any subsidiary that is a restricted subsidiary under the indentures
governing both issues of Level 3's outstanding senior notes totaling $25
million or more if such failure shall have continued after the applicable
grace period and shall not have been cured or waived or the acceleration of
any indebtedness for money borrowed by Level 3 or any such restricted
subsidiary totaling $25 million or more,

(g) any judgment or judgments for the payment of money in an aggregate
amount in excess of $25 million that shall be rendered against Level 3 or
any subsidiary and that shall not be waived, satisfied or discharged for
any period of 45 consecutive days during which a stay of enforcement shall
not be in effect, and

(h) certain events of bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization affecting
Level 3 or any Significant Subsidiary (as defined in the indenture).

Subject to the provisions of the notes indenture relating to the duties of
the trustee in case an Event of Default shall occur and be continuing, the
trustee will be under no obligation to exercise any of its rights or powers
under the notes indenture at the request or direction of any of the holders,
unless such holders shall have offered to the trustee reasonable indemnity.
Subject to such provisions for the indemnification of the trustee, the holders
of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the outstanding notes will have
the right to direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for
any remedy available to the trustee or exercising any trust or power conferred
on the trustee.

If an Event of Default, other than an Event of Default specified in clause
(h) above with respect to the Company, occurs and is continuing, either the
trustee or the holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the outstanding
notes may accelerate the maturity of all notes; provided, however, that after
such acceleration, but before a judgment or decree based on acceleration, the
holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of outstanding notes may,
under certain circumstances as set forth in the notes indenture, rescind and
annul such acceleration if all Events of

S-93

Default, other than the nonpayment of principal of the notes which have become
due solely by such declaration of acceleration, have been cured or waived as
provided in the notes indenture. If an Event of Default specified in clause (h)
occurs and is continuing with respect to the Company, then the principal of,
and accrued interest on, all of the notes shall automatically become
immediately due and payable without any declaration or other act on the part of
the holders of the notes or the trustee. For information as to waiver of
defaults, see "--Modification and Waiver" below.

No holder of any note will have any right to institute any proceeding with
respect to the notes indenture or for any remedy thereunder, unless such holder
shall have previously given to the trustee written notice of a continuing Event
of Default and the holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal amount of the
outstanding notes shall have made written request, and offered reasonable
indemnity, to the trustee to institute such proceeding as trustee, and the
trustee shall not have received from the holders of a majority in aggregate
principal amount of the outstanding notes a direction inconsistent with such
request and shall have failed to institute such proceeding within 60 days.
However, such limitations do not apply to a suit instituted by a holder of a
note for the enforcement of payment of the principal of or premium, if any, or
interest on such note on or after the respective due dates expressed in such
note or of the right to convert such note in accordance with the notes
indenture.

Level 3 will be required to furnish to the trustee annually a statement as
to the performance by Level 3 of certain of its obligations under the notes
indenture and as to any default in such performance.

Modification and Waiver

Level 3 and the trustee may, at any time and from time to time, without
notice to or consent of any holders of notes, enter into one or more indentures
supplemental to the indenture:

(a) to evidence the succession of another person to Level 3 and the
assumption by such successor of the covenants of Level 3 in the indenture
and the notes,

(b) to add to the covenants of Level 3, for the benefit of the holders
or to surrender any right or power conferred upon Level 3 by the indenture,

(d) to provide for uncertificated notes in addition to or in place of
certificated notes,

(e) to evidence and provide for the acceptance of appointment under the
indenture of a successor trustee,

(f) to secure the notes,

(g) to comply with the Trust Indenture Act or the Securities Act,

(h) to add guarantees with respect to the notes, or

(i) to cure any ambiguity in the indenture, to correct or supplement any
provision in the indenture which may be inconsistent with any other
provision therein or to add any other provision with respect to matters or
questions arising under the indenture; provided such actions shall not
adversely affect the interests of the holders in any material respect.

Other modifications and amendments of the notes indenture may be made, and
certain past defaults by Level 3 may be waived, with the consent of the holders
of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of the notes at the
time outstanding. However, no such modification or amendment may, without the
consent of the holder of each outstanding note affected thereby,

(a) change the stated maturity of the principal of, or any installment
of interest on, any note,

(b) reduce the principal amount of, or the premium, if any, or interest
on, any note,

S-94

(d) at any time after a Change of Control has occurred, modify the
provisions with respect to the repurchase right of the holders in a manner
adverse to the holders,

(e) change the place or currency of payment of principal of, premium,
if any, or interest on, any note (including any payment of the Repurchase
Price in respect of such note),

(f) impair the right to institute suit for the enforcement of any
payment on or with respect to any note,

(g) except as otherwise permitted or contemplated by provisions
concerning consolidation, merger, conveyance, transfer, sale or lease of
all or substantially all of the property and assets of Level 3, adversely
affect the right of holders to convert any of the notes other than as
provided in the notes indenture,

(h) modify the conversion or subordination provisions in a manner
adverse to the holders of the notes,

(i) reduce the above-stated percentage of outstanding notes necessary
to modify or amend the notes indenture,

(j) reduce the percentage of aggregate principal amount of outstanding
notes necessary for waiver of compliance with certain provisions of the
notes indenture or for waiver of certain defaults, or

(k) reduce the percentage in aggregate principal amount of outstanding
notes required for the adoption of a resolution or the quorum required at
any meeting of holders of notes at which a resolution is adopted. The
quorum at any meeting called to adopt a resolution will be persons holding
or representing a majority in aggregate principal amount of the notes at
the time outstanding and, at any reconvened meeting adjourned for lack of a
quorum, 25% of such aggregate principal amount.

The holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the outstanding
notes may waive compliance by Level 3 with certain restrictive provisions of
the notes indenture by written consent or by the adoption of a resolution at a
meeting. The holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the
outstanding notes also may waive any past default under the notes indenture,
except a default in the payment of principal, premium, if any, or interest, by
written consent.

The notes indenture contains provisions for convening meetings of holders of
notes.

Notices

Notice to holders of the notes will be given by mail to the addresses of
such holders as they appear in the Security Register. Such notices will be
deemed to have been given on the date of mailing of the notice.

Notice of expiration of conversion rights will be given at least once not
less than 30 nor more than 60 days prior to the conversion expiration date,
which notice shall be irrevocable, and will specify the conversion expiration
date.

Replacement of Notes

Notes that become mutilated, destroyed, stolen or lost will be replaced by
Level 3 at the expense of the holder upon delivery to the trustee of the
mutilated notes or evidence of the loss, theft or destruction thereof
satisfactory to Level 3 and the trustee. In the case of a lost, stolen or
destroyed note, indemnity satisfactory to the trustee and Level 3 may be
required at the expense of the holder of such note before a replacement note
will be issued.

S-95

Payment of Stamp and Other Taxes

Level 3 shall pay all stamp and similar duties, if any, which may be imposed
by the United States or any political subdivision thereof or taxing authority
thereof or therein with respect to the issuance of the notes. Level 3 will not
be required to make any payment with respect to any other tax, assessment or
governmental charge imposed by any government or any political subdivision
thereof or taxing authority thereof or therein.

Satisfaction and Discharge

The provisions in the indenture relating to defeasance will be applicable to
the notes. Level 3's obligation to make or consummate a repurchase of notes
upon the occurrence of a Change of Control ceases upon defeasance of the
indenture.

Governing Law

The notes indenture and the notes will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of New York.

The Trustee

The trustee for the holders of notes issued under the notes indenture will
be IBJ Whitehall Bank & Trust Company, which is also the trustee for both
series of Level 3's existing senior notes. In case an Event of Default shall
occur, and shall not be cured, the trustee will be required to use the degree
of care of a prudent person in the conduct of his own affairs in the exercise
of its powers. Subject to such provisions, the trustee will be under no
obligation to exercise any of its rights or powers under the notes indenture at
the request of any of the holders of notes, unless they shall have offered to
the trustee reasonable security or indemnity.

The notes indenture and the Trust Indenture Act contain limitations on the
rights of the trustee, should the trustee become a creditor of Level 3, to
obtain payments of claims in certain cases or to realize on certain property
received in respect of any such claim as security or otherwise. Subject to the
Trust Indenture Act, the trustee will be permitted to engage in other
transactions with Level 3 or any affiliate of Level 3; provided, however, that
if the trustee acquires any conflicting interest as described in the Trust
Indenture Act, it must eliminate such conflict or resign.

S-96

CERTAIN UNITED STATES TAX CONSIDERATIONS

The following is a summary of certain United States federal income tax
considerations relating to the purchase, ownership and disposition of the notes
and of common stock into which notes may be converted. For purposes of this
summary (1) the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, is referred to as
"the Code" and (2) the Internal Revenue Service is referred to as "the IRS."

This summary:

. does not purport to be a complete analysis of all the potential tax
considerations that may be relevant to holders in light of their
particular circumstances;

. is based on laws, rulings and decisions now in effect, all of which are
subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis;

. deals only with holders that will hold notes and common stock into which
notes may be converted as "capital assets" within the meaning of Section
1221 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended;

. does not address tax considerations applicable to investors that may be
subject to special tax rules, such as partnerships, banks, tax-exempt
organizations, insurance companies, dealers in securities or currencies,
or persons that will hold notes as a position in a hedging transaction,
"straddle," or "conversion transaction" for tax purposes, or persons
deemed to sell notes or common stock under the constructive sale
provisions of the Code; and

. discusses only the tax considerations applicable to the initial
purchasers of the notes who purchase the notes at their "issue price" as
defined in Section 1273 of the Code and does not discuss the tax
considerations applicable to subsequent purchasers of the notes.

The Company has not sought any ruling from the IRS with respect to the
statements made and the conclusions reached in the following summary, and the
IRS may not agree with the statements and conclusions expressed in this
summary. In addition, the IRS is not precluded from adopting a contrary
position. This summary does not consider the effect of any applicable foreign,
state, local, or other tax laws.

Investors considering the purchase of notes should consult their own tax
advisors with respect to the application of the United States federal income
and estate tax laws to their particular situations, as well as any tax
consequences arising under the laws of any state, local or foreign taxing
jurisdiction or under any applicable tax treaty.

As used herein, the term "United States Holder" means a beneficial owner of
a note or common stock that is, for United States federal income tax purposes,

. a citizen or resident, as defined in Section 7701(b) of the Code, of the
United States,

. a corporation or other entity that is taxable as a corporation created
or organized under the laws of the United States or any political
subdivision thereof,

. an estate the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income taxation
regardless of its source, or

. in general, a trust subject to the primary supervision of a United
States court and the control of one or more United States persons.

A "Foreign Holder" is a beneficial owner of notes or common stock that is
not a United States Holder.

S-97

United States Holders

Payment Of Interest

Interest on a note generally will be includable in the income of a United
States Holder as ordinary income at the time such interest is received or
accrued, in accordance with such United States Holder's regular method of
accounting for United States federal income tax purposes.

Sale, Exchange Or Redemption Of A Note

Upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a note, a United States Holder
generally will recognize capital gain or loss equal to the difference between
(1) the amount of cash proceeds and the fair market value of any property
received on the sale, exchange or redemption, except to the extent such amount
is attributable to accrued interest not previously included in income, which is
taxable as ordinary income, and (2) such United States Holder's adjusted tax
basis in the note. A United States Holder's adjusted tax basis in a note
generally will equal the cost of the note to such United States Holder plus the
amount, if any, included in income on an adjustment to the conversion rate of
the notes, as described in "--Adjustments to Conversion Rate" below.

For certain non-corporate taxpayers, including individuals, the rate of
taxation of capital gains will depend upon:

(1) the taxpayer's holding period in the capital asset, with preferential
rates available for capital assets held for more than 12 months, and

(2) the taxpayer's marginal tax rate for ordinary income.

The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations. United States
Holders are urged to consult their own tax advisors with respect to the rate of
taxation of capital gains and the ability to deduct capital losses.

Adjustments to Conversion Rate

The conversion rate of the notes is subject to adjustment under certain
circumstances, as described under "Description of Notes--Conversion Rights."
Section 305 of the Code and the Treasury Regulations issued thereunder may
treat the holders of the notes as having received a constructive distribution,
resulting in dividend treatment (as described below) to the extent of the
Company's current and/or accumulated earnings and profits, if, and to the
extent that, certain adjustments in the conversion rate (or certain other
corporate transactions) increase the proportionate interest of a holder of
notes in the fully diluted common stock (particularly an adjustment to reflect
a taxable dividend to holders of common stock), whether or not such holder ever
exercises its conversion privilege. Moreover, if there is not a full adjustment
to the conversion rate of the notes to reflect a stock dividend or other event
increasing the proportionate interest of the holders of outstanding common
stock in the assets or earnings and profits of the Company, then such increase
in the proportionate interest of the holders of the common stock may be treated
as a distribution to such holders, taxable as a dividend (as described below)
to the extent of the Company's current and/or accumulated earnings and profits.

Conversion Of The Notes

A United States Holder generally will not recognize any income, gain or loss
upon conversion of a note into common stock except with respect to cash
received in lieu of a fractional share of common stock. A United States
Holder's tax basis in the Common Stock received on conversion of a note will be
the same as such United States Holder's adjusted tax basis in the note at the
time of conversion, reduced by any basis allocable to a fractional share
interest, and the holding period for the common stock received on conversion
will generally include the holding period of the note

S-98

converted. However, to the extent that any common stock received upon
conversion is considered attributable to accrued interest not previously
included in income by the United States Holder, it will be taxable as ordinary
income, a United States Holder's tax basis in shares of common stock considered
attributable to accrued interest generally will equal the amount of such
accrued interest included in income, and the holding period for such shares
shall begin on the date of conversion.

Cash received in lieu of a fractional share of common stock upon conversion
will be treated as a payment in exchange for the fractional share of common
stock. Accordingly, the receipt of cash in lieu of a fractional share of common
stock generally will result in capital gain or loss, measured by the difference
between the cash received for the fractional share and the United States
Holder's adjusted tax basis in the fractional share, and will be taxable as
described below under "--Sale of Common Stock".

Dividends

Distributions, if any, paid or deemed paid on the common stock (or deemed
distributions on the notes as described above under "--Adjustments to
Conversion Rate") generally will be includable in the income of a United States
Holder as ordinary income to the extent of the Company's current or accumulated
earnings and profits as determined for U.S. federal income tax purposes.
Dividends paid to holders that are United States corporations may qualify for
the dividends received deduction. To the extent, if any, that a United States
Holder receives distributions on shares of common stock that would otherwise
constitute dividends for United States federal income tax purposes but that
exceed the current and accumulated earnings and profits of the Company, such
distributions will be treated first as a non-taxable return of capital,
reducing the holder's basis in the shares of common stock. Any such
distributions in excess of the holder's basis in the shares of common stock
generally will be treated as capital gains realized on the disposition of
common stock.

Sale Of Common Stock

Upon the sale or exchange of common stock, a United States Holder generally
will recognize capital gains or losses equal to the difference between (1) the
amount of cash and the fair market value of any property received upon the sale
or exchange and (2) such United States Holder's adjusted tax basis in the
common stock (as described above under "--Conversion of the Notes").

For certain non-corporate taxpayers (including individuals), the rate of
taxation of capital gains will depend upon (1) the taxpayer's holding period in
the capital asset (with preferential rates available for capital assets held
for more than 12 months) and (2) the taxpayer's marginal tax rate for ordinary
income. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.

Foreign Holders

Stated Interest

Payments of interest on a note to a Foreign Holder will not be subject to
United States federal withholding tax provided that:

(1) the holder does not actually or constructively own 10% or more of the
total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company entitled to
vote (treating, for such purpose, notes held by a holder as having been
converted into common stock of the Company),

(2) the holder is not a controlled foreign corporation that is related to
the Company through stock ownership, and

(3) either (A) the beneficial owner of the note, under penalties of perjury,
provides the Company or its agent with its name and address and certifies that
it is not a United States person or (B) a

S-99

securities clearing organization, bank, or other financial institution that
holds customers' securities in the ordinary course of its trade or business (a
"financial institution") certifies to the Company or its agent, under penalties
of perjury, that such a statement has been received from the beneficial owner
by it or another financial institution and furnishes to the Company or its
agent a copy thereof.

For purposes of this summary, we refer to this exemption from U.S. federal
withholding tax as the "Portfolio Interest Exemption." Under United States
Treasury regulations, which generally are effective for payments made after
December 31, 2000, subject to certain transition rules, the certification
described in clause (3) above may also be provided by a qualified intermediary
on behalf of one or more beneficial owners or other intermediaries, provided
that such intermediary has entered into a withholding agreement with the IRS
and certain other conditions are met.

The gross amount of payments to a Foreign Holder of interest that does not
qualify for the Portfolio Interest Exemption and that is not effectively
connected to a United States trade or business will be subject to United States
federal withholding tax at the rate of 30%, unless a United States income tax
treaty applies to reduce or eliminate withholding.

A Foreign Holder will generally be subject to tax in the same manner as a
United States Holder with respect to payments of interest if such payments are
effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business by the Foreign
Holder in the United States and, if an applicable tax treaty so provides, such
gain is attributable to an office or other fixed place of business maintained
in the United States by such holder. Such effectively connected income received
by a Foreign Holder which is a corporation may in certain circumstances be
subject to an additional "branch profits tax" at a 30% rate or, if applicable,
a lower treaty rate.

Foreign Holders should consult their own tax advisors regarding applicable
income tax treaties, which may provide different rules.

To claim the benefit of a tax treaty or to claim exemption from withholding
because the income is effectively connected with a U.S. trade or business, the
Foreign Holder must provide a properly executed Form 1001 or 4224, as
applicable, prior to the payment of interest. These forms must be periodically
updated. United States Treasury regulations, which generally are effective for
payments made after December 31, 2000, subject to certain transition rules,
require Foreign Holders or, under certain circumstances, a qualified
intermediary to file a withholding certificate with the Company's withholding
agent to obtain the benefit of an applicable tax treaty providing for a lower
rate of withholding tax. Such certificate must contain, among other
information, the name and address of the Foreign Holder.

Sale, Exchange Or Redemption Of A Note

A Foreign Holder generally will not be subject to United States federal
income tax or withholding tax on gain realized on the sale or exchange of notes
unless (1) the holder is an individual who was present in the United States for
183 days or more during the taxable year, and certain other conditions are met,
(2) the gain is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business
of the holder in the United States and, if an applicable tax treaty so
provides, such gain is attributable to an office or other fixed place of
business maintained in the United States by such holder or (3) the Company is
or has been a "United States real property holding corporation" within a
specified time period, as described below under "--Sale or Exchange of Common
Stock," and the holder owns or has owned (actually or constructively) more than
5% of the total value of the notes at any time during the shorter of the five-
year period preceding the date of the disposition or the holder's holding
period (in which case the gain will be treated as effectively connected income
as described in (2)). In the case of (2), such effectively connected income
received by a Foreign Holder which is a corporation may in certain
circumstances be subject to an additional "branch profits tax" at a 30% rate
or, if applicable,

S-100

a lower treaty rate. Additionally, in the case of (3), it is possible that a
Foreign Holder that initially owns 5% or less of the total value of the notes
may subsequently be considered to own more than 5% of the total value of the
notes due to other holders' conversion of notes into common stock. Regardless
of whether a disposition of any note is taxable to the seller pursuant to the
rules regarding USRPHCs, the withholding requirements of Section 1445 of the
Code generally will not be applicable to a purchaser of the notes or a
financial intermediary involved in any such transaction.

Conversion of a Note

In general, no United States federal income tax or withholding tax will be
imposed upon the conversion of a note into common stock by a Foreign Holder
except (1) to the extent the common stock is considered attributable to accrued
interest not previously included in income, which may be taxable under the
rules set forth in "Foreign Holders -- Stated Interest," (2) with respect to
the receipt of cash in lieu of fractional shares by Foreign Holders upon
conversion of a note, in each case where either the conditions described in (1)
or (2) above under "Foreign Holders -- Sale, Exchange or Redemption of a Note"
is satisfied or (3) the Company is a United States real property holding
corporation as discussed below, the holder owns or has owned (actually or
constructively) more than 5% of the value of the notes at any time during the
shorter of the five-year period preceding the date of conversion or the
holder's holding period, and certain other conditions apply. For purposes of
(3), it is possible that a Foreign Holder that initially owns 5% or less of the
total value of the notes may subsequently be considered to own more than 5% of
the total value of the notes due to other holders' conversion of notes into
common stock. Regardless of whether a conversion of any note is taxable to the
seller pursuant to the rules regarding USRPHCs, the withholding requirements of
Section 1445 of the Code generally will not be applicable to the Company or a
financial intermediary involved in any such transaction.

Sale Or Exchange Of Common Stock

A Foreign Holder will generally not be subject to United States federal
income tax or withholding tax on the sale or exchange of common stock unless
either of the conditions described in (1) or (2) above under "Foreign Holders
- -- Sale, Exchange or Redemption of a note" is satisfied or the Company is or
has been a United States real property holding corporation, or a "USRPHC," for
United States federal income tax purposes at any time within the shorter of the
five year period preceding such disposition or such Foreign Holder's holding
period. The Company believes that, based upon its current Business Plan, it may
be or it may become a USRPHC. In general, the Company will be treated as a
USRPHC if the fair market value of its U.S. real property interests equals or
exceeds 50% of the total fair market value of its U.S. and non-U.S. real
property and its other assets used or held in a trade or business. If the
Company is, or becomes, a USRPHC, so long as the common stock continues to be
regularly traded on an established securities market within the meaning of
Section 897(c)(3) of the Code, only a Foreign Holder who holds or held
directly, indirectly or constructively, at any time during the shorter of the
five-year period preceding the date of disposition or the holder's holding
period, more than 5% of the common stock will be subject to U.S. federal income
tax on the disposition of the common stock. For purposes of the ownership test
described above, a Foreign Holder of notes will be considered as constructively
owning the common stock into which such notes are convertible. Regardless of
whether a disposition of common stock is taxable to the seller pursuant to the
rules regarding USRPHCs, the withholding requirements of Section 1445 of the
Code generally will not be applicable to a purchaser of the common stock or a
financial intermediary involved in any such transaction.

Dividends

Distributions by the Company with respect to the common stock that are
treated as dividends paid or deemed paid (including a deemed distribution on
the notes or common stock as described above under "United States Holders--
Adjustments to Conversion Price") to a Foreign Holder,

S-101

excluding dividends that are effectively connected with the conduct of a trade
or business in the United States by such Holder which are taxable as described
below, will be subject to United States federal withholding tax at a 30% rate,
or lower rate provided under any applicable income tax treaty. Except to the
extent that an applicable tax treaty otherwise provides, a Foreign Holder will
be subject to tax in the same manner as a United States Holder on dividends
paid or deemed paid that are effectively connected with the conduct of a trade
or business in the United States by the Foreign Holder. If such Foreign Holder
is a foreign corporation, it may in certain circumstances also be subject to a
United States "branch profits tax" on such effectively connected income at a
30% rate or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax
treaty. Even though such effectively connected dividends are subject to income
tax, and may be subject to the branch profits tax, they will not be subject to
U.S. withholding tax if the Foreign Holder delivers IRS Form 4224 to the payor.

Under current United States Treasury Regulations, dividends paid to an
address in a foreign country are presumed to be paid to a resident of that
country, unless the payer has knowledge to the contrary, for purposes of the
withholding discussed above, and under the current interpretation of United
States Treasury Regulations, for purposes of determining the applicability of a
tax treaty rate. Under United States Treasury Regulations which generally are
effective for payments made after December 31, 2000, subject to certain
transition rules, however, a Foreign Holder of common stock who wishes to claim
the benefit of an applicable treaty rate would be required to satisfy
applicable certification requirements. In addition, under current United States
Treasury Regulations, in the case of common stock held by a foreign
partnership, or other fiscally transparent entities, the certification
requirement would generally be applied to the partners of the partnership and
the partnership would be required to provide certain information, including a
United States taxpayer identification number. The Treasury Regulations also
provide look-through rules for tiered partnerships.

Death Of A Foreign Holder

A note held by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the United
States at the time of death will not be includable in the decedent's gross
estate for United States estate tax purposes, provided that such holder or
beneficial owner did not at the time of death actually or constructively own
10% or more of the combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company
entitled to vote, and provided that, at the time of death, payments with
respect to such note would not have been effectively connected with the conduct
by such Foreign Holder of a trade or business within the United States.

Common stock actually or beneficially held, other than through a foreign
corporation, by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the United
States at the time of his or her death, or previously transferred subject to
certain retained rights or powers, will be subject to United States federal
estate tax unless otherwise provided by an applicable estate tax treaty.

Information Reporting And Backup Withholding

In general, information reporting requirements will apply to payments of
principal, premium, if any, and interest on a note, dividends on common stock,
and payments of the proceeds of the sale of a note or common stock to certain
non-corporate United States Holders, and a 31% backup withholding tax may apply
to such payment if the United States Holder (1) fails to furnish or certify his
correct taxpayer identification number to the payer in the manner required, (2)
is notified by the IRS that he has failed to report payments of interest or
dividends property or (3) under certain circumstances, fails to certify that he
has not been notified by the IRS that he is subject to backup withholding for
failure to report interest or dividend payments.

Information reporting requirements will apply to payments of interest or
dividends to Foreign Holders where such interest or dividends are subject to
withholding or are exempt from United States withholding tax pursuant to a tax
treaty, or where such interest is exempt from United States tax

S-102

under the Portfolio Interest Exemption. Copies of these information returns may
also be made available under the provisions of a specific treaty or agreement
to the tax authorities of the country in which the Foreign Holder resides.

Treasury Regulations provide that backup withholding and information
reporting will not apply to payments of principal on the notes by the Company
to a Foreign Holder if the Foreign Holder certifies as to its status as a
Foreign Holder under penalties of perjury or otherwise establishes an exemption
(provided that neither the Company nor its paying agent has actual knowledge
that the holder is a United States person or that the conditions of any other
exemption are not, in fact, satisfied.)

The payment of the proceeds from the disposition of notes or common stock to
or through the United States office of any broker, United States or foreign,
will be subject to information reporting and possible backup withholding unless
the owner certifies as to its non-United States status under penalty of perjury
or otherwise establishes an exemption, provided that the broker does not have
actual knowledge that the holder is a United States person or that the
conditions of any other exemption are not, in fact, satisfied. The payment of
the proceeds from the disposition of a note or common stock to or through a
non-United States office of a non-United States broker that is not a United
States related person will not be subject to information reporting or backup
withholding. For this purpose, a "United States related person" is:

(1) a "controlled foreign corporation" for United States federal income tax
purposes or

(2) a foreign person 50% or more of whose gross income from all sources for
the three-year period ending with the close of its taxable year preceding the
payment, or for such part of the period that the broker has been in existence,
is derived from activities that are effectively connected with the conduct of a
United States trade or business.

In the case of the payment of proceeds from the disposition of notes or
common stock to or through a non-United States office of a broker that is
either a United States person or a United States related person, Treasury
Regulations require information reporting on the payment unless the broker has
documentary evidence in its files that the owner is a Foreign Holder and the
broker has no knowledge to the contrary.

Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules will be allowed as a
refund or a credit against such holder's United States federal income tax
liability provided the required information is furnished to the IRS.

United States Treasury Regulations, which generally are effective for
payments made after December 31, 2000, subject to certain transition rules,
will generally expand the circumstances under which information reporting and
backup withholding may apply. Holders of notes should consult their tax
advisors regarding the application of the information and reporting and backup
withholding rules, including such Treasury regulations.

The preceding discussion of certain United States federal income tax
consequences is for general information only and is not tax advice.
Accordingly, holders of the notes should consult their own tax advisors as to
particular tax consequences to them or purchasing, holding and disposing of the
notes and the common stock, including the applicability and effect of any
state, local or foreign tax laws, and of any proposed changes in applicable
law.

S-103

UNDERWRITING

Level 3 and the underwriters for the offering named below have entered into
an underwriting agreement with respect to the notes being offered. Subject to
certain conditions, each underwriter has severally agreed to purchase the
number of notes indicated in the following table. Goldman, Sachs & Co., Salomon
Smith Barney Inc., Chase Securities Inc., Credit Suisse First Boston
Corporation, J.P. Morgan Securities Inc. and Morgan Stanley & Co. Incorporated
are representatives of the underwriters.

Principal Amount of
Underwriters Notes
------------ -------------------

Goldman, Sachs & Co................................... $255,200,000
Salomon Smith Barney Inc.............................. 255,200,000
Chase Securities Inc.................................. 31,900,000
Credit Suisse First Boston Corporation................ 31,900,000
J.P. Morgan Securities Inc............................ 31,900,000
Morgan Stanley & Co. Incorporated..................... 31,900,000
Lazard Freres & Co. LLC............................... 16,000,000
BNY Capital Markets, Inc. ............................ 16,000,000
Credit Lyonnais Securities (USA) Inc. ................ 16,000,000
Dresdner Kleinwort Benson North America LLC........... 16,000,000
First Union Capital Markets Corp. .................... 16,000,000
Janco Partners, Inc. ................................. 16,000,000
Kirkpatrick, Pettis, Smith, Polian Inc. .............. 16,000,000
------------
Total............................................... $750,000,000
============

If the underwriters sell more notes than the total principal amount set
forth in the table above, the underwriters have an option to buy up to an
additional $112,500,000 principal amount of notes from Level 3 to cover such
sales. They may exercise that option for 30 days. If any notes are purchased
pursuant to this option, the underwriters will severally purchase notes in
approximately the same proportion as set forth in the table above.

Notes sold by the underwriters to the public will initially be offered at
the initial price to public set forth on the cover of this prospectus
supplement. Any notes sold by the underwriters to securities dealers may be
sold at a discount from the initial price to public of up to 1.725% of the
principal amount of the notes. Any such securities dealers may resell any notes
purchased from the underwriters to certain other brokers or dealers at a
discount from the initial price to public of up to .01% of the principal amount
of the notes. If all the notes are not sold at the initial price to public, the
representatives may change the offering price and the other selling terms.

The notes are a new issue of securities with no established trading market.
Level 3 has been advised by the underwriters that the underwriters intend to
make a market in the notes but are not obligated to do so and may discontinue
market making at any time without notice. No assurance can be given as to the
liquidity of the trading market for the notes.

Level 3 has agreed that, for a period of 90 days from the date of this
prospectus supplement, it will not, without the prior written consent of
Goldman, Sachs & Co., offer, sell, contract to sell, issue, announce the
offering or issuance of, register, cause to be registered or announce the
registration or intended registration of, in any case for its own account, any
shares of common stock of Level 3, including any such shares beneficially or
indirectly owned or controlled by Level 3, or any securities convertible into
or exchangeable for common stock, except for: (1) up to 2,000,000 shares of
common stock issued in connection with acquisitions, provided that this limit
may be exceeded if the purchaser of such shares agrees to be bound for any
remaining portion of the 90-day "black-out"

S-104

period, (2) common stock issued pursuant to any employee benefit plan, stock
ownership or stock option plan or dividend reinvestment plan in effect on the
date hereof, or options granted pursuant to any such plan in effect on the date
hereof, provided that such options cannot be exercised for any remaining
portion of the 90-day "black-out" period, (3) common stock issued in connection
with the inclusion of Level 3's common stock in any Major Market Index (as
defined in the underwriting agreement), (4) maintaining the effectiveness of
any registration statement in place on the date hereof or otherwise permitted
to be filed under this paragraph, (5) common stock issued in connection with
the exercise of warrants outstanding on the date hereof, (6) common stock
issued to prospective employees in connection with such employees being hired
by Level 3 and (7) the notes and common stock issued upon the conversion of the
notes. Goldman, Sachs & Co., in its sole discretion, may release any of the
securities subject to these "black-out" agreements at any time without notice.

In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell
notes in the open market. These transactions may include short sales,
stabilizing transactions and purchases to cover positions created by short
sales. Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of
notes than they are required to purchase in the offering. Stabilizing
transactions consist of certain bids or purchases made for the purpose of
preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of the notes while the
offering is in progress.

The underwriters also may impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a
particular underwriter repays to the underwriters a portion of the underwriting
discount received by it because the representatives have repurchased notes sold
by or for the account of such underwriter in stabilizing or short covering
transactions.

These activities by the underwriters may stabilize, maintain or otherwise
affect the market price of the notes. As a result, the price of the notes may
be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. If
these activities are commenced, they may be discontinued by the underwriters at
any time. These transactions may be effected in the over-the-counter market or
otherwise.

Level 3 estimates that its share of the total expense of this offering,
excluding underwriting discounts and commissions, will be approximately $1.5
million.

The representatives have performed certain investment banking and advisory
services for Level 3 from time to time for which they have received customary
fees and expenses. The representatives may, from time to time, engage in
transactions with and perform services for Level 3 in the ordinary course of
their business. Affiliates of the underwriters are lenders and agents under
Level 3's proposed secured credit facility.

Level 3 has agreed to indemnify the several underwriters against certain
liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act of 1933.

S-105

LEGAL MATTERS

The validity of the notes offered through this prospectus supplement will be
passed upon for the Company by Willkie Farr & Gallagher, New York, New York.
Certain legal matters relating to this offering will be passed upon for the
underwriters by Cravath, Swaine & Moore, New York, New York.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements of Level 3 Communications, Inc. as of
December 31, 1998 and for the year then ended, included in this prospectus
supplement have been audited by Arthur Andersen LLP, independent public
accountants, as indicated in their report with respect thereto, and are
included herein in reliance upon the authority of said firm as experts in
giving said report.

The consolidated balance sheet of Level 3 Communications, Inc. as of
December 27, 1997, and the related statements of earnings, cash flows,
comprehensive income, and changes in stockholders' equity for each of the two
years in the period ended December 27, 1997 included in this prospectus
supplement, as well as the consolidated balance sheets of RCN Corporation and
Subsidiaries as of December 31, 1997 and 1998 and the related statements of
operations, cash flows, comprehensive income, and changes in stockholders'
equity, for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 1998,
incorporated by reference in this prospectus supplement, have been included or
incorporated herein in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP,
independent accountants, given on the authority of that firm as experts in
accounting and auditing.

S-106

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

access...................... Telecommunications services that permit long distance
carriers to use local exchange facilities to originate
and/or terminate long distance service.

access charges.............. The fees paid by long distance carriers to LECs for
originating and terminating long distance calls on the
LECs' local networks.

backbone.................... A centralized high-speed network that interconnects
smaller, independent networks. It is the through-portion
of a transmission network, as opposed to spurs which
branch off the through-portions.

CAP......................... Competitive Access Provider. A company that provides its
customers with an alternative to the local exchange
company for local transport of private line and special
access telecommunications services.

capacity.................... The information carrying ability of a telecommunications
facility.

carrier..................... A provider of communications transmission services by
fiber, wire or radio.

Central Office.............. Telephone company facility where subscribers' lines are
joined to switching equipment for connecting other
subscribers to each other, locally and long distance.

CLEC........................ Competitive Local Exchange Carrier. A company that
competes with LECs in the local services market.

colocation.................. Colocation refers to the physical location of a
telecommunication carrier's equipment in ILEC or CLEC
premises to facilitate the interconnection of their
respective switching/routing equipment.

common carrier.............. A government-defined group of private companies offering
telecommunications services or facilities to the general
public on a non-discriminatory basis.

conduit..................... A pipe, usually made of metal, ceramic or plastic, that
protects buried cables.

dark fiber.................. Fiber optic strands that are not connected to
transmission equipment.

dedicated lines............. Telecommunications lines reserved for use by particular
customers.

dialing parity.............. The ability of a competing local or toll service provider
to provide telecommunications services in such a manner
that customers have the ability to route automatically,
without the use of any access code, their
telecommunications to the service provider of the
customers' designation.

equal access................ The basis upon which customers of interexchange carriers
are able to obtain access to their Primary Interexchange
Carriers' (PIC) long distance telephone network by
dialing "1", thus eliminating the need to dial additional
digits and an authorization code to obtain such access.

facilities based carriers... Carriers that own and operate their own network and
equipment.

S-107

fiber optics................ A technology in which light is used to transport
information from one point to another. Fiber optic cables
are thin filaments of glass through which light beams are
transmitted over long distances carrying enormous amounts
of data. Modulating light on thin strands of glass
produces major benefits including high bandwidth,
relatively low cost, low power consumption, small space
needs and total insensitivity to electromagnetic
interference.

Gbps........................ Gigabits per second. A transmission rate. One gigabit
equals 1000 Mbps.

ILEC........................ Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier. A company historically
providing local telephone service. Often refers to one of
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs). Often
referred to as "LEC" (Local Exchange Carrier).

interconnection............. Interconnection of facilities between or among local
exchange carriers, including potential physical
colocation of one carrier's equipment in the other
carrier's premises to facilitate such interconnection.

InterLATA................... Telecommunications services originating in a LATA and
terminating outside of that LATA.

Internet.................... A global collection of interconnected computer networks
which use a specific communications protocol.

IntraLATA................... Telecommunications services originating and terminating
in the same LATA.

ISDN........................ Integrated Services Digital Network. An information
transfer standard for transmitting digital voice and data
over telephone lines at speeds up to 128 Kbps.

ISPs........................ Internet Service Providers. Companies formed to provide
access to the Internet to consumers and business
customers via local networks.

IXC......................... Interexchange Carrier. A telecommunications company that
provides telecommunications services between local
exchanges on an interstate or intrastate basis. A
transmission rate. One kilobit equals 1,024 bits of
information.

Kbps........................ Kilobits per second. A transmission rate. One kilobit
equals 1,024 bits of information.

LATA........................ Local Access and Transport Area. A geographic area
composed of contiguous local exchanges, usually but not
always within a single state. There are approximately 200
LATAs in the United States.

leased line................. Telecommunications line dedicated to a particular
customer along predetermined routes.

LEC......................... Local Exchange Carrier. A telecommunications company that
provides telecommunications services in a geographic area
in which calls generally are transmitted without toll
charges. LECs include both ILECs and CLECs.

S-108

local exchange.............. A geographic area determined by the appropriate state
regulatory authority in which calls generally are
transmitted without toll charges to the calling or called
party.

local loop.................. A circuit that connects an end user to the LEC central
office within a LATA.

long distance carriers
(interexchange carriers)... Long distance carriers provide services between local
exchanges on an interstate or intrastate basis. A long
distance carrier may offer services over its own or
another carrier's facilities.

Mbps........................ Megabits per second. A transmission rate. One megabit
equals 1,024 Kbps.

multiplexing................ An electronic or optical process that combines a large
number of lower speed transmission lines into one high
speed line by splitting the total available bandwidth
into narrower bands (frequency division), or by allotting
a common channel to several different transmitting
devices, one at a time in sequence (time division).

NAP......................... Network Access Point. A location at which ISPs exchange
each other's traffic.

OC3......................... A data communications circuit consisting of three DS3s
capable of transmitting data at 155 Mbps.

OC48........................ A data communications circuit consisting of forty-eight
DS3s capable of transmitting data at approximately 2.45
Gbps.

peering..................... The commercial practice under which ISPs exchange each
other's traffic without the payment of settlement
charges. Peering occurs at both public and private
exchange points.

POP......................... Point of Presence. Telecommunications facility where a
communications provider locates network equipment used to
connect customers to its network backbone.

private line................ A dedicated telecommunications connection between end
user locations.

PSTN........................ Public Switched Telephone Network. That portion of a
local exchange company's network available to all users
generally on a shared basis (i.e., not dedicated to a
particular user). Traffic along the public switched
network is generally switched at the local exchange
company's central offices.

RBOCs....................... Regional Bell Operating Companies. Originally, the seven
local telephone companies (formerly part of AT&T)
established as a result of the AT&T Divestiture.
Currently consists of five local telephone companies as a
result of the mergers of Bell Atlantic with NYNEX and SBC
with Pacific Telesis.

reciprocal compensation..... The compensation of a CLEC for termination of a local
call by the ILEC on the CLEC's network, which is the same
as the compensation that the CLEC pays the ILEC for
termination of local calls on the ILEC's network.

S-109

resale...................... Resale by a provider of telecommunications services (such
as a LEC) of such services to other providers or carriers
on a wholesale or a retail basis.

router...................... Equipment placed between networks that relays data to
those networks based upon a destination address contained
in the data packets being routed.

SONET....................... Synchronous Optical Network. An electronics and network
architecture for variable bandwidth products which
enables transmission of voice, data and video
(multimedia) at very high speeds. SONET ring architecture
provides for virtually instantaneous restoration of
service in the event of a fiber cut by automatically
rerouting traffic in the opposite direction around the
ring.

special access services..... The lease of private, dedicated telecommunications lines
or "circuits" along the network of a local exchange
company or a CAP, which lines or circuits run to or from
the long distance carrier POPs. Examples of special
access services are telecommunications lines running
between POPs of a single long distance carrier, from one
long distance carrier POP to the POP of another long
distance carrier or from an end user to a long distance
carrier POP.

switch...................... A device that selects the paths or circuits to be used
for transmission of information and establishes a
connection. Switching is the process of interconnecting
circuits to form a transmission path between users and it
also captures information for billing purposes.

Tbps........................ Terabits per second. A transmission rate. One terabit
equals 1000 Gbps.

TI.......................... A data communications circuit capable of transmitting
data at 1.544 Mbps.

unbundled................... Services, programs, software and training sold separately
from the hardware.

unbundled access............ Access to unbundled elements of a telecommunications
services provider's network including network facilities,
equipment, features, functions and capabilities, at any
technically feasible point within such network.

web site.................... A server connected to the Internet from which Internet
users can obtain information.

wireless.................... A communications system that operates without wires.
Cellular service is an example.

world wide web or web....... A collection of computer systems supporting a
communications protocol that permits multimedia
presentation of information over the Internet.

xDSL........................ A term referring to a variety of new Digital Subscriber
Line technologies. Some of these new varieties are
asymmetric with different data rates in the downstream
and upstream directions. Others are symmetric. Downstream
speeds range from 384 Kbps (or "SDSL") to 1.5 to 8 Mbps
("ADSL").

S-110

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
(formerly, Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc.)

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Page
----

Financial Statements as of June 30, 1999 and for the three months and six
months ended June 30, 1999 and June 30, 1998 (unaudited):
Consolidated Condensed Statements of Operations........................ F-2
Consolidated Condensed Balance Sheets.................................. F-3
Consolidated Condensed Statements of Cash Flows........................ F-4
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Stockholders' Equity.............. F-5
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)................. F-6
Notes to Consolidated Condensed Financial Statements................... F-7
Financial Statements as of December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997 and
for the three years ended December 31, 1998:
Reports of Independent Public Accountants.............................. F-18
Consolidated Statements of Earnings.................................... F-20
Consolidated Balance Sheets............................................ F-21
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.................................. F-22
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity............. F-24
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income........................ F-25
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements............................. F-26

Schedules not indicated above have been omitted because of the absence of
the conditions under which they are required or because the information called
for is shown in the consolidated financial statements or in the notes thereto.

F-1

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(unaudited)

Three Months Six Months
Ended June 30, Ended June 30,
---------------------- ----------------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
(dollars in millions, except share data)

Revenue........................ $ 106 $ 103 $ 208 $ 190
Costs and Expenses:
Cost of revenue.............. 81 49 143 91
Depreciation and
amortization................ 51 10 92 16
Selling, general and
administrative expenses..... 157 55 282 103
Write-off of in-process
research & development...... -- 30 -- 30
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Total costs and expenses... 289 144 517 240
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Loss from Operations........... (183) (41) (309) (50)
Other Income (Expense):
Interest income.............. 57 45 107 71
Interest expense, net ....... (45) (36) (98) (40)
Gain on equity investee stock
transactions ............... 111 21 111 21
Other, net................... (7) (25) (30) (47)
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Total other income......... 116 5 90 5
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Loss Before Income Taxes and
Discontinued Operations ...... (67) (36) (219) (45)
Income Tax Benefit ............ 23 2 70 5
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Loss from Continuing
Operations.................... (44) (34) (149) (40)
Discontinued Operations:
Gain on split-off of
Construction Group.......... -- -- -- 608
Gain on disposition of energy
business, net of income tax
expense of $175............. -- -- -- 324
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Earnings from discontinued
operations.................. -- -- -- 932
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Net Earnings (Loss) ........... $ (44) $ (34) $ (149) $ 892
========== ========== ========== ==========
Earnings (Loss) Per Share
(Basic and Diluted):
Continuing operations........ $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ (.14)
========== ========== ========== ==========
Discontinued operations...... $ -- $ -- $ -- $ 3.14
========== ========== ========== ==========
Net earnings (loss).......... $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ 3.00
========== ========== ========== ==========
Net earnings (loss),
excluding gain on split-off
of Construction Group....... $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ 0.96
========== ========== ========== ==========

See accompanying notes to consolidated condensed financial statements.

F-2

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED BALANCE SHEETS

(unaudited)

June 30, December 31,
1999 1998
-------- ------------
(dollars in millions,
except share data)

Assets
Current Assets
Cash and cash equivalents.............................. $ 795 $ 842
Marketable securities.................................. 3,383 2,863
Restricted securities.................................. 34 32
Accounts receivable, net............................... 111 57
Income taxes receivable................................ 89 54
Other.................................................. 42 29
------ ------
Total Current Assets..................................... 4,454 3,877
Property, Plant and Equipment, net....................... 2,185 1,061
Investments.............................................. 387 323
Other Assets, net........................................ 324 264
------ ------
$7,350 $5,525
====== ======
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity
Current Liabilities:
Accounts payable....................................... $ 478 $ 276
Current portion of long-term debt...................... 6 5
Accrued payroll and employee benefits.................. 39 16
Accrued interest....................................... 33 33
Deferred revenue....................................... 56 1
Other.................................................. 44 39
------ ------
Total Current Liabilities................................ 656 370
Long-Term Debt, less current portion..................... 2,667 2,641
Deferred Income Taxes.................................... 57 86
Accrued Reclamation Costs................................ 95 96
Other Liabilities........................................ 266 167
Commitments and Contingencies
Stockholders' Equity:
Preferred stock, $.01 par value, authorized 10,000,000
shares; no shares outstanding in 1999 and 1998........ -- --
Common Stock:
Common Stock, $.01 par value, authorized
1,500,000,000 shares; 339,616,599 shares outstanding
in 1999 and 307,874,706 outstanding in 1998......... 3 3
Class R, $.01 par value, authorized 8,500,000 shares;
no shares outstanding in 1999 and 1998.............. -- --
Additional paid-in capital............................. 2,372 765
Accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income.......... (10) 4
Retained earnings...................................... 1,244 1,393
------ ------
Total Stockholders' Equity............................... 3,609 2,165
------ ------
$7,350 $5,525
====== ======

See accompanying notes to consolidated condensed financial statements.

F-3

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(unaudited)

Six Months Ended June
30,
----------------------
1999 1998
---------- ----------
(dollars in millions)

Cash flows from continuing operations:
Net cash provided by (used in) continuing
operations.......................................... $ 159 $ (62)
Cash flows from investing activities:
Proceeds from sales and maturities of marketable
securities.......................................... 2,769 2,484
Purchases of marketable securities................... (3,275) (4,713)
Investments.......................................... (3) (22)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
and other investments............................... 11 26
Capital expenditures................................. (1,215) (144)
Other................................................ 1 --
---------- ----------
Net cash used in investing activities.............. (1,712) (2,369)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Payments on long-term debt including current
portion............................................. (4) (5)
Issuance of long-term debt........................... 1 1,937
Issuances of common stock............................ 1,496 21
Proceeds from exercise of stock options.............. 13 7
Exchange of Class C Stock for Common Stock, net...... -- 122
---------- ----------
Net cash provided by financing activities.......... 1,506 2,082
Cash flows from discontinued operations:
Proceeds from sale of energy operations, net of
income tax payments of $96 million.................. -- 1,063
---------- ----------
Net cash provided by discontinued operations....... -- 1,063
---------- ----------
Net change in cash and cash equivalents................ (47) 714
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year......... 842 87
---------- ----------
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period............. $ 795 $ 801
========== ==========

The activities of the Construction & Mining Group have been removed from the
consolidated condensed statements of cash flows in 1998. The Construction Group
had cash flows of ($62) million for the three months ended March 31, 1998.

See accompanying notes to consolidated condensed financial statements.

F-4

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY

For the six months ended June 30, 1999

(unaudited)

Accumulated
Additional Other
Common Paid-in Comprehensive Retained
Stock Capital Income (Loss) Earnings Total
------ ---------- ------------- -------- ------
(dollars in millions)

Balance at December 31, 1998.. $ 3 $ 765 $ 4 $1,393 $2,165
Common Stock:
Issuances, net.............. -- 1,503 -- -- 1,503
Stock options exercised..... -- 13 -- -- 13
Stock option grants......... -- 49 -- -- 49
Income tax benefit from
exercise of options........ -- 42 -- -- 42
Net Loss...................... -- -- -- (149) (149)
Other Comprehensive Loss...... -- -- (14) -- (14)
--- ------ ---- ------ ------
Balance at June 30, 1999...... $ 3 $2,372 $(10) $1,244 $3,609
=== ====== ==== ====== ======

See accompanying notes to consolidated condensed financial statements.

F-5

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

(unaudited)

Three Months Ended Six Months Ended
June 30, June 30,
-------------------- ------------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
--------- --------- -------- --------
(dollars in millions)

Net (Loss) Earnings.................... $ (44) $ (34) $ (149) $ 892
Other Comprehensive (Loss) Income
Before Tax:
Foreign currency translation
adjustments......................... (6) -- (8) 1
Unrealized holding (loss) gain
arising during period............... 1 (5) (2) 3
Reclassification adjustment for
losses (gains) included in net
earnings (loss)..................... (14) (3) (12) (8)
--------- --------- -------- -------
Other Comprehensive (Loss) Before Tax.. (19) (8) (22) (4)
Income Tax Benefit Related to Items of
Other Comprehensive (Loss)............ 7 3 8 2
--------- --------- -------- -------
Other Comprehensive (Loss) Net of
Taxes................................. (12) (5) (14) (2)
--------- --------- -------- -------
Comprehensive (Loss) Income............ $ (56) $ (39) $ (163) $ 890
========= ========= ======== =======

See accompanying notes to consolidated condensed financial statements.

F-6

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Basis of Presentation

The consolidated condensed balance sheet of Level 3 Communications, Inc. and
subsidiaries ("Level 3" or the "Company"), at December 31, 1998 has been
condensed from the Company's audited balance sheet as of that date. All other
financial statements contained herein are unaudited and, in the opinion of
management, contain all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring
accruals) necessary for a fair presentation of financial position, results of
operations and cash flows for the periods presented. The Company's accounting
policies and certain other disclosures are set forth in the notes to the
consolidated financial statements contained herein for the year ended December
31, 1998. These financial statements should be read in conjunction with the
Company's audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto. The
preparation of the consolidated condensed financial statements in conformity
with generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make
estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount of assets and
liabilities, disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities and the reported
amount of revenue and expenses during the reported period. Actual results could
differ from these estimates.

The Company has embarked on a plan to become a facilities-based provider
(that is, a provider that owns or leases a substantial portion of the property,
plant and equipment necessary to provide its services) of a broad range of
integrated communications services in the United States, Europe and Asia. To
reach this goal, the Company is expanding substantially the business of its PKS
Information Services, Inc. subsidiary and creating, through a combination of
construction, purchase and leasing of facilities and other assets, an
international, end-to-end, facilities-based communications network (the
"Business Plan"). The Company is building the network based on Internet
Protocol technology in order to leverage the efficiencies of this technology to
provide lower cost communications services.

In 1997, the Company agreed to sell its energy assets to MidAmerican Energy
Holding Company, Inc. (f/k/a CalEnergy Company, Inc.) ("MidAmerican") and to
separate the construction operations ("Construction Group") from the Company.
On January 2, 1998, the Company completed the sale of its energy assets to
MidAmerican. On March 31, 1998, the Company completed the split-off of the
Construction Group to stockholders that held Class C Stock. Therefore, the
results of operations of both businesses have been classified as discontinued
operations on the consolidated condensed statements of operations for 1998.

On May 1, 1998, the Company's Board of Directors changed Level 3's fiscal
year end from the last Saturday in December to a calendar year end. The
additional four days for the period ending June 30, 1998, were not material to
the overall results of operations and cash flows.

The results of operations for the six months ended June 30, 1999, are not
necessarily indicative of the results expected for the full year.

Where appropriate, items within the consolidated condensed financial
statements have been reclassified from the previous periods to conform to
current period presentation.

2. Reorganization--Discontinued Construction Operations

Prior to March 31, 1998, the Company had a two-class capital structure. The
Company's Class C Stock reflected the performance of the Construction Group and
the Class D Stock reflected the performance of the other businesses, including
communications, information services and coal mining. In 1997 the Board of
Directors of Level 3 approved a proposal for the separation of the

F-7

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Construction Group from the other operations of the Company through a split-off
of the Construction Group (the "Split-off"). In December 1997, the Company's
stockholders approved the Split-off and on March 5, 1998 the Company received a
ruling from the Internal Revenue Service that stated the Split-off would be
tax-free to U.S. stockholders. The Split-off was effected on March 31, 1998. As
a result of the Split-off, the Company no longer owns any interest in the
Construction Group. Accordingly, the separate financial statements and
management's discussion and analysis of financial condition and results of
operations of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. should be obtained to review the results
of operations of the Construction Group for the three months ended March 31,
1998.

On March 31, 1998, the Company reflected the fair value of the Construction
Group as a distribution to the Class C stockholders because the distribution
was considered non-pro rata as compared to the Company's previous two-class
capital stock structure. The Company recognized a gain of $608 million within
discontinued operations, equal to the difference between the carrying value of
the Construction Group and its fair value in accordance with Financial
Accounting Standards Board Emerging Issues Task Force Issue 96-4, "Accounting
for Reorganizations Involving a Non-Pro Rata Split-off of Certain Nonmonetary
Assets to Owners". No taxes were provided on this gain due to the tax-free
nature of the Split-off.

In connection with the Split-off, the Class D Stock became the common stock
of Level 3 Communications, Inc. ("Common Stock"), and shortly thereafter, began
trading on the Nasdaq National Market on April 1, 1998, under the symbol
"LVLT".

3. Discontinued Energy Operations

On January 2, 1998, the Company completed the sale of its energy assets to
MidAmerican. These assets included approximately 20.2 million shares of
MidAmerican common stock (assuming the exercise of 1 million options held by
Level 3), Level 3's 30% interest in CE Electric and Level 3's investments in
international power projects in Indonesia and the Philippines. Level 3
recognized an after-tax gain on the disposition of $324 million and the after-
tax proceeds of approximately $967 million from the transaction are being used
in part to fund the Business Plan. Results of operations for the period through
January 2, 1998 were not considered significant and the gain on disposition was
calculated using the carrying amount of the energy assets as of December 27,
1997.

4. Earnings (Loss) Per Share

Basic earnings (loss) per share have been computed using the weighted
average number of shares during each period. The Company had a loss from
continuing operations for the three and six month periods ended June 30, 1999
and 1998. Therefore, the 21,868,537 options and warrants outstanding at June
30, 1999 and 19,718,014 options and warrants outstanding at June 30, 1998 have
not been included in the computation of diluted earnings (loss) per share
because the resulting computation would have been anti-dilutive.

Effective August 10, 1998, the Company issued a dividend of one share of
Level 3 Common Stock for each share of Level 3 Common Stock outstanding. All
share information and per share data have been restated to reflect the stock
dividend.

F-8

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following details the earnings (loss) per share calculations for Level 3
Common Stock:

Three Months Six Months
Ended June 30, Ended June 30,
---------------- ----------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
------- ------- ------- -------

Loss From Continuing Operations (in
millions)................................. $ (44) $ (34) $ (149) $ (40)
Discontinued Operations:
Gain on Split-off of Construction Group.. -- -- -- 608
Earnings from Discontinued Energy
Operations.............................. -- -- -- 324
------- ------- ------- -------
Net earnings (loss).................... $ (44) $ (34) $ (149) $ 892
======= ======= ======= =======
Total Number of Weighted Average Shares
Outstanding Used to Compute Basic and
Diluted Earnings Per Share (in
thousands).............................. 339,266 301,786 327,840 296,986
======= ======= ======= =======
Earnings (Loss) Per Share (Basic and
Diluted):
Continuing operations.................... $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ (.14)
======= ======= ======= =======
Discontinued operations.................. $ -- $ -- $ -- $ 3.14
======= ======= ======= =======
Net earnings (loss)...................... $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ 3.00
======= ======= ======= =======
Net earnings (loss), excluding gain on
Split-off of Construction Group......... $ (.13) $ (.11) $ (.45) $ .96
======= ======= ======= =======

5. Acquisitions

On January 5, 1999, Level 3 acquired BusinessNet Ltd. ("BusinessNet"), a
leading London-based Internet service provider in a largely stock-for-stock
transaction valued at $12 million and accounted for as a purchase. After
completion of certain adjustments, the Company agreed to issue approximately
400,000 shares of Common Stock and paid $1 million in cash in exchange for all
of the issued and outstanding shares of BusinessNet's capital stock. Of the
approximately 400,000 shares Level 3 agreed to issue in connection with the
acquisition, approximately 150,000 shares of Level 3 Common Stock have been
pledged to Level 3 to secure certain indemnification obligations of the former
BusinessNet stockholders. The pledge of these shares will terminate in
approximately 18 months from the acquisition date, unless otherwise extended
pursuant to the terms of the acquisition agreement. Liabilities exceeded assets
acquired, and goodwill of $16 million was recognized from the transaction which
is being amortized over five years.

On April 23, 1998, the Company acquired XCOM Technologies, Inc. ("XCOM"), a
privately held company that has developed technology which the Company believes
will provide certain key components necessary for the Company to develop an
interface between its Internet Protocol based network and the existing public
switched telephone network. The Company issued approximately 5.3 million shares
of Level 3 Common Stock and 0.7 million options and warrants to purchase Level
3 Common Stock in exchange for all the stock, options and warrants of XCOM.

The Company accounted for this transaction, valued at $154 million, as a
purchase. Of the total purchase price, $115 million was originally allocated to
in-process research and development and was taken as a nondeductible charge to
earnings in the second quarter of 1998. The purchase price exceeded the fair
value of the net assets acquired by $30 million which was recognized as
goodwill.

In October 1998, the Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC") issued new
guidelines for valuing acquired research and development which are applied
retroactively. The Company believes

F-9

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

its accounting for the acquisition was made in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles and established appraisal practices at the time
of the acquisition. However, due to the significance of the charge relative to
the total value of the acquisition, the Company reviewed the facts with the
SEC. Consequently, using the revised guidelines and assumptions, the Company
reduced the charge for in-process research and development from $115 to
$30 million, and increased the related goodwill by $85 million. The goodwill
associated with the XCOM transaction is being amortized over a five year
period. The results for the three and six months ended June 30, 1998 have been
restated to reflect the reduced charge for in-process research and development
and increased amortization expense.

The Company believes that its resulting charge for acquired research and
development conforms to the SEC's expressed guidelines and methodologies.
However, no assurances can be given that the SEC will not require additional
adjustments.

The cumulative operating results of BusinessNet, XCOM and other 1998
acquisitions were not significant relative to the Company's 1999 and 1998
results.

For the Company's acquisitions, the excess purchase price over the fair
market value of the underlying assets was allocated to goodwill and other
intangible assets and property based upon preliminary estimates of fair value.
The final purchase price allocation for XCOM did not vary significantly from
preliminary estimates. The Company does not believe that the final purchase
price allocation will vary significantly from the preliminary estimates for the
entities acquired after June 30, 1998.

6. Property, Plant and Equipment, net

Construction in Progress

The Company is currently constructing its communications network. Costs
associated directly with the uncompleted network and interest expense incurred
during construction are capitalized based on the weighted average accumulated
construction expenditures and the interest rates related to borrowings
associated with the construction. Certain gateway facilities, local networks
and operating equipment have been placed in service during 1999. These assets
are being depreciated over their useful lives, primarily ranging from 3-20
years. As other segments of the network are placed in service, the assets will
be depreciated over their useful lives.

The Company is currently developing business support systems required for
its Business Plan. The external direct costs of software, materials and
services, payroll and payroll related expenses for employees directly
associated with the project and interest costs incurred when developing the
business support systems are capitalized. Upon completion of the projects, the
total costs of the business support systems are amortized over their useful
lives of 3 years.

For the six months ended June 30, 1999, the Company invested $1,118 million
in its communications business, including $429 million on the U.S. intercity
network, $207 million on international networks, $85 million on transoceanic
networks and $284 million on gateway facilities and local networks.

F-10

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Capitalized business support systems and network construction costs that
have not been placed in service have been classified as construction-in-
progress within Property, Plant and Equipment below.

Accumulated Book
Cost Depreciation Value
------- ------------ ------
(dollars in millions)

June 30, 1999
Land and Mineral Properties........................ $ 35 $ (11) $ 24
Facility and Leasehold Improvements:
Communications................................... 114 (2) 112
Information Services............................. 26 (2) 24
Coal Mining...................................... 18 (15) 3
CPTC............................................. 91 (8) 83
Operating Equipment:
Communications................................... 294 (43) 251
Information Services............................. 58 (34) 24
Coal Mining...................................... 176 (155) 21
CPTC............................................. 17 (6) 11
Network Construction Equipment..................... 79 (4) 75
Furniture and Office Equipment..................... 90 (26) 64
Other.............................................. 75 (15) 60
Construction-in-Progress........................... 1,433 -- 1,433
------- ----- ------
$ 2,506 $(321) $2,185
======= ===== ======
December 31, 1998
Land and Mineral Properties........................ $ 32 $ (11) $ 21
Facility and Leasehold Improvements:
Communications................................... 80 (1) 79
Information Services............................. 24 (2) 22
Coal Mining...................................... 18 (15) 3
CPTC............................................. 91 (5) 86
Operating Equipment:
Communications................................... 245 (18) 227
Information Services............................. 53 (30) 23
Coal Mining...................................... 180 (155) 25
CPTC............................................. 17 (4) 13
Network Construction Equipment..................... 46 (1) 45
Furniture and Office Equipment..................... 67 (10) 57
Other.............................................. 72 (2) 70
Construction-in-Progress........................... 390 -- 390
------- ----- ------
$ 1,315 $(254) $1,061
======= ===== ======

F-11

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

7. Investments

The Company holds significant equity positions in two publicly traded
companies; RCN Corporation ("RCN") and Commonwealth Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
("Commonwealth Telephone"). RCN is a facilities-based provider of
communications services to the residential market primarily in the northeastern
United States and California. RCN provides local and long distance phone, cable
television and Internet services in several markets; including Boston, New
York, Washington, D.C., and California's San Francisco to San Diego corridor.

Commonwealth Telephone holds Commonwealth Telephone Company, an incumbent
local exchange carrier operating in various rural Pennsylvania markets, and
CTSI, Inc., a competitive local exchange carrier which commenced operations in
1997.

On June 30, 1999, Level 3 owned approximately 35% and 48% of the outstanding
shares of RCN and Commonwealth Telephone, respectively, and accounts for each
entity using the equity method. The market value of the Company's investment in
the two entities was $1,109 million and $431 million, respectively, on June 30,
1999.

The Company recognizes gains from the sale, issuance and repurchase of stock
by its subsidiaries and equity method investees in its statement of operations.
During 1999, RCN issued stock in a public offering and for certain transactions
which diluted the Company's ownership of RCN from 41% at December 31, 1998 to
35% at June 30, 1999. The increase in the Company's proportionate share of
RCN's net assets as a result of these transactions resulted in a pre-tax gain
of $111 million for the Company in the second quarter of 1999. The Company also
recognized a gain of $21 million in the second quarter of 1998 related to stock
transactions of RCN.

The following is summarized financial information of RCN and Commonwealth
Telephone for the three and six months ended June 30, 1999 and 1998, and as of
June 30, 1999 and December 31, 1998 (in millions):

Three Months Ended Six Months Ended
June 30, June 30,
-------------------- ------------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
--------- --------- -------- --------

Operations
RCN Corporation:
Revenue............................ $ 67 $ 50 $ 134 $ 90
Net loss available to common
shareholders...................... (68) (49) (136) (117)
Level 3's share:
Net loss......................... (25) (22) (52) (53)
Goodwill amortization............ (1) -- (1) --
--------- --------- -------- --------
Equity in net loss............. $ (26) $ (22) $ (53) $ (53)
========= ========= ======== ========
Commonwealth Telephone Enterprises:
Revenue............................ $ 63 $ 56 $ 124 $ 109
Net income available to common
shareholders...................... 6 5 11 9
Level 3's share:
Net income....................... 3 2 5 4
Goodwill amortization............ -- -- (1) (1)
--------- --------- -------- --------
Equity in net income........... $ 3 $ 2 $ 4 $ 3
========= ========= ======== ========

F-12

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Commonwealth
RCN Telephone
Corporation Enterprises
------------- -------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
------ ------ ------ ------

Financial Position
Current assets..................................... $1,837 $1,093 $ 78 $ 79
Other assets....................................... 1,023 815 387 354
------ ------ ------ ------
Total assets..................................... 2,860 1,908 465 433
Current liabilities................................ 174 178 85 85
Other liabilities.................................. 1,741 1,282 245 223
Minority interest.................................. 103 77 -- --
Preferred stock.................................... 244 -- -- --
------ ------ ------ ------
Total liabilities and preferred stock............ 2,262 1,537 330 308
------ ------ ------ ------
Common Equity.................................. $ 598 $ 371 $ 135 $ 125
====== ====== ====== ======
Level 3's share:
Equity in net assets............................. $ 214 $ 150 $ 65 $ 60
Goodwill......................................... 28 34 55 56
------ ------ ------ ------
$ 242 $ 184 $ 120 $ 116
====== ====== ====== ======

Investments at June 30, 1999 and December 31, 1998 also include $23 million
for the Company's investment in the Pavilion Towers office buildings in Aurora,
Colorado.

8. Other Assets, net

At June 30, 1999 and December 31, 1998 other assets consisted of the
following:

1999 1998
---- ----
(in
millions)

Goodwill:
XCOM, net of accumulated amortization of $26 and $15............... $ 86 $100
GeoNet, net of accumulated amortization of $3 and $1............... 18 20
BusinessNet, net of accumulated amortization of $2 and $--......... 14 --
Other, net of accumulated amortization of $4 and $1................ 16 19
Prepaid Network Assets............................................... 77 --
Deferred Debt Issuance Costs......................................... 63 67
Deferred Development and Financing Costs............................. 15 15
Unrecovered Mine Development Costs................................... 15 15
Leases............................................................... 7 9
Timberlands.......................................................... 6 6
Other................................................................ 7 13
---- ----
Total other assets............................................... $324 $264
==== ====

9. Long-Term Debt

9 1/8% Senior Notes

On April 28, 1998, the Company received $1.94 billion of net proceeds from
an offering of $2 billion aggregate principal amount 9 1/8% Senior Notes Due
2008 ("Senior Notes"). Interest on the notes accrues at 9 1/8% per year and is
payable on May 1 and November 1 each year in cash.

F-13

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Debt issuance costs of $65 million were capitalized and are being amortized
as interest expense over the term of the Senior Notes.

10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes

On December 2, 1998, the Company sold $834 million aggregate principal
amount at maturity of 10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes Due 2008 ("Senior Discount
Notes"). The sales proceeds of $500 million, excluding debt issuance costs,
were recorded as long-term debt. Interest on Senior Discount Notes accretes at
a rate of 10 1/2% per annum, compounded semiannually, to an aggregate principal
amount of $834 million by December 1, 2003. Cash interest will not accrue on
the Senior Discount Notes prior to December 1, 2003; however, the Company may
elect to commence the accrual of cash interest on all outstanding Senior
Discount Notes on or after December 1, 2001. Accrued interest expense for the
six months ended June 30, 1999 on the Senior Discount Notes of $27 million was
added to long-term debt.

Debt issuance costs of $14 million have been capitalized and are being
amortized as interest expense over the term of the Senior Discount Notes.

The Company capitalized $20 and $31 million of interest expense and
amortized debt issuance costs related to network construction and business
systems development projects for the three and six months ended June 30, 1999
and $1 million for the three and six months ended June 30, 1998.

10. Employee Benefit Plans

The Company adopted the recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, "Accounting
for Stock Based Compensation" ("SFAS No. 123") in 1998. Under SFAS No. 123, the
fair value of an option (as computed in accordance with accepted option
valuation models) on the date of grant is amortized over the vesting periods of
the options. The recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123 are applied
prospectively upon adoption. As a result, the recognition provisions are
applied to all stock awards granted in the year of adoption and are not applied
to awards granted in previous years unless those awards are modified or settled
in cash after adoption of the recognition provisions. Although the recognition
of the value of the stock awards results in compensation or professional
expenses in an entity's financial statements, the expense differs from other
compensation and professional expenses in that these charges will not be
settled in cash, but rather, generally, through issuance of common stock.

The Company believes that the adoption of SFAS No. 123 will result in
material non-cash charges to operations in 1999 and thereafter. The amount of
the non-cash charges will be dependent upon a number of factors, including the
number of grants and the fair value of each grant estimated at the time of its
award.

Nonqualified Stock Options and Warrants

The Company granted 55,100 nonqualified stock options with a fair value of
$1 million ("NQSO") to employees during the six months ended June 30, 1999. The
expense recognized for the three and six months ended June 30, 1999 for NQSOs
and warrants outstanding at June 30, 1999 in accordance with SFAS No. 123 was
$4 million and $2 million, respectively. In addition to the expense recognized,
the Company capitalized $- and $1 million of non-cash compensation costs for
the three and six months ended June 30, 1999, respectively, related to NQSOs
and warrants for employees directly involved in the construction of the
Internet Protocol network and the development of the business support systems.
The Company recognized $4 million and $6 million of expense for the three and
six months ended June 30, 1998 for NQSOs and warrants granted during the six
months ended June 30, 1998.

F-14

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Outperform Stock Option Plan

In April 1998, the Company adopted an outperform stock option ("OSO")
program that was designed so that the Company's stockholders would receive a
market return on their investment before OSO holders receive any return on
their options. The Company believes that the OSO program aligns directly
management's and stockholders' interests by basing stock option value on the
Company's ability to outperform the market in general, as measured by the
Standard & Poor's ("S&P") 500 Index. Participants in the OSO program do not
realize any value from awards unless the Common Stock price outperforms the S&P
500 Index. When the stock price gain is greater than the corresponding gain on
the S&P 500 Index, the value received for awards under the OSO plan is based on
a formula involving a multiplier related to the level by which the Common Stock
outperforms the S&P 500 Index. To the extent that the Common Stock outperforms
the S&P 500, the value of OSOs to a holder may exceed the value of non-
qualified stock options.

OSO grants are made quarterly to participants employed on the date of the
grant. Each award vests in equal quarterly installments over two years and has
a four-year life. Each award typically has a two-year moratorium on exercising
from the date of grant. As a result, once a participant is 100% vested in the
grant, the two year moratorium expires. Therefore, each grant has an exercise
window of two years.

The fair value recognized under SFAS No. 123 for the 1,525,702 OSOs granted
to employees and consultants for services performed for the six months ended
June 30, 1999 was $96 million. The Company recognized $25 million and $39
million of compensation expense for the three and six months ended June 30,
1999 for OSOs granted in 1999 and 1998. In addition to the expense recognized,
$2 million and $3 million of non-cash compensation was capitalized for the
three and six months ended June 30, 1999 for employees directly involved in the
construction of the Internet Protocol network and development of business
support systems. The Company recognized $5 million of expense for the three and
six months ended June 30, 1998 for OSOs outstanding at June 30, 1998.

Shareworks and Restricted Stock

The Company recorded $2 million and $4 million of non-cash compensation
expense for the three and six months ended June 30, 1999 related to the
Shareworks and restricted stock programs adopted in the third quarter of 1998.

11. Stockholders' Equity

On March 9, 1999 the Company closed the offering of 28,750,000 shares of its
Common Stock through an underwritten public offering. The net proceeds from the
offering of approximately $1.5 billion after underwriting discounts and
offering expenses will be used for working capital, capital expenditures,
acquisitions and other general corporate purposes in connection with the
implementation of the Company's Business Plan.

12. Industry Data

In 1998, the Company adopted SFAS No. 131 "Disclosures about Segments of an
Enterprise and Related Information". SFAS No. 131 establishes standards for
reporting information about operating segments in annual financial statements
and requires selected information about operating segments in interim financial
reports issued to stockholders. Operating segments are components of an
enterprise for which separate financial information is available and which is
evaluated regularly by the Company's chief operating decision maker, or
decision making group, in deciding how to allocate resources and assess
performance. Operating segments are managed separately and represent strategic
business units that offer different products and serve different markets.

F-15

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The Company's reportable segments include: communications and information
services (including communications, computer outsourcing and systems
integration segments), and coal mining. Other primarily includes California
Private Transportation Company L.P. ("CPTC"), a privately owned tollroad in
southern California, equity investments and other corporate assets and overhead
not attributable to a specific segment.

Industry data for the Company's discontinued construction and energy
operations are not included.

EBITDA, as defined by the Company, consists of earnings (loss) before
interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization, non-cash operating expenses
(including stock-based compensation and in-process research and development
charges) and other non-operating income or expense. The Company excludes non-
cash compensation due to its adoption of the expense recognition provisions of
SFAS No. 123. EBITDA is commonly used in the communications industry to analyze
companies on the basis of operating performance. EBITDA is not intended to
represent cash flow for the periods.

The information presented in the table below includes information for the
three and six month periods ended June 30, 1999 and 1998 for all income
statement and cash flow information presented and as of June 30, 1999 and
December 31, 1998 for all balance sheet information presented.

Communications & Information Services
--------------------------------------
Computer Systems Coal
Communications Outsourcing Integration Mining Other Total
-------------- ----------- ----------- ------ ------ ------
(dollars in millions)

1999
- ----
Three Months Ended June
30, 1999
Revenue................. $ 18 $18 $ 17 $ 47 $ 6 $ 106
EBITDA.................. (99) 3 -- 19 (26) (103)
Capital Expenditures.... 744 2 1 -- 61 808
Depreciation and
Amortization........... 35 2 2 1 11 51
Six Months Ended June
30, 1999
Revenue................. $ 33 $34 $ 32 $ 98 $ 11 $ 208
EBITDA.................. (167) 7 (3) 39 (46) (170)
Capital Expenditures.... 1,118 5 1 -- 91 1,215
Depreciation and
Amortization........... 60 4 3 2 23 92
1998
- ----
Three Months Ended June
30, 1998
Revenue................. $ 6 $15 $ 15 $ 62 $ 5 $ 103
EBITDA.................. (29) 4 (3) 26 10 8
Capital Expenditures.... 97 4 1 1 23 126
Depreciation and
Amortization........... 5 2 -- 2 1 10
Six Months Ended June
30, 1998
Revenue................. $ 6 $30 $ 29 $115 $ 10 $ 190
EBITDA.................. (29) 8 (3) 46 (15) 7
Capital Expenditures.... 107 9 3 1 24 144
Depreciation and
Amortization........... 5 4 1 3 3 16
Identifiable Assets
- -------------------
June 30, 1999......... $2,292 $57 $ 48 $348 $4,605 $7,350
December 31, 1998..... 1,072 59 42 362 3,990 5,525

F-16

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following information provides a reconciliation of EBITDA to loss from
continuing operations for the three and six months ended June 30, 1999 and
1998:

Three Months Ended Six Months Ended
June 30, June 30,
-------------------- ------------------
1999 1998 1999 1998
--------- --------- -------- --------
(in millions)

EBITDA................................ $ (103) $ 8 $ (170) $ 7
Depreciation and Amortization
Expense.............................. (51) (10) (92) (16)
Non-Cash Compensation Expense......... (29) (9) (47) (11)
Write-off of In-Process Research and
Development.......................... -- (30) -- (30)
--------- -------- -------- -------
Loss from Operations................ (183) (41) (309) (50)
Other Income.......................... 116 5 90 5
Income Tax Benefit.................... 23 2 70 5
--------- -------- -------- -------
Loss from Continuing Operations....... $ (44) $ (34) $ (149) $ (40)
========= ======== ======== =======

13. Related Party Transactions

Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. ("Kiewit") acted as the general contractor on
several significant projects for the Company in 1999 and 1998. These projects
include the intercity network, local loops and gateway sites, the Company's new
corporate headquarters in Colorado and a new data center in Tempe, Arizona.
Kiewit provided approximately $490 million and $8 million of construction
services related to these projects in the first half of 1999 and 1998,
respectively.

In 1999, the Company entered into an agreement with RCN whereby RCN will
lease cross country capacity on Level 3's nationwide network. Revenue
attributable to this agreement was less than $1 million for the six months
ended June 30, 1999. Also in 1999, the Company and RCN announced that it had
reached joint construction agreements in several RCN markets, through which the
companies will share the cost of constructing their respective fiber optic
networks.

Level 3 also receives certain mine management services from Kiewit. The
expense for these services was $7 million and $14 million for the three and six
months ended June 30, 1999, respectively and $9 million and $17 million for the
three and six months ended June 30, 1998, respectively, and is recorded in
selling, general and administrative expenses.

14. Other Matters

Prior to the Split-off, as of January 1 of each year, holders of Class C
Stock had the right to convert Class C Stock into Class D Stock, subject to
certain conditions. In January 1998, holders of Class C Stock converted 2.3
million shares, with a redemption value of $122 million, into 21 million shares
of Class D Stock (now known as Common Stock).

The Company is involved in various lawsuits, claims and regulatory
proceedings incidental to its business. Management believes that any resulting
liability for legal proceedings beyond that provided should not materially
affect the Company's financial position, future results of operations or future
cash flows.

Level 3 filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission a "universal"
shelf registration statement covering up to $3.5 billion of common stock,
preferred stock, debt securities and depositary shares that became effective
February 17, 1999. On March 9, 1999 the Company sold 28.75 million shares, or
$1.5 billion of the $3.5 billion available under the "universal" shelf
registration statement, through a public offering.

F-17

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
Level 3 Communications, Inc.:

We have audited the consolidated balance sheet of Level 3 Communications, Inc.
and subsidiaries (a Delaware corporation) as of December 31, 1998 and the
related consolidated statements of earnings, cash flows, changes in
stockholders' equity and comprehensive income for the year then ended. These
consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial
statements based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of
material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence
supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit
also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant
estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial
statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis
for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in
all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Level 3
Communications, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 1998 and the
consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for the year then
ended in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.

/s/ Arthur Andersen LLP

Arthur Andersen LLP

Denver, Colorado
March 29, 1999

F-18

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS

The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Level 3 Communications, Inc. and Subsidiaries
(formerly, Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc.)

We have audited the consolidated balance sheet of Level 3 Communications, Inc.
and Subsidiaries (formerly, Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc.) as of December 27, 1997
and the related consolidated statements of earnings, cash flows, changes in
stockholders' equity and comprehensive income for each of the two years in the
period ended December 27, 1997. These financial statements are the
responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an
opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of
material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence
supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit
also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant
estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial
statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis
for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in
all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Level 3
Communications, Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 27, 1997 and the
consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the
two years in the period ended December 27, 1997 in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers, LLP

Coopers & Lybrand L.L.P.

Omaha, Nebraska
March 30, 1998

F-19

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF EARNINGS

For the three years ended December 31, 1998

1998 1997 1996
------ ----- -----
(dollars in
millions, except
per share data)

Revenue.................................................. $ 392 $ 332 $ 652
Cost and Expenses:
Operating expenses..................................... (199) (163) (268)
Depreciation and amortization.......................... (66) (20) (124)
General and administrative expenses.................... (332) (106) (173)
Write-off of in process research and development....... (30) -- --
------ ----- -----
Total costs and expenses............................. (627) (289) (565)
------ ----- -----
Earnings (Loss) from Operations.......................... (235) 43 87
Other Income (Expense):
Interest income........................................ 173 33 50
Interest expense, net.................................. (132) (15) (33)
Equity losses in unconsolidated subsidiaries........... (132) (43) (9)
Gain on equity investee stock transactions............. 62 -- --
Gain on sale of assets................................. 107 10 10
Other, net............................................. 4 7 2
------ ----- -----
Total other income (expense)......................... 82 (8) 20
------ ----- -----
Earnings (Loss) Before Income Taxes and Discontinued
Operations.............................................. (153) 35 107
Income Tax Benefit (Provision)........................... 25 48 (3)
------ ----- -----
Income (Loss) from Continuing Operations................. (128) 83 104
Discontinued Operations:
Gain on Split-off of Construction Group................ 608 -- --
Construction operations net of income tax expense of
($107) and ($72)...................................... -- 155 108
Gain on disposition of energy business net of income
tax expense of ($175)................................. 324 -- --
Energy, net of income tax benefit (expense) of $1 and
($9).................................................. -- 10 9
------ ----- -----
Income from discontinued operations.................... 932 165 117
------ ----- -----
Net Earnings............................................. $ 804 $ 248 $ 221
====== ===== =====
Earnings (Loss) Per Share of Level 3 Common Stock
(Basic and Diluted):
Continuing operations.................................. $ (.43) $ .33 $ .45
====== ===== =====
Discontinued operations excluding construction
operations............................................ $ 3.09 $ .04 $ .03
====== ===== =====
Net earnings excluding construction operations......... $ 2.66 $ .37 $ .48
====== ===== =====
Net earnings excluding gain on Split-off of
Construction Group.................................... $ .64 $ .37 $ .48
====== ===== =====

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-20

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997

1998 1997
------ ------
(dollars in
millions)

Assets
Current Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents..................................... $ 848 $ 87
Marketable securities......................................... 2,863 678
Restricted securities......................................... 26 22
Receivables, net.............................................. 57 42
Investment in discontinued operations--energy................. -- 643
Income taxes receivable....................................... 54 2
Other......................................................... 29 20
------ ------
Total Current Assets............................................ 3,877 1,494
Net Property, Plant and Equipment............................... 1,061 184
Investments..................................................... 323 383
Investments in Discontinued Operations--Construction............ -- 652
Other Assets, net............................................... 264 66
------ ------
$5,525 $2,779
====== ======
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity
Current Liabilities:
Accounts payable.............................................. $ 276 $ 31
Current portion of long-term debt............................. 5 3
Accrued reclamation and other mining costs.................... 16 19
Accrued interest.............................................. 33 2
Deferred income taxes......................................... 2 15
Other......................................................... 38 19
------ ------
Total Current Liabilities....................................... 370 89
Long-Term Debt, less current portion............................ 2,641 137
Deferred Income Taxes........................................... 86 83
Accrued Reclamation Costs....................................... 96 100
Other Liabilities............................................... 167 140
Commitments and Contingencies
Stockholders' Equity:
Preferred stock, $.01 par value, authorized 10,000,000 shares
in 1998, 250,000 shares in 1997: no shares outstanding in 1998
and 1997...................................................... -- --
Common stock:
Common stock, $.01 par value in 1998 and $.0625 par value in
1997, authorized 500,000,000 shares: 307,874,706 outstanding
in 1998 and 271,034,280 outstanding in 1997................. 3 8
Class B, no shares outstanding in 1997....................... -- --
Class C, 10,132,343 shares outstanding in 1997............... -- 1
Class R, $.01 par value, authorized 8,500,000 shares: no
shares outstanding in 1998 and 1997......................... -- --
Additional paid-in capital..................................... 765 427
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss).................. 4 (5)
Retained earnings.............................................. 1,393 1,799
------ ------
Total Stockholders' Equity...................................... 2,165 2,230
------ ------
$5,525 $2,779
====== ======

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-21

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

For the three years ended December 31, 1998

1998 1997 1996
------- ----- -----
(dollars in
millions)

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
Net Earnings.......................................... $ 804 $ 248 $ 221
Less: Income from Discontinued Operations............. (932) (165) (117)
------- ----- -----
Income (loss) from continuing operations.............. (128) 83 104
Adjustments to reconcile income (loss) from
continuing operations to net cash provided by
continuing operations:
Write-off in process research and development..... 30 -- --
Equity losses, net................................ 132 43 9
Depreciation and amortization..................... 66 20 124
Amortization of discounts on marketable
securities....................................... (24) -- --
Amortization of debt issuances costs.............. 3 -- --
Gain on sale of property, plant and equipment and
other assets..................................... (17) (10) (10)
Gain on equity investee's stock transactions...... (62) -- --
Gain on sale of Cable Michigan.................... (90) -- --
Compensation expense attributable to stock
awards........................................... 39 21 --
Federal income tax refunds........................ 46 146 --
Deferred income taxes............................. (50) (103) (68)
Accrued interest on marketable securities......... (39) -- --
Change in working capital items:
Receivables..................................... (1) (9) (1)
Other current assets............................ (10) (1) 6
Payables........................................ 239 (3) 9
Other liabilities............................... 39 (5) 13
Other............................................. (3) -- 3
------- ----- -----
Net Cash Provided by Continuing Operations.............. 170 182 189
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
Proceeds from sales and maturities of marketable
securities........................................... 3,214 167 378
Purchases of marketable securities.................... (5,334) (452) (311)
Purchases of restricted securities.................... (2) (2) (2)
Capital expenditures.................................. (910) (26) (117)
Investments and acquisitions, net of cash acquired.... (67) (42) (59)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment,
and other investments................................ 27 1 14
Proceeds from sale of Cable Michigan.................. 129 -- --
Other................................................. -- 3 (8)
------- ----- -----
Net Cash Used in Investing Activities................... $(2,943) $(351) $(105)

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-22

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS--(Continued)

For the three years ended December 31, 1998

1998 1997 1996
------ ----- -----
(dollars in
millions)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
Long-term debt borrowings, net of issuance costs....... $2,426 $ 17 $ 38
Payments on long-term debt, including current portion.. (12) (2) (60)
Issuances of common stock.............................. 21 117 --
Exchange of Class C Stock for Class D Stock, net....... 122 72 20
Stock options exercised................................ 11 21 --
Issuances of subsidiaries' stock....................... -- -- 1
Repurchases of common stock............................ (1) -- (11)
Dividends paid......................................... -- (12) (11)
------ ----- -----
Net Cash Provided by (Used in) Financing Activities...... 2,567 213 (23)
Cash Flows from Discontinued Operations:
Proceeds from sale of discontinued energy operations,
net of income tax payments of $192 million............ 967 -- --
Discontinued energy operations......................... -- 3 5
Investments in discontinued energy operations.......... -- (31) (282)
------ ----- -----
Net Cash Provided by (Used in) Discontinued Operations... 967 (28) (277)
Cash and Cash Equivalents of C-TEC at the Beginning of
1997.................................................... -- (76) --
------ ----- -----
Net Change in Cash and Cash Equivalents.................. 761 (60) (216)
Cash and Cash Equivalents at Beginning of Year........... 87 147 363
------ ----- -----
Cash and Cash Equivalents at End of Year................. $ 848 $ 87 $ 147
====== ===== =====
Supplemental Disclosure of Cash Flow Information:
Income taxes paid...................................... $ 246 $ 62 $ 55
Interest paid.......................................... 104 13 38
Noncash Investing and Financing Activities:
Issuances of stock for acquisitions:
XCOM Technologies, Inc. ............................. $ 154 $ -- $ --
GeoNet Communications, Inc. ......................... 19 -- --
Others............................................... 10 -- --
Conversion of MidAmerican convertible debentures to
common stock.......................................... $ -- $ -- $ 66

The activities of the Construction Group have been removed from the
consolidated statements of cash flows. The Construction Group had cash flows of
($62) million, $59 million and $79 million for the three months ended March 31,
1998 (the date of the Split-off) and fiscal 1997 and 1996, respectively.

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-23

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY

For the three years ended December 31, 1998

Accumulated
Class B&C Additional Other
Common Common Paid-in Comprehensive Retained
Stock Stock Capital Income (Loss) Earnings Total
--------- ------ ---------- ------------- -------- -------
(dollars in millions)

Balance at December 30,
1995................... $ 1 $ 1 $210 $ 11 $ 1,384 $ 1,607
Common Stock:
Issuances.............. -- -- -- -- -- --
Repurchases............ -- -- (1) -- (10) (11)
Dividends (a).......... -- -- -- -- (12) (12)
Class C Stock:
Issuances.............. -- -- 27 -- -- 27
Repurchases............ -- -- (1) -- (4) (5)
Dividends (a).......... -- -- -- -- (13) (13)
Net Earnings............ -- -- -- -- 221 221
Other Comprehensive
Income................. -- -- -- 5 -- 5
----- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------
Balance at December 28,
1996................... 1 1 235 16 1,566 1,819
Common Stock:
Issuances.............. -- -- 117 -- -- 117
Stock options
exercised............. -- -- 21 -- -- 21
Stock dividend......... -- 7 (7) -- -- --
Stock option grants.... -- -- 27 -- -- 27
Class C Stock:
Issuances.............. -- -- 33 -- -- 33
Repurchases............ -- -- -- -- (2) (2)
Dividends (b).......... -- -- -- -- (13) (13)
Conversion of
debentures............ -- -- 1 -- -- 1
Net Earnings............ -- -- -- -- 248 248
Other Comprehensive
Loss................... -- -- -- (21) -- (21)
----- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------
Balance at December 27,
1997................... 1 8 427 (5) 1,799 2,230
Common Stock:
Issuances.............. -- 1 203 -- -- 204
Stock options
exercised............. -- 1 10 -- (1) 10
Designation of par
value to $.01......... -- (8) 8 -- -- --
Stock dividend......... -- 1 (1) -- -- --
Stock plan grants...... -- -- 44 -- -- 44
Income tax benefit from
exercise of options... -- -- 19 -- -- 19
Class R Stock:
Issuance and forced
conversion............ -- -- 164 -- (164) --
Class C Stock:
Repurchases............ -- -- (25) -- -- (25)
Conversion of
debentures............ -- -- 10 -- -- 10
Net Earnings............ -- -- -- -- 804 804
Other Comprehensive
Loss................... -- -- -- (6) -- (6)
Split-off of the
Construction & Mining
Group.................. (1) -- (94) 15 (1,045) (1,125)
----- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------
Balance at December 31,
1998................... $ -- $ 3 $765 $ 4 $ 1,393 $ 2,165
===== ==== ==== ==== ======= =======

- --------
(a) Includes $.70 and $.05 per share for dividends on Class C and Common Stock,
respectively, declared in 1996 but paid in January 1997.

(b) Includes $.80 per share for dividends on Class C declared in 1997 but paid
in January 1998.

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-24

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

For the three years ended December 31, 1998

1998 1997 1996
---- ---- ----
(dollars in
millions)

Net Earnings................................................ $804 $248 $221
Other Comprehensive Income Before Tax:
Foreign currency translation adjustments.................. 1 -- (1)
Unrealized holding gains (losses) arising during period... (2) (23) 12
Reclassification adjustment for gains included in net
earnings................................................. (9) (9) (3)
---- ---- ----
Other Comprehensive Income (Loss), Before Tax............... (10) (32) 8
Income Tax Benefit (Expense) Related to Unrealized Holding
Gains (Losses)............................................. 4 11 (3)
---- ---- ----
Other Comprehensive Income (Loss) Net of Taxes.............. (6) (21) 5
---- ---- ----
Comprehensive Income........................................ $798 $227 $226
==== ==== ====

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

F-25

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(1) Reorganization--Discontinued Construction Operations

In October 1996, the Board of Directors (the "Board") of Level 3
Communications, Inc. ("Level 3" or the "Company"), directed management of the
Company to pursue a listing of the Company's Class D Diversified Group
Convertible Exchangeable Common Stock, par value $.0625 per share (the "Class D
Stock"), as a way to address certain issues created by the Company's then two-
class capital stock structure and the need to attract and retain the best
management for the Company's businesses. During the course of its examination
of the consequences of a listing of the Class D Stock, management concluded
that a listing of the Class D Stock would not adequately address these issues,
and instead began to study a separation of the construction operations
("Construction Group") from the other businesses of the Company (the
"Diversified Group"), thereby forming two independent companies. At the time,
the performance of the Diversified Group was reflected by the Class D Stock.
The performance of the Construction Group was reflected by the Company's Class
C Construction & Mining Group Restricted Redeemable Convertible Exchangeable
Common Stock, par value $.0625 per share (the "Class C Stock"). At the regular
meeting of the Board on July 23, 1997, management submitted to the Board for
consideration a proposal for the separation of the Construction Group and the
Diversified Group through a split-off of the Construction Group (the "Split-
off"). At a special meeting on August 14, 1997, the Board approved the Split-
off.

The separation of the Construction Group and the Diversified Group was
contingent upon a number of conditions, including the favorable ratification by
a majority of the holders of both the Company's Class C and the Class D Stock,
and the receipt by the Company of an Internal Revenue Service ruling or other
assurance acceptable to the Board that the separation would be tax-free to U.S.
stockholders. On December 8, 1997, the holders of Class C Stock and Class D
Stock approved the Split-off and on March 5, 1998, the Company received a
favorable private letter ruling from the Internal Revenue Service. The Split-
off was effected on March 31, 1998. In connection with the Split-off, (i) the
Company exchanged each outstanding share of Class C Stock for one share of
Common Stock of PKS Holdings, Inc. ("New PKS"), the Company formed to hold the
Construction Group, to which eight-tenths of a share of the Company's Class R
Convertible Common Stock, par value $.01 per share (the "Class R Stock"), was
attached to replace certain conversion features in the Class C Stock which
would terminate upon the Split-off (ii) New PKS was renamed "Peter Kiewit
Sons', Inc." (iii) the Company was renamed "Level 3 Communications, Inc.", and
(iv) the Class D Stock was designated as common stock, par value $.01 per share
(the "Common Stock"). As a result of the Split-off, the Company no longer owns
any interest in New PKS or the Construction Group. Accordingly, the separate
financial statements and management's discussion and analysis of financial
condition and results of operations of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. should be
obtained to review the financial position of the Construction Group as of
December 27, 1997, and the results of operations for the two years ended
December 27, 1997.

On March 31, 1998, the Company reflected the fair value of the Construction
Group as a distribution to the Class C stockholders because the distribution
was considered non-pro rata as compared to the Company's previous two-class
capital stock structure. The Company recognized, a gain of $608 million within
discontinued operations, equal to the difference between the carrying value of
the Construction Group and its fair value in accordance with Financial
Accounting Standards Board Emerging Issues Task Force Issue 96-4, "Accounting
for Reorganizations Involving a Non-Pro Rata Split-off of Certain Nonmonetary
Assets to Owners". No taxes were provided on this gain due to the tax-free
nature of the Split-off.

In connection with the Split-off, Level 3 and the Construction Group entered
into various agreements including a Separation Agreement, a Tax Sharing
Agreement and an amended Mine Management Agreement.

The Separation Agreement, as amended, provides for the allocation of certain
risks and responsibilities between Level 3 and the Construction Group and for
cross-indemnifications that are intended to allocate financial responsibility
to the Construction Group for liabilities arising out of the construction
business and to allocate to Level 3 financial responsibility for liabilities
arising out of the non-construction businesses.

F-26

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The Separation Agreement also allocates certain corporate-level risk exposures
not readily allocable to either the construction business or the non-
construction businesses.

Under the Tax Sharing Agreement, with respect to periods, or portions
thereof, ending on or before the Split-off, Level 3 and the Construction Group
generally will be responsible for paying the taxes relating to such returns,
including any subsequent adjustments resulting from the redetermination of such
tax liabilities by the applicable taxing authorities, that are allocable to the
non-construction businesses and construction businesses, respectively. The Tax
Sharing Agreement also provides that Level 3 and the Construction Group will
indemnify the other from certain taxes and expenses that would be assessed if
the Split-off were determined to be taxable, but solely to the extent that such
determination arose out of the breach by Level 3 or the Construction Group,
respectively, of certain representations made to the Internal Revenue Service
in connection with the private letter ruling issued with respect to the Split-
off. If the Split-off was determined to be taxable for any other reason, those
taxes would be allocated equally to Level 3 and the Construction Group.
Finally, under certain circumstances, Level 3 would make certain liquidated
damage payments to the Construction Group if the Split-off was determined to be
taxable, in order to indirectly compensate Class C stockholders for taxes
assessed upon them in that event.

In connection with the Split-off, the Mine Management Agreement, pursuant to
which the Construction Group provides mine management and related services to
Level 3's coal mining operations, was amended to provide the Construction Group
with a right of offer in the event that Level 3 were to determine to sell any
or all of its coal mining properties. Under the right of offer, Level 3 would
be required to offer to sell those properties to the Construction Group. If the
Construction Group were to decline to purchase the properties at that price,
Level 3 would be free to sell them to a third party for an amount greater than
or equal to that price. If Level 3 were to sell the properties to a third
party, thus terminating the Mine Management Agreement, it would be required to
pay the Construction Group an amount equal to the discounted present value of
the Mine Management Agreement determined, if necessary, by an appraisal
process.

Following the Split-off, the Company's common stock began trading on The
Nasdaq National Market on April 1, 1998, under the symbol "LVLT". In connection
with the Split-off, the construction business was renamed "Peter Kiewit Sons',
Inc." and the Class D Stock became the common stock of Level 3 Communications,
Inc. ("Common Stock"). Summarized financial information for the Construction
Group is presented below; however, the separate financial statements of Peter
Kiewit Sons', Inc. should be obtained to review the financial position of the
Construction Group as of December 27, 1997 and the results of operations for
each of the two years ended December 27, 1997.

The following is summarized financial information of the Construction Group:

Operations

1997 1996
------ ------
(in millions)

Revenue........................................................... $2,764 $2,303
Net Earnings...................................................... 155 108

F-27

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Financial Position

1997
-------------
(in millions)

Current Assets.................................................... $1,057
Other Assets...................................................... 284
------
Total assets.................................................... 1,341
Current Liabilities............................................... 579
Other Liabilities................................................. 99
Minority Interest................................................. 11
------
Total liabilities............................................... 689
------
Net Assets........................................................ $ 652
======

The following details the earnings per share calculations for Class C Stock:

Class C Stock 1997 1996
- ------------- ------- -------

Net Income Available to Common Shareholders (in millions).... $ 155 $ 108
Add: Interest Expense, Net of Tax Effect Associated with
Convertible Debentures...................................... 1 -- *
------- -------
Net Income for Diluted Shares................................ $ 156 $ 108
======= =======
Total Number of Weighted Average Shares Outstanding Used to
Compute Basic Earnings per Share (in thousands)............. 9,728 10,656
Additional Dilutive Shares Assuming Conversion of Convertible
Debentures.................................................. 441 437
------- -------
Total Number of Shares Used to Compute Diluted Earnings Per
Share....................................................... 10,169 11,093
======= =======
Net Income
Basic earnings per share................................... $ 15.99 $ 10.13
======= =======
Diluted earnings per share................................. $ 15.35 $ 9.76
======= =======

- --------
* Interest expense attributable to convertible debentures was less than $1
million in 1996.

The Company's certificate of incorporation gave stockholders the right to
exchange their Class C Stock for Class D Stock under a set conversion formula.
That right was eliminated as a result of the Split-off. To replace that
conversion right, Class C stockholders received 6.5 million shares of a new
Class R Stock in January 1998, which was convertible into Common Stock in
accordance with terms ratified by stockholders in December 1997. The Company
reflected in the equity accounts the exchange of the conversion right and
issuance of the Class R Stock at its fair value of $92 million at the date of
the Split-off.

On May 1, 1998, the Board of Directors of Level 3 Communications, Inc.
determined to force conversion of all shares of the Company's Class R Stock
into shares of Common Stock, effective May 15, 1998. The Class R Stock was
converted into Common Stock in accordance with the formula set forth in the
certificate of incorporation of the Company. The formula provided for a
conversion ratio equal to $25, divided by the average of the midpoints between
the high and low sales prices for Common Stock on each of the fifteen trading
days during the period beginning April 9, 1998 and ending April 30, 1998. The
average for that period was $32.14, adjusted for the stock dividend issued
August 10, 1998.

Accordingly, each holder of Class R Stock received .7778 of a share of
Common Stock for each share of Class R Stock held. In total 6.5 million shares
of Class R Stock were converted into 5.1 million shares of Common Stock. The
value of the Class R Stock at the time of the forced conversion was $25 times
the 6.5 million shares outstanding, or $164 million. The Company recognized the
additional $72 million of value upon conversion of the Class R Stock to Common
Stock in the equity

F-28

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

accounts. As a result of the forced conversion, certain adjustments were made
to the cost sharing and risk allocation provisions of the Separation Agreement
and Tax Sharing Agreement between the Company and Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. that
were executed in connection with the Split-off. The effect of these adjustments
was to reduce certain Split-off costs and risks allocated to the Company.

The Company has embarked on a plan to become a facilities-based provider
(that is, a provider that owns or leases a substantial portion of the plant,
property and equipment necessary to provide its services) of a broad range of
integrated communications services in the United States, Europe and Asia. To
reach this goal, the Company plans to expand substantially the business of its
PKS Information Services, Inc. subsidiary and to create, through a combination
of construction, purchase and leasing of facilities and other assets, an
international, end-to-end, facilities-based communications network (the
"Business Plan"). The Company is designing the network based on Internet
Protocol technology in order to leverage the efficiencies of this technology to
provide lower cost communications services.

(2) Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Principles of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Level 3
Communications, Inc. and subsidiaries in which it has control, which are
engaged in enterprises primarily related to communications and information
services, and coal mining. Fifty-percent-owned mining joint ventures are
consolidated on a pro rata basis. Investments in other companies in which the
Company exercises significant influence over operating and financial policies
are accounted for by the equity method. All significant intercompany accounts
and transactions have been eliminated.

In 1997, the Company agreed to sell its energy assets to MidAmerican Energy
Holding Company (f/k/a CalEnergy Company, Inc.) ("MidAmerican") and to split-
off the Construction Group. Therefore, the assets and liabilities, and results
of operations, of these businesses have been classified as discontinued
operations on the consolidated balance sheet, statements of earnings and cash
flows. (See notes 1 and 3)

In 1997, C-TEC Corporation ("C-TEC") announced that its board of directors
had approved the planned restructuring of C-TEC into three publicly traded
companies. The transaction was effective September 30, 1997. As a result of the
restructuring plan, the Company owned less than 50% of the outstanding shares
and voting rights of each entity, and therefore has accounted for each entity
using the equity method as of the beginning of 1997. In accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles, C-TEC's financial position, results
of operations and cash flows are consolidated in the 1996 financial statements.

Communications and Information Services Revenue

Information services revenue is primarily derived from the computer
outsourcing business and the systems integration business. Level 3 provides
outsourcing service, typically through contracts ranging from 3-5 years, to
firms that desire to focus their resources on their core businesses. Under
these contracts, Level 3 recognizes revenue in the month the service is
provided. The systems integration business helps customers define, develop and
implement cost-effective information systems. Revenue from these services is
recognized on a time and materials basis or percentage of completion basis
depending on the extent of the services provided.

Revenue from communications services is recognized monthly as the services
are provided. Amounts billed in advance of the service month are recorded as
deferred revenue, however that amount is not material.

F-29

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Concentration of credit risk with respect to accounts receivable are limited
due to the dispersion of customer base among geographic areas and remedies
provided by terms of contracts and statutes.

As noted previously, the investments in the three former C-TEC companies
have been accounted for using the equity method in 1998 and 1997.

Coal Sales Contracts

Level 3's coal is sold primarily under long-term contracts with electric
utilities, which burn coal in order to generate steam to produce electricity. A
substantial portion of Level 3's coal sales were made under long-term contracts
during 1998, 1997 and 1996. The remainder of Level 3's sales are made on the
spot market where prices are substantially lower than those in the long-term
contracts. As the long-term contracts expire, a higher proportion of Level 3's
sales will occur on the spot market.

The coal industry is highly competitive. Level 3 competes not only with
other domestic and foreign coal suppliers, some of whom are larger and have
greater capital resources than Level 3, but also with alternative methods of
generating electricity and alternative energy sources. Many of Level 3's
competitors are served by two railroads and, due to the competition, often
benefit from lower transportation costs than Level 3 which is served by a
single railroad. Additionally, many competitors have more favorable geological
conditions than Level 3, often resulting in lower comparative costs of
production.

Level 3 is also required to comply with various federal, state and local
laws concerning protection of the environment. Level 3 believes its compliance
with environmental protection and land restoration laws will not affect its
competitive position since its competitors are similarly affected by such laws.

Level 3 and its mining ventures have entered into various agreements with
its customers which stipulate delivery and payment terms on the sale of coal.
Prior to 1993, one of the primary customers deferred receipt of certain
commitments by purchasing undivided fractional interest in coal reserves of
Level 3 and the mining ventures. Under the agreements, revenue was recognized
when cash was received. The agreements with this customer were renegotiated in
1992. In accordance with the renegotiated agreements, there were no sales of
interest in coal reserves subsequent to January 1, 1993. Level 3 has delivered
and has the obligation to deliver the coal reserves to the customer in the
future if the customer exercises its option to take delivery of the coal. If
the option is exercised, Level 3 presently intends to deliver coal from
unaffiliated mines. In the opinion of the management, Level 3 has sufficient
coal reserves to cover the above sales commitments.

Level 3's coal sales contracts are with several electric utility and
industrial companies. In the event that these customers do not fulfill
contractual responsibilities, Level 3 would pursue the available legal
remedies.

Depreciation and Amortization

Property, plant and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation and
amortization for the majority of the Company's property, plant and equipment
are computed on accelerated and straight-line methods based on the following
useful lives:

Facility and Leasehold Improvements......................... 35 - 40 years
Operating Equipment......................................... 3 - 7 years
Network Construction Equipment.............................. 5 - 7 years
Furniture and Office Equipment.............................. 3 - 7 years
Other....................................................... 2 - 10 years

F-30

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Depletion of mineral properties is provided primarily on an units-of-
extraction basis determined in relation to coal committed under sales
contracts.

Software Development Costs

On March 4, 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
("AICPA") issued Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the Costs of
Computer Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use" ("SOP 98-1"). The
effective date of this pronouncement is for fiscal years beginning after
December 15, 1998, however, the Company has elected to account for internal
software development costs incurred in developing its integrated business
support systems in accordance with SOP 98-1 in 1998. The Company recognized
$27 million of expense for the development of operating support systems in 1998
that would have previously been capitalized prior to adoption of SOP 98-1.

Start-Up Costs

On April 3, 1998, the AICPA issued Statement of Position 98-5, "Reporting on
the Costs of Start-Up Activities", ("SOP 98-5"), which provides guidance on the
financial reporting for start-up and organization costs. It requires costs of
start-up activities and organization costs to be expensed as incurred. SOP 98-5
is effective for financial statements for fiscal years beginning after December
15, 1998, however, the Company elected to adopt SOP 98-5 in 1998. The adoption
of SOP 98-5 did not result in a significant charge to earnings in 1998.

Subsidiary and Investee Stock Activity

The Company recognizes gains and losses from the sale, issuance and
repurchase of stock by its subsidiaries and equity method investees in the
statements of earnings.

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share have been computed using the weighted average
number of shares during each period. Diluted earnings per share is computed by
including stock options and other securities considered to be dilutive.

Intangible Assets

Intangible assets primarily include amounts allocated upon acquisitions of
businesses, franchises and subscriber lists. These assets are amortized on a
straight-line basis over the expected period of benefit.

For intangibles originating from Internet Protocol or other information
services related acquisitions, the Company is amortizing these assets over a
five year period. Intangibles attributable to other acquisitions and
investments are amortized over periods which do not exceed 40 years.

Long Lived Assets

The Company reviews the carrying amount of long lived assets for impairment
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount
may not be recoverable. Measurement of any impairment would include a
comparison of estimated future operating cash flows anticipated to be generated
during the remaining life of the asset to the net carrying value of the asset.

F-31

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Reserves for Reclamation

The Company follows the policy of providing an accrual for reclamation of
mined properties, based on the estimated total cost of restoration of such
properties to meet compliance with laws governing strip mining, by applying
per-ton reclamation rates to coal mined. These reclamation rates are determined
using the remaining estimated reclamation costs and tons of coal committed
under sales contracts. The Company reviews its reclamation cost estimates
annually and revises the reclamation rates on a prospective basis, as
necessary.

Income Taxes

Deferred income taxes are provided for the temporary differences between the
financial reporting and tax bases of the Company's assets and liabilities using
enacted tax rates in effect for the year in which the differences are expected
to reverse.

Comprehensive Income

In June 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ("SFAS") No. 130, "Reporting
Comprehensive Income", which requires that changes in comprehensive income be
shown in a financial statement that is displayed with the same prominence as
other financial statements. The Company has adopted this statement in 1998 as
the Company has unrealized gains and losses on marketable securities classified
as available for sale and has operations in foreign countries and restated 1997
and 1996 to present information on a comparable basis.

Foreign Currencies

Generally, local currencies of foreign subsidiaries are the functional
currencies for financial reporting purposes. Assets and liabilities are
translated into U.S. dollars at year-end exchange rates. Revenue and expenses
are translated using average exchange rates prevailing during the year. Gains
or losses resulting from currency translation are recorded as a component of
accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) in stockholders' equity and in
the statements of comprehensive income.

Stock Dividend

Effective August 10, 1998 and December 26, 1997, the Company issued
dividends of one and four shares, respectively, of Common Stock (previously
Class D Stock) for each share of Level 3 Common Stock outstanding. All share
information and per share data have been restated to reflect these stock
dividends.

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and
disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

F-32

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Segment Disclosures

In 1997, the FASB issued SFAS No. 131, "Disclosures about Segments of an
Enterprise and Related Information" ("SFAS No. 131"), which changes the way
public companies report information about segments. SFAS No. 131, which is
based on the management approach to segment reporting, includes requirements
to report selected segment information quarterly, and entity wide disclosures
about products and services, major customers, and geographic data. The Company
has provided the information required by SFAS No. 131 in Note 14.

Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements

On June 15, 1998, the FASB issued SFAS No. 133, "Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities" ("SFAS No. 133"). SFAS No. 133 is
effective for fiscal years beginning after June 15, 1999 (January 1, 2000 for
the Company). SFAS No. 133 requires that all derivative instruments be
recorded on the balance sheet at the fair value. Changes in the fair value of
derivatives are recorded each period in current earnings or other
comprehensive income, depending on whether a derivative is designated as part
of a hedge transaction and, if it is, the type of hedge transaction. The
Company currently makes minimal use of derivative instruments as defined by
SFAS No. 133. If the Company does not increase the utilization of these
derivative instruments by the effective date of SFAS No. 133, the adoption of
this standard is not expected to have a significant effect on the Company's
results of operations or its financial position.

Fiscal Year

On May 1, 1998, the Company's Board of Directors changed Level 3's fiscal
year end from the last Saturday in December to a calendar year end. The
results of operations for the additional five days in the 1998 fiscal year are
reflected in the Company's Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 1998
and were not material to the overall results of operations and cash flows.
There were 52 weeks in fiscal years 1997 and 1996.

Reclassifications

Certain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the current
year presentation.

(3) Discontinued Energy Operations

On January 2, 1998, the Company completed the sale of its energy assets to
MidAmerican. These assets included approximately 20.2 million shares of
MidAmerican common stock (assuming the exercise of 1 million options held by
Level 3), Level 3's 30% interest in CE Electric and Level 3's investments in
international power projects in Indonesia and the Philippines ("Energy
Projects"). Level 3 recognized an after-tax gain on the disposition of $324
million and the after-tax proceeds of approximately $967 million from the
transaction are being used in part to fund the Business Plan. Results of
operations for the period through January 2, 1998 were not considered
significant and the gain on disposition was calculated using the carrying
amount of the energy assets as of December 27, 1997.

F-33

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following is summarized financial information for discontinued energy
operations for the fiscal years ended December 27, 1997 and December 28, 1996
and as of December 27, 1997:

Income from Discontinued Operations

1997 1996
------ ------
(in millions)

Operations
Equity in:
MidAmerican earnings, net..................................... $ 16 $ 20
CE Electric earnings, net..................................... 17 (2)
International energy projects earnings, net................... 5 (5)
Investment Income from MidAmerican.............................. -- 5
Income Tax Expense.............................................. (9) (9)
------ ------
Income from operations........................................ 29 9
MidAmerican Stock Transactions
Gain on Investee Stock Activity................................. 68 --
Income Tax Expense.............................................. (24) --
------ ------
Gain on MidAmerican stock activity............................ 44 --
Extraordinary Loss--Windfall Tax
Level 3's Share from MidAmerican................................ (39) --
Level 3's Share from CE Electric................................ (58) --
Income Tax Benefit.............................................. 34 --
------ ------
Extraordinary loss............................................ (63) --
------ ------
Income from Discontinued Energy Operations...................... $ 10 $ 9
====== ======

In order to fund the purchase of Level 3's energy assets, MidAmerican sold,
in 1997 approximately 19.1 million shares of its common stock at a price of
$37.875 per share. This sale reduced Level 3's ownership in MidAmerican to
approximately 24% but increased its proportionate share of MidAmerican's
equity. Level 3 recognized an after-tax gain of approximately $44 million from
MidAmerican transactions in 1997.

In 1997 the Labour Party in the United Kingdom implemented a "Windfall Tax"
against privatized British utilities. This one-time tax was 23% of the
difference between the value of Northern Electric, plc at the time of
privatization and the utility's current value based on profits over a period of
up to four years. CE Electric recorded an extraordinary charge of approximately
$194 million when the tax was enacted in 1997. The total impact to Level 3
directly through its investment in CE Electric and indirectly through its
interest in MidAmerican, was $63 million.

Investments in Discontinued Operations

1997
-------------
(in millions)

Investment in MidAmerican......................................... $ 337
Investment in CE Electric......................................... 135
Investment in International Energy Projects....................... 186
Restricted Securities............................................. 2
Deferred Income Tax Liability..................................... (17)
-----
Total........................................................... $ 643
=====

F-34

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following is summarized financial information of MidAmerican, CE
Electric, and the Energy Projects.

Operations

1997 1996
------- -----
(in millions)

Revenue
MidAmerican................................................... $ 2,271 $ 576
CE Electric................................................... 1,564 37

Net Earnings (Loss)
MidAmerican................................................... $ (84) $ 92
CE Electric................................................... (136) --
Energy Projects............................................... 2 (12)

Financial Position at December 27, 1997

Energy
MidAmerican CE Electric Projects
----------- ------------- --------
(in millions)

Current Assets............................... $ 2,053 $ 419 $ 530
Other Assets................................. 5,435 2,519 811
------- ------ ------
Total assets............................... 7,488 2,938 1,341

Current Liabilities.......................... 1,440 1,166 172
Other Liabilities............................ 4,494 1,265 737
Minority Interest............................ 134 56 --
------- ------ ------
Total liabilities.......................... 6,068 2,487 909
------- ------ ------
Net Assets................................... $ 1,420 $ 451 $ 432
======= ====== ======

(4) Earnings Per Share

The Company had a loss from continuing operations for the year ended
December 31, 1998, therefore, no potential common shares related to Company
stock options and other dilutive securities have been included in the
computation of the diluted earnings per share because the resulting computation
would be anti-dilutive. For the two years ending December 27, 1997, potentially
dilutive stock options are calculated in accordance with the treasury stock
method which assumes that proceeds from exercise of all options are used to
repurchase common stock at the average market value. The number of shares
remaining after the proceeds are exhausted represent the potentially dilutive
effect of the options.

The Company had 23,147,051 potentially dilutive securities outstanding that
were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because to
do so would have been anti-dilutive for the year ended December 31, 1998.

F-35

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following details the earnings (loss) per share calculations for Level 3
Common Stock. A calculation of the earnings per share for the Class C Stock in
1996 and 1997 can be found in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.

Year Ended
---------------------------
1998 1997 1996
-------- -------- --------

Earnings (Loss) from Continuing Operations (in
millions)........................................ $ (128) $ 83 $ 104
Earnings from Discontinued Energy Operations...... 324 10 9
Gain on Separation of Construction Operations..... 608 -- --
-------- -------- --------
Net Earnings Excluding Discontinued Construction
Operations....................................... $ 804 $ 93 $ 113
======== ======== ========
Total Number of Weighted Average Shares
Outstanding used to Compute Basic Earnings Per
Share (in thousands)............................. 301,976 249,293 232,012
Additional Dilutive Stock Options................. -- 1,079 622
-------- -------- --------
Total Number of Shares used to Compute Dilutive
Earnings Per Share............................... 301,976 250,372 232,634
======== ======== ========
Earnings (Loss) Per Share (Basic and Diluted):
Continuing operations........................... $ (.43) $ .33 $ .45
======== ======== ========
Discontinued energy operations.................. $ 1.07 $ .04 $ .03
======== ======== ========
Gain on split-off of discontinued construction
operations..................................... $ 2.02 $ -- $ --
======== ======== ========
Net earnings excluding discontinued construction
operations..................................... $ 2.66 $ .37 $ .48
======== ======== ========
Net earnings excluding gain on split-off of
construction operations........................ $ .64 $ .37 $ .48
======== ======== ========

(5) Acquisitions

In October 1998, the Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC") issued new
guidelines for valuing acquired research and development which are applied
retroactively. The Company believes its accounting for the acquisition was made
in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and established
appraisal practices at the time of the acquisition. However, due to the
significance of the charge relative to the total value of the acquisition, the
Company reviewed the facts and assumptions with the SEC. Consequently, using
the revised guidelines and assumptions,

F-36

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

the Company reduced the charge for in-process research and development from
$115 to $30 million, and increased the related goodwill by $85 million. The
goodwill associated with the XCOM transaction is being amortized over a five
year period.

XCOM's in-process research and development value is comprised primarily of
one project to develop an interface between an Internet Protocol based network
and the existing public switched telecommunications network. Remaining
development efforts for this project include various phases of design,
development and testing. The anticipated completion date for the project in
progress is expected to be over the next 12 months, at which time the Company
expects to begin generating the full economic benefits from the technology.
Funding for this project is expected to be obtained from internally generated
sources.

The value of the in-process research and development represents the
estimated fair value based on risk-adjusted cash flows related to the
incomplete project. At the date of acquisition, the development of this project
had not yet reached technological feasibility and the research and development
("R&D") in progress had no alternative future uses. Accordingly, these costs
were expensed as of the acquisition date.

The Company used independent third-party appraisers to assess and allocate
the value to the in-process research and development. The value assigned to the
asset was determined, using the income approach, by identifying significant
research projects for which technological feasibility had not been established.

The nature of the efforts to develop the acquired in-process technology into
commercially viable products and services principally relate to the completion
of all planning, designing, prototyping, high-volume verification, and testing
activities that are necessary to establish that the proposed technologies meet
their design specifications including functional, technical, and economic
performance requirements.

The value assigned to purchased in-process technology was determined by
estimating the contribution of the purchased in-process technology to
developing a commercially viable product, estimating the resulting net cash
flows from the expected product sales over a 15 year period, discounting the
net cash flows to their present value using a risk-adjusted discount rate of
30%, and adjusting it for the estimated stage of completion.

The Company believes that the foregoing assumptions used in the forecasts
were reasonable at the time of the acquisition. No assurance can be given,
however, that the underlying assumptions used to estimate expected project
sales, development costs or profitability, or the events associated with such
projects, will transpire as estimated. For these reasons, actual results may
vary from the projected results.

Management expects to continue their support of this effort and believes the
Company has a reasonable chance of successfully completing the R&D project.
However, there is risk associated with the completion of the project and there
is no assurance that it will meet with either technological or commercial
success. If the XCOM project is not successful, the Company would not realize
its investment in XCOM and would be required to modify its business plan to
utilize alternative technologies which may increase the cost of its network.

F-37

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

On September 30, 1998, Level 3 acquired GeoNet Communications, Inc.
("GeoNet"), a regional Internet service provider located in Northern
California. The Company issued approximately 0.6 million shares and options in
exchange for GeoNet's capital stock, which valued the transaction at
approximately $19 million. Acquired liabilities exceeded assets, and goodwill
of $21 million was recognized from this transaction which is being amortized
over five years.

XCOM's and GeoNet's 1997 and 1998 operating results prior to the
acquisitions were not significant relative to the Company's results.

For the Company's acquisitions, the excess purchase price over the fair
market value of the underlying assets was allocated to goodwill and other
intangible assets and property based upon preliminary estimates of fair value.
The Company does not believe that the final purchase price allocation will vary
significantly from the preliminary estimates.

(6) Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The following methods and assumptions were used to determine classification
and fair values of financial instruments:

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Cash equivalents generally consist of funds invested in highly liquid
instruments purchased with an original maturity of three months or less. The
securities are stated at cost, which approximates fair value.

Marketable and Restricted Securities

Level 3 has classified all marketable and restricted securities as
available-for-sale. Restricted securities primarily include investments in
mutual funds that are restricted to fund certain reclamation liabilities of its
coal mining ventures. The amortized cost of the securities used in computing
unrealized and realized gains and losses is determined by specific
identification. Fair values are estimated based on quoted market prices for the
securities on hand or for similar investments. Net unrealized holding gains and
losses are included in accumulated other comprehensive income within
stockholders' equity, net of tax.

F-38

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

At December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997 the amortized cost, unrealized
holding gains and losses, and estimated fair values of marketable and
restricted securities were as follows:

Unrealized Unrealized
Amortized Holding Holding Fair
Cost Gains Losses Value
--------- ---------- ---------- -------
(dollars in millions)

1998
Marketable Securities:
U.S. Treasury securities......... $ 2,147 $ 8 $ -- $ 2,155
U.S. Government Agency
securities...................... 639 1 -- 640
Equity securities................ 54 -- (3) 51
Other securities................. 20 -- (3) 17
------- ----- ----- -------
$ 2,860 $ 9 $ (6) $ 2,863
======= ===== ===== =======
Restricted Securities:
Wilmington Trust:
Intermediate term bond fund.... $ 13 $ -- $ -- $ 13
Equity fund.................... 10 3 -- 13
------- ----- ----- -------
$ 23 $ 3 $ -- $ 26
======= ===== ===== =======
1997
Marketable Securities:
Kiewit Mutual Fund:
Short-term government.......... $ 234 $ -- $ -- $ 234
Intermediate term bond......... 195 3 -- 198
Tax exempt..................... 154 3 -- 157
Equity......................... 7 4 -- 11
Equity securities................ 48 9 -- 57
Other securities................. 20 1 -- 21
------- ----- ----- -------
$ 658 $ 20 $ -- $ 678
======= ===== ===== =======
Restricted Securities:
Kiewit Mutual Fund:
Intermediate term bond......... $ 10 $ -- $ -- $ 10
Equity......................... 12 -- -- 12
------- ----- ----- -------
$ 22 $ -- $ -- $ 22
======= ===== ===== =======

For debt securities, amortized costs do not vary significantly from
principal amounts. Realized gains and losses on sales of marketable and equity
securities were $10 million and $1 million in 1998, $9 million and $-million in
1997, and $3 million and $- million in 1996, respectively.

F-39

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

At December 31, 1998, the contractual maturities of the debt securities are
as follows:

Amortized Fair
Cost Value
--------- -------
(dollars in
millions)

U.S. Treasury Securities:
Less than 1 year........................................ $ 2,147 $ 2,155
======= =======
U.S. Government Agency Securities:
Less than 1 year........................................ $ 639 $ 640
======= =======
Other Securities:
10+ years............................................... $ 20 $ 17
======= =======

Maturities for the equity and restricted securities have not been presented
as they do not have a single maturity date.

Long-Term Debt

The fair value of long-term debt was estimated using the Company's
incremental borrowing rates for debt of similar maturities.

The carrying amount and estimated fair values of Level 3's financial
instruments are as follows:

1998 1997
--------------- --------------
Carrying Fair Carrying Fair
Amount Value Amount Value
-------- ------ -------- -----
(dollars in millions)

Cash and Cash Equivalents (Note 6).......... $ 848 $ 848 $ 87 $ 87
Marketable Securities (Note 6).............. 2,863 2,863 678 678
Restricted Securities (Note 6).............. 26 26 22 22
Investment in C-TEC Entities (Note 8)....... 300 818 335 776
Investments in Discontinued Energy
Operations (Note 3)........................ -- -- 643 854
Long-term Debt (Note 10).................... 2,646 2,613 140 140

(7) Property, Plant and Equipment

Construction in Progress

The Company is currently constructing its communications network. Costs
associated directly with the uncompleted network and interest expense incurred
during construction are capitalized based on the weighted average accumulated
construction expenditures and the interest rates related to borrowings
associated with the construction. These costs are not yet being depreciated,
as the assets have not yet been placed in service. As segments of the network
become operational, the assets will be depreciated over their useful lives.

The Company is currently developing business support systems required for
its Business Plan. The external direct costs of software, materials and
services, payroll and payroll related expenses for employees directly
associated with the project and interest costs incurred when developing the
business support systems are capitalized. Upon completion of the projects, the
total cost of the business support systems will be amortized over its useful
life of 3 years.

F-40

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Capitalized business support systems and network construction costs that
have not been placed in service have been classified as construction-in-
progress within Property, Plant & Equipment below.

Accumulated Book
Cost Depreciation Value
------ ------------ ------
(dollars in millions)

1998
Land and Mineral Properties......................... $ 32 $ (11) $ 21
Facility and Leasehold Improvements
Communications.................................... 80 (1) 79
Information Services.............................. 24 (2) 22
Coal Mining....................................... 18 (15) 3
CPTC.............................................. 91 (5) 86
Operating Equipment
Communications.................................... 245 (18) 227
Information Services.............................. 53 (30) 23
Coal Mining....................................... 180 (155) 25
CPTC.............................................. 17 (4) 13
Network Construction Equipment...................... 46 (1) 45
Furniture and Office Equipment...................... 67 (10) 57
Other............................................... 32 (2) 30
Construction-in-Progress............................ 430 -- 430
------ ----- ------
$1,315 $(254) $1,061
====== ===== ======
1997
Land and Mineral Properties......................... $ 15 $ (11) $ 4
Facility and Leasehold Improvements
Communications.................................... -- -- --
Information Services.............................. 12 (2) 10
Coal Mining....................................... 19 (15) 4
CPTC.............................................. 91 (4) 87
Operating Equipment
Communications.................................... -- -- --
Information Services.............................. 42 (23) 19
Coal Mining....................................... 190 (159) 31
CPTC.............................................. 17 (3) 14
Furniture and Office Equipment...................... 11 (5) 6
Other............................................... 14 (6) 8
Construction-in-Progress............................ 1 -- 1
------ ----- ------
$ 412 $(228) $ 184
====== ===== ======

Depreciation expense was $48 million in 1998, $20 million in 1997 and $124
million in 1996.

(8) Investments

In 1997, C-TEC announced that its Board of Directors had approved the
planned restructuring of C-TEC into three publicly traded companies effective
September 30, 1997. Under the terms of the restructuring C-TEC stockholders
received stock in the following companies:

Commonwealth Telephone Enterprises, Inc ("Commonwealth Telephone")
containing the local telephone group and related engineering business.

F-41

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

RCN Corporation ("RCN") which consists of RCN Telecom Services; C-TEC,
existing cable systems in the Boston-Washington D.C. corridor; and the
investment in Megacable S.A. de C.V., a cable operator in Mexico. RCN
Telecom Services is a provider of packaged local and long distance
telephone, video and internet access services provided over fiber optic
networks to residential customers.

Cable Michigan, Inc. ("Cable Michigan") containing the cable television
operation.

As a result of the restructuring, Level 3 owned less than 50% of each of the
outstanding shares and voting rights of each entity, and therefore began
accounting for each entity using the equity method as of the beginning of 1997.

The following is summarized financial information of the Company had C-TEC
been accounted for utilizing the equity method for the fiscal year ended
December 28, 1996. Fiscal years 1998 and 1997 include C-TEC accounted for
utilizing the equity method and are presented here for comparative purposes
only.

1998 1997 1996
----- ----- -----
(dollars in
millions)

Revenue.................................................. $ 392 $ 332 $ 285
Costs and Expenses:
Operating expenses..................................... (199) (163) (125)
Depreciation and amortization.......................... (66) (20) (18)
General and administrative expenses.................... (332) (106) (86)
Write-off of in process research and development....... (30) -- --
----- ----- -----
Total costs and expenses............................. (627) (289) (229)
----- ----- -----
Earnings (Loss) from Operations.......................... (235) 43 56
Other Income (Expense):
Interest income........................................ 173 33 36
Interest expense....................................... (132) (15) (5)
Equity losses.......................................... (132) (43) (13)
Gain on investee stock transactions.................... 62 -- --
Gain on disposal of assets............................. 107 10 10
Other, net............................................. 4 7 9
----- ----- -----
Total other income (expense)......................... 82 (8) 37
----- ----- -----
Earnings (Loss) before Income Taxes and Discontinued
Operations.............................................. (153) 35 93
Income Tax Benefit....................................... 25 48 11
----- ----- -----
Income (Loss) from Continuing Operations................. (128) 83 104
Income from Discontinued Operations...................... 932 165 117
----- ----- -----
Net Earnings............................................. $ 804 $ 248 $ 221
===== ===== =====

On June 4, 1998, Cable Michigan announced that its Board of Directors had
reached a definitive agreement to sell the company to Avalon Cable of Michigan,
Inc. for $40.50 per share in a cash-for-stock transaction. Level 3 received
approximately $129 million when the transaction closed on November 6, 1998 and
recognized a pre-tax gain of approximately $90 million in the fourth quarter.
The $90 million gain was calculated using the Company's carrying value as of
September 30, 1998, as Cable Michigan's results of operations for the period
October 1, 1998 through November 6, 1998 were not considered significant
relative to the Company's results.

F-42

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

On September 25, 1998, Commonwealth Telephone announced that it was
commencing a rights offering of 3.7 million shares of its common stock. Under
the terms of the offering, each stockholder received one right for every five
shares of Commonwealth Telephone Common Stock or Commonwealth Telephone Class B
Common Stock held. The rights enabled the holder to purchase Commonwealth
Telephone Common Stock at a subscription price of $21.25 per share. Each right
also carried the right to oversubscribe at the subscription price for the
offered shares not purchased pursuant to the initial exercise of rights.

Level 3, which owned approximately 48% of Commonwealth Telephone prior to
the rights offering, exercised its 1.8 million rights it received with respect
to the shares it held for $38 million. As a result of subscriptions made by
other stockholders, Level 3 maintained its 48% ownership interest in
Commonwealth Telephone after the rights offering.

The following is summarized financial information of the three entities
created as a result of the C-TEC restructuring for each of the three years
ended December 31, 1998 and as of December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997 (in
millions):

Operations

Year Ended
-----------------
1998 1997 1996
----- ---- ----

Commonwealth Telephone Enterprises, Inc.:
Revenue................................................... $ 226 $197 $186
Net income available to common shareholders............... 8 20 20

Level 3's Share:
Net income................................................ 4 10 10
Goodwill amortization..................................... (2) (1) (1)
----- ---- ----
Equity in net income.................................... $ 2 $ 9 $ 9
===== ==== ====
RCN Corporation:
Revenue................................................... $ 211 $127 $105
Net loss available to common shareholders................. (205) (52) (6)

Level 3's Share:
Net loss.................................................. (91) (26) (3)
Goodwill amortization..................................... (1) -- (3)
----- ---- ----
Equity in net loss...................................... $ (92) $(26) $ (6)
===== ==== ====
Cable Michigan, Inc.*:
Revenue................................................... $ 66 $ 81 $ 76
Net loss available to common shareholders................. (9) (4) (8)

Level 3's Share*:
Net loss.................................................. (4) (2) (4)
Goodwill amortization..................................... (3) (4) (4)
----- ---- ----
Equity in net loss...................................... $ (7) $ (6) $ (8)
===== ==== ====

- --------
* 1998 revenue and net loss amounts are through September 30, 1998.

F-43

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Financial Position

Commonwealth Cable
Telephone RCN Michigan,
Enterprises, Inc. Corporation Inc.
----------------- ------------- ---------
1998 1997 1998 1997 1997
-------- -------- ------ ------ ---------

Current Assets.............. $ 79 $ 71 $1,092 $ 703 $ 23
Other Assets................ 354 303 816 448 120
-------- -------- ------ ------ ----
Total assets.............. 433 374 1,908 1,151 143
Current Liabilities......... 85 76 178 70 16
Other Liabilities........... 223 260 1,282 708 166
Minority Interest........... -- -- 77 16 15
-------- -------- ------ ------ ----
Total liabilities......... 308 336 1,537 794 197
-------- -------- ------ ------ ----
Net assets
(liabilities).......... $ 125 $ 38 $ 371 $ 357 $(54)
======== ======== ====== ====== ====
Level 3's Share:
Equity in net assets
(liabilities)............ $ 60 $ 18 $ 150 $ 173 $(26)
Goodwill.................. 56 57 34 41 72
-------- -------- ------ ------ ----
$116 $ 75 $ 184 $ 214 $ 46
======== ======== ====== ====== ====

The Company recognizes gains from the sale, issuance and repurchase of stock
by its subsidiaries and equity method investees in its statements of earnings.
During 1998, RCN issued stock in a public offering and for certain acquisitions
which diluted the Company's ownership of RCN from 48% at December 27, 1997 to
41% at December 31, 1998. The increase in the Company's proportionate share of
RCN's net assets as a result of these transactions resulted in a pre-tax gain
of $62 million for the Company in 1998.

The market value of the Company's investment in Commonwealth Telephone and
RCN on December 31, 1998, was $352 million, and $466 million, respectively,
based on the closing stock price of each company on December 31, 1998.

Investments also include $23 million for the Company's investment in an
office building in Aurora, Colorado.

(9) Other Assets

At December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997 other assets consisted of the
following:

1998 1997
----- ----
(in
millions)

Goodwill:
XCOM, net of accumulated amortization of $15................... $ 100 $--
GeoNet, net of accumulated amortization of $1.................. 20 --
Other, net of accumulated amortization of $1................... 21 --
Deferred Debt Issuance Costs..................................... 67 --
Deferred Development and Financing Costs......................... 15 21
Unrecovered Mine Development Costs............................... 15 16
Leases........................................................... 9 11
Timberlands...................................................... 6 7
Other............................................................ 11 11
----- ----
Total other assets............................................. $ 264 $ 66
===== ====

F-44

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Goodwill amortization expense, excluding amortization expense attributable
to equity method investees, was $18 million in 1998 and $- in 1997 and 1996.

(10) Long-Term Debt

At December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997, long-term debt was as follows:

1998 1997
------- ----
(dollars in
millions)

Senior Notes
(9.125% due 2008).............................................. $ 2,000 $--
Senior Discount Notes
(10.5% due 2008)............................................... 504 --

CPTC Long-term Debt (with recourse only to CPTC):
Bank Note
(7.6% due 2008)................................................ 64 65
Institutional Notes
(9.45% due 2017)............................................... 35 35
OCTA Debt
(9.0% due 2004)................................................ 9 8
Subordinated Debt
(9.3-9.5% no maturity)......................................... 8 6
------- ----
116 114
Other:
Pavilion Towers Debt (8.4% due 2007)........................... 15 15
Capitalized Leases............................................. 8 6
Other.......................................................... 3 5
------- ----
26 26
------- ----
Less current portion............................................. 2,646 140
(5) (3)
------- ----
$ 2,641 $137
======= ====

9 1/8% Senior Notes

On April 28, 1998, the Company received $1.94 billion of net proceeds from
an offering of $2 billion aggregate principal amount 9 1/8% Senior Notes Due
2008 ("Senior Notes"). Interest on the notes accrues at 9 1/8% per annum and
will be payable in cash semiannually in arrears.

The Senior Notes are subject to redemption at the option of the Company, in
whole or in part, at any time or from time to time on or after May 1, 2003,
plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon to the redemption date, if redeemed
during the twelve months beginning May 1, of the years indicated below:

Year Redemption Price
---- ----------------

2003..................................................... 104.563%
2004..................................................... 103.042%
2005..................................................... 101.521%
2006 and thereafter...................................... 100.000%

F-45

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

In addition, at any time or from time to time prior to May 1, 2001, the
Company may redeem up to 35% of the original aggregate principal amount of the
Senior Notes at a redemption price equal to 109.125% of the principal amount of
the Senior Notes so redeemed, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon to the
redemption date. The Senior Notes are senior, unsecured obligations of the
Company, ranking pari passu with all existing and future senior unsecured
indebtedness of the Company. The Senior Notes contain certain covenants, which
among other things, limit consolidated debt, dividend payments, and
transactions with affiliates. The Company is using the net proceeds of the
Senior Notes offering in connection with the implementation of its Business
Plan to increase substantially its information services business and to expand
the range of services it offers by building an advanced, international,
facilities-based communications network based on Internet Protocol technology.

Debt issuance costs of $65 million were capitalized and are being amortized
over the term of the Senior Notes.

10 1/2% Senior Discount Notes

On December 2, 1998, the Company sold $834 million principal amount of 10
1/2% Senior Discount Notes Due 2008 ("Senior Discount Notes"). The sales
proceeds of $500 million, excluding debt issuance costs, were recorded as long
term debt. Interest on Senior Discount Notes will accrete at a rate of 10 1/2%
per annum, compounded semiannually, to an aggregate principal amount of $834
million by December 1, 2003. Cash interest will not accrue on the Senior
Discount Notes prior to December 1, 2003; however, the Company may elect to
commence the accrual of cash interest on all outstanding Senior Discount Notes
on or after December 1, 2001, in which case the outstanding principal amount at
maturity of each Senior Discount Note will on the elected commencement date be
reduced to the accreted value of the Senior Discount Note as of that date and
cash interest shall be payable on that Note on June 1 and December 1
thereafter. Commencing June 1, 2004, interest on the Senior Discount Notes will
accrue at the rate of 10 1/2% per annum and will be payable in cash
semiannually in arrears.

The Senior Discount Notes will be subject to redemption at the option of the
Company, in whole or in part, at any time or from time to time on or after
December 1, 2003 at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages
of accreted value) plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon to the redemption
date, if redeemed during the twelve months beginning December 1, of the years
indicated below:

Year Redemption Price
---- ----------------

2003..................................................... 105.25%
2004..................................................... 103.50%
2005..................................................... 101.75%
2006 and thereafter ..................................... 100.00%

In addition, at any time or from time to time prior to December 1, 2001, the
Company may redeem up to 35% of the original aggregate principal amount at
maturity of the Notes at a redemption price equal to 110.50% of the accreted
value of the notes so redeemed, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon to the
redemption date. These notes are senior unsecured obligations of the Company,
ranking pari passu with all existing and future senior unsecured indebtedness
of the Company. The Senior Discount Notes contain certain covenants which,
among other things, restrict the Company's ability to incur additional debt,
make certain restricted payments, pay dividends, enter into sale and leaseback
transactions, enter into transactions with affiliates, and sell assets or merge
with another company

The net proceeds of $486 million are intended to be used to accelerate the
implementation of its Business Plan, primarily the funding for the increase in
committed number of route miles of the Company's U.S. intercity network.

F-46

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Debt issuance costs of $14 million have been capitalized and are being
amortized over the term of the Senior Discount Notes.

The Company capitalized $15 million of interest expense and amortized debt
issuance costs related to network construction and business systems development
projects for the year ended December 31, 1998.

CPTC:

In August 1996, California Private Transportation Company, L.P. ("CPTC")
converted its construction financing note into a term note with a consortium of
banks ("Bank Note"). The interest rate on the Bank Note is based on LIBOR plus
a varying rate with interest payable quarterly. Upon completion of the SR91
toll road, CPTC entered into an interest rate swap agreement with the same
parties. The swap agreement expires in January 2004 and fixes the interest rate
on the Bank Debt from 9.21% to 9.71% during the term of the swap agreement.

The institutional notes are held by Connecticut General Life Insurance
Company, a subsidiary of CIGNA Corporation and Lincoln National Life Insurance
Company. The note converted to a term loan upon completion of the SR91 toll
road.

Substantially all the assets of CPTC and the partners' equity interest in
CPTC secure the term debt.

Orange County Transportation Authority ("OCTA") holds $9 million of
subordinated debt which is due in varying amounts through 2004. Interest
accrues at 9% and is payable quarterly beginning when CPTC generates sufficient
cash flows to cover operating expenses and other debt requirements.

In July 1996, CPTC borrowed from the partners $2 million to facilitate the
completion of the project. In 1998 and 1997, CPTC borrowed an additional $2
million and $4 million, respectively, from the partners in order to comply with
equity maintenance provisions of the contracts with the State of California and
its lenders. The debt is generally subordinated to all other debt of CPTC.
Interest on the subordinated debt compounds annually at 9.3-9.5% and is payable
only as CPTC generates excess cash flows.

In 1996, CPTC capitalized $5 million of interest prior to completing
construction of the SR91 tollroad.

Other:

In June 1997, a mortgage loan was obtained from Metropolitan Life. The
Pavilion Towers building in Aurora, Colorado collateralizes this debt.

Scheduled maturities of long-term debt are as follows (in millions): 1999--
$5; 2000--$6; 2001--$6; 2002--$9; 2003--$9 and $2,611 thereafter.

(11) Employee Benefit Plans

The Company adopted the recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, "Accounting
for Stock Based Compensation" ("SFAS No. 123") in 1998. Under SFAS No. 123, the
fair value of an option (as computed in accordance with accepted option
valuation models) on the date of grant is amortized over the vesting periods of
the options in accordance with FASB Interpretation No. 28 "Accounting for Stock
Appreciation Rights and Other Variable Stock Option or Award Plans"("FIN 28").
The recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123 are applied prospectively upon
adoption. As a result, the recognition provisions are applied to all stock
awards granted in the year of adoption and are not applied to awards granted in
previous years unless those awards are modified or settled in cash after
adoption of the recognition provisions.

F-47

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The Company believes that the fair value method of accounting more
appropriately reflects the substance of the transaction between an entity that
issues stock options, or other stock-based instruments, and its employees and
consultants; that is, an entity has granted something of value to an employee
and consultants (the stock option or other instrument) generally in return for
their continued employment and services. The Company believes that the value of
the instrument granted to employees and consultants should be recognized in
financial statements because nonrecognition implies that either the instruments
have no value or that they are free to employees and consultants, neither of
which is an accurate reflection of the substance of the transaction. Although
the recognition of the value of the instruments results in compensation or
professional expenses in an entity's financial statements, the expense differs
from other compensation and professional expenses in that these charges will
not be settled in cash, but rather, generally, through issuance of common
stock.

The Company believes that the adoption of SFAS No. 123 will result in
material non-cash charges to operations in 1999 and thereafter. The amount of
the non-cash charge will be dependent upon a number of factors, including the
number of grants and the fair value of each grant estimated at the time of its
award. On a pro forma basis, adopting SFAS No. 123 would not have had a
material effect on the results of operations for the years ended December 27,
1997 and December 28, 1996.

Non-qualified Stock Options and Warrants

In December 1997, stockholders approved amendments to the 1995 Level 3 Stock
Plan ("the Plan"). The amended plan, among other things, increases the number
of shares reserved for issuance upon the exercise of stock based awards to
70,000,000; increases the maximum number of options granted to any one
participant to 10,000,000; provides for the acceleration of vesting in the
event of a change in control; allows for the grant of stock based awards to
directors of Level 3 and other persons providing services to Level 3; and
allows for the grant of nonqualified stock options ("NQSO") with an exercise
price less than the fair market value of Common Stock. In December 1997, Level
3 converted both option and stock appreciation rights plans of a subsidiary, to
the Plan. This conversion resulted in the issuance of 7.4 million options to
purchase Common Stock at $4.50 per share. Level 3 recognized an expense and a
corresponding increase in equity as a result of the transaction. The increase
in equity and the conversion of the stock appreciation rights liability to
equity are reflected as option activity in the Statement of Changes in
Stockholders' Equity. The options vest over three or five years with a five or
ten year life.

In addition to 7,466,247 NQSOs granted in 1998, 1,898,036 warrants were
granted to third parties to acquire shares of Common Stock at exercise prices
ranging from $18.50--$20.00 per share. The warrants vest quarterly through June
30, 2001.

The expense recognized in accordance with SFAS No. 123 for NQSOs and
warrants in 1998 was $6 million and $5 million, respectively. In addition to
the expense recognized, the Company capitalized $2 million of non-cash
compensation costs related to NQSOs for employees directly involved in the
construction of the Internet Protocol network and the development of the
business support systems.

The fair value of NQSOs and warrants granted was calculated using the Black-
Scholes method with a risk free interest rate of 5.5% and expected life of 75%
of the total life of the NQSOs and warrants. The Company used an expected
volatility rate of 25%, except for when the minimum volatility of .001% was
used by the Company prior to becoming publicly traded in April 1998. The fair
value of the NQSO and warrants granted in 1998, in accordance with SFAS No. 123
was $28 million.

The Company exchanged approximately 700,000 options and 100,000 options,
ranging in prices from $0.12 to $1.76 and primarily from $0.90 to $1.79 for the
XCOM and GeoNet acquisitions, respectively.

F-48

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Transactions involving stock options granted under the NQSO plan are
summarized as follows:

Weighted
Exercise Price Average
Shares Per Share Exercise Price
---------- -------------- --------------

Balance December 30, 1995............. 2,680,000 $ 4.04 $4.04
Options granted..................... 1,790,000 4.95 4.95
Options cancelled................... (30,000) 4.04 4.04
Options exercised................... -- -- --
---------- -------------- -----
Balance December 28, 1996............. 4,440,000 $4.04 --$ 4.95 $4.40
============== =====
Options granted..................... 14,990,930 $ 4.50--$ 5.42 $4.96
Options cancelled................... (106,000) 4.95 4.95
Options exercised................... (4,636,930) 4.04-- 4.95 4.46
----------
Balance December 27, 1997............. 14,688,000 $ 4.04--$ 5.42 $4.95
============== =====
Options granted..................... 7,466,247 $ 0.12--$41.25 $8.67
Options cancelled................... (668,849) 0.12-- 34.69 5.52
Options exercised................... (2,506,079) 0.12-- 34.69 4.22
----------
Balance December 31, 1998............. 18,979,319 $ 0.12--$41.25 $6.50
========== ============== =====
Options exercisable
December 28, 1996................... 530,000 $ 4.04 $4.04
December 27, 1997................... 2,590,538 $4.04--$ 4.95 $4.35
December 31, 1998................... 5,456,640 $0.12--$ 41.25 $4.67

The weighted average remaining contractual life for the 18,979,319 options
outstanding on December 31, 1998 is 8.47 years.

Options Outstanding Options Exercisable
-------------------------------------- -----------------------
Weighted Weighted
Number Average Average Number Weighted
Range of Outstanding Remaining Exercise Exercisable Average
Exercise as of Life Price as of Exercise
Prices 12/31/98 (years) Outstanding 12/31/98 Price
- -------------- ----------- --------- ----------- ----------- --------

$ 0.12--$ 0.12 187,036 9.04 $ 0.12 39,558 $ 0.12
0.90-- 0.90 34,764 6.26 0.90 21,230 0.90
1.76-- 1.79 78,010 8.50 1.77 19,060 1.79
4.04-- 5.43 12,965,014 8.51 5.04 5,331,448 4.71
6.20-- 8.50 4,875,600 9.06 6.98 45,100 6.82
17.50-- 25.03 272,374 4.62 19.42 -- --
26.80-- 39.13 500,521 4.48 31.37 244 34.69
40.38-- 41.25 66,000 4.62 40.59 -- --
---------- ---------
18,979,319 8.47 $ 6.50 5,456,640 $ 4.67
========== ==== ====== ========= ======

Outperform Stock Option Plan

F-49

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

("S&P") 500 Index. Participants in the OSO program do not realize any value
from awards unless the Common Stock price outperforms the S&P 500 Index. When
the stock price gain is greater than the corresponding gain on the S&P 500
Index, the value received for awards under the OSO plan is based on a formula
involving a multiplier related to the level by which the Common Stock
outperforms the S&P 500 Index. To the extent that the Common Stock outperforms
the S&P 500, the value of OSOs to a holder may exceed the value of non-
qualified stock options.

OSO grants are made quarterly to participants employed on the date of the
grant. Each award vests in equal quarterly installments over two years and has
a four-year life. Each award has a two-year moratorium on exercising. Once a
participant is 100% vested, the two year moratorium is lifted. Therefore, each
grant has an exercise window of two years.

The fair value and expense recognized under SFAS No. 123 for OSOs granted to
employees and consultants for services performed in 1998 was $64 million and
$24 million, respectively. In addition, $3 million was capitalized for
employees directly involved in the construction of the Internet Protocol
network and development of business support systems.

The fair value of the options granted was calculated by applying the Black-
Scholes method with an S&P 500 expected dividend yield rate of 1.8% and an
expected life of 2.5 years. The Company used a blended volatility rate of 24%
between the S&P 500 expected volatility rate of 16% and the Level 3 Common
Stock expected volatility rate of 25%. The expected correlation factor of 0.4
was used to measure the movement of Level 3 stock relative to the S&P 500.

Transactions involving stock awards granted in 1998 under the OSO plan are
summarized below:

Weighted
Average
Option Price Option
Shares Per Share Price
--------- -------------- --------

Options granted............................ 2,139,075 $29.78--$37.13 $34.28
Options cancelled.......................... (46,562) 29.78-- 37.13 35.53
Options exercised.......................... -- -- --
--------- -------------- ------
Balance December 31, 1998................ 2,092,513 $29.78--$37.13 $34.25
========= ============== ======
Options vested but not exercisable as of
December 31, 1998......................... 234,305 $29.78--$37.13 $34.85
========= ============== ======

The weighted average remaining contractual life for the 2,092,513 outperform
options outstanding on December 31, 1998 is 3.6 years.

Restricted Stock

In 1998, 177,183 shares of restricted stock were granted to employees. The
restricted stock shares are granted to employees at no cost. The shares vest
immediately; however, the employees are restricted from selling these shares
for 3 years. The fair value of restricted stock of $6 million was calculated
using the value of the Common Stock the day prior to the grant. The expense
recognized in 1998 under SFAS No. 123 for restricted stock grants was $3
million.

Shareworks--Level 3 has designed its compensation programs with particular
emphasis on equity-based, long-term incentive programs. The Company has
developed two plans under its Shareworks program: the Match Plan and the Grant
Plan.

F-50

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

Match Plan--The Match Plan allows eligible employees to defer between 1% and
7% of their eligible compensation to purchase Common Stock at the average stock
price for the quarter. Any full time employee is considered eligible on the
first day of the calendar quarter after their hire. The Company matches the
shares purchased by the employee on a one-for-one basis. Stock purchased with
payroll deductions is fully vested. Stock purchased with the Company's matching
contributions vests three years after the end of the quarter in which it was
made.

The Company's quarterly matching contribution is amortized over 36 months.
In 1998, the Company's matching contribution was $2 million under the Match
Plan. The compensation expense recognized in 1998 under this plan was less than
$1 million.

Grant Plan--The Grant Plan enables the Company to grant shares of Common
Stock to eligible employees based upon a percentage of that employee's eligible
salary up to a maximum of 3%. Level 3 employees on December 31 of each year,
who are age 21 or older with a minimum of 1,000 hours credited service are
considered eligible. The shares granted are valued at the fair market value as
of the last business day of the calendar year. All prior and future grants vest
immediately upon the employees' third anniversary of joining the Shareworks
Plan.

The annual grant is expensed in the year of the grant. Compensation expense
recorded for the Shareworks Grant Plan for 1998 was approximately $1 million.
In addition to the compensation expense recognized, the Company capitalized
less than $1 million of non-cash compensation costs related to the Shareworks
Plans for employees directly involved in the construction of the Internet
Protocol network and the development of the business support systems.

401(k) Plan

The Company and its subsidiaries offer its qualified employees the
opportunity to participate in a defined contribution retirement plan qualifying
under the provisions of Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Each
employee was eligible to contribute, on a tax deferred basis, a portion of
annual earnings not to exceed $10,000 in 1998. The Company does not match
employee contributions and therefore does not incur any expense related to the
401(k) plan.

(12) Income Taxes

An analysis of the income tax (provision) benefit attributable to earnings
(loss) from continuing operations before income taxes for the three years ended
December 31, 1998 follows:

1998 1997 1996
----- ----- -----
(dollars in
millions)

Current:
U.S. federal............................................. $ (15) $ (54) $ (61)
Foreign.................................................. -- -- (4)
State.................................................... (10) (1) (6)
----- ----- -----
(25) (55) (71)
Deferred:
U.S. federal............................................. 50 103 67
State.................................................... -- -- 1
----- ----- -----
50 103 68
----- ----- -----
$ 25 $ 48 $ (3)
===== ===== =====

F-51

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The United States and foreign components of earnings (loss) from continuing
operations before income taxes follows:

1998 1997 1996
------ ---- ----
(dollars in
millions)

United States................................................. $ (142) $ 35 $106
Foreign....................................................... (11) -- 1
------ ---- ----
$ (153) $ 35 $107
====== ==== ====

A reconciliation of the actual income tax (provision) benefit and the tax
computed by applying the U.S. federal rate (35%) to the earnings (loss) from
continuing operations, before income taxes for the three years ended December
31, 1998 follows:

1998 1997 1996
---- ----- ----
(dollars in
millions)

Computed Tax at Statutory Rate.............................. $ 53 $ (12) $(37)
State Income Taxes.......................................... (7) (1) (3)
Write-off of In Process Research & Development.............. (11) -- --
Coal Depletion.............................................. 2 3 3
Goodwill Amortization....................................... (5) -- (3)
Tax Exempt Interest......................................... -- 2 2
Prior Year Tax Adjustments.................................. -- 62 44
Compensation Expense Attributable to Options................ -- (7) --
Taxes on Unutilized Losses of Foreign Operations............ (4) -- (2)
Other....................................................... (3) 1 (7)
---- ----- ----
$ 25 $ 48 $ (3)
==== ===== ====

During the two years ended December 27, 1997, the Company settled a number
of disputed tax issues related to prior years that have been included in prior
year tax adjustments.

The components of the net deferred tax liabilities for the years ended
December 31, 1998 and December 27, 1997 were as follows:

1998 1997
------ ------
(dollars
in millions)

Deferred Tax Liabilities:
Investments in securities...................................... $ 2 $ 7
Investments in joint ventures.................................. 27 33
Asset bases--accumulated depreciation.......................... 83 53
Coal sales..................................................... 32 41
Other.......................................................... 20 16
------ ------
Total Deferred Tax Liabilities................................... 164 150

Deferred Tax Assets:
Compensation--and related benefits............................. 35 25
Investment in subsidiaries..................................... 14 8
Provision for estimated expenses............................... 14 7
Foreign and general business tax credits....................... -- 3
Other.......................................................... 13 9
------ ------
Total Deferred Tax Assets........................................ 76 52
------ ------
Net Deferred Tax Liabilities..................................... $ 88 $ 98
====== ======

F-52

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

(13) Stockholders' Equity

Issuances of Common Stock, for sales, conversions, option exercises and
acquisitions, and repurchases of common shares for the three years ended
December 31, 1998 are shown below. Prior to the Split-off, the Company was
obligated to repurchase Class D shares from stockholders. The Level 3 Stock
Plan permits option holders to tender shares to the Company to cover income
taxes due on option exercises.

December 30, 1995.................................................. 230,249,740
Shares Issued.................................................... --
Shares Repurchased............................................... (2,552,160)
Issuances for Class C Stock Conversions.......................... 4,104,850
-----------
December 28, 1996.................................................. 231,802,430
Shares Issued.................................................... 21,589,100
Shares Repurchased............................................... (29,610)
Issuances for Class C Stock Conversions.......................... 13,035,430
Option Activity.................................................. 4,636,930
-----------
December 27, 1997.................................................. 271,034,280
Shares Issued.................................................... 2,240,467
Shares Repurchased............................................... (30,506)
Issuances for Class C Stock Conversions.......................... 20,934,244
Issuances for Class R Stock Conversions.......................... 5,084,568
Option Activity.................................................. 2,506,079
Shares Issued for Acquisitions................................... 6,105,574
-----------
December 31, 1998.................................................. 307,874,706
===========

(14) Industry and Geographic Data

In the fourth quarter of 1998, the Company adopted SFAS No. 131 "Disclosures
about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information". SFAS No. 131
establishes standards for reporting information about operating segments in
annual financial statements and requires selected information about operating
segments in interim financial reports issued to stockholders. It also
establishes standards for disclosures about products and services and
geographic areas. Operating segments are components of an enterprise for which
separate financial information is available and which is evaluated regularly by
the Company's chief operating decision maker, or decision making group, in
deciding how to allocate resources and assess performance. Operating segments
are managed separately and represent strategic business units that offer
different products and serve different markets.

The Company's reportable segments include: communications and information
services (including communications, computer outsourcing and systems
integration segments), and coal mining. Other primarily includes CPTC, the C-
TEC investments and other corporate investments and overhead not attributable
to a specific segment.

Industry and geographic data for the Company's discontinued construction and
energy operations are not included.

EBITDA, as defined by the Company, consists of earnings (loss) before
interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization, non-cash operating expenses
(including stock-based compensation and

F-53

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

in-process research and development charges) and other non-operating income or
expense. The Company excludes non-cash compensation due to its adoption of the
expense recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123. EBITDA is commonly used in the
communications industry to analyze companies on the basis of operating
performance. EBITDA is not intended to represent cash flow for the periods.

In 1998, 1997, and 1996 Commonwealth Edison Company, a coal mining customer,
accounted for 34%, 43%, and 23% of Level 3's revenues.

Industry segment financial information follows. Certain prior year
information has been reclassified to conform with the 1998 presentation.

Communications & Information Services
------------------------------------------------
Computer Systems Coal
Communications Outsourcing Integration Mining Other Total
-------------- ----------- --------------------- ------ ------ ------
(dollars in millions)

1998
Revenue................. $ 24 $63 $ 57 $228 $ 20 $ 392
EBITDA.................. (139) 14 (23) 92 (44) (100)
Identifiable Assets..... 999 59 42 429 3,996 5,525
Capital Expenditures.... 818 25 4 2 61 910
Depreciation and
Amortization........... 37 8 3 5 13 66

1997
Revenue................. $ -- $50 $ 45 $222 $ 15 $ 332
EBITDA.................. -- 13 1 88 (18) 84
Identifiable Assets..... -- 42 19 499 924 1,484
Capital Expenditures.... -- 9 5 3 9 26
Depreciation and
Amortization........... -- 6 2 5 7 20

1996
Revenue................. $ -- $41 $ 1 $234 $ 376 $ 652
EBITDA.................. -- 12 (5) 103 101 211
Capital Expenditures.... -- 8 3 2 104 117
Depreciation and
Amortization........... -- 5 2 9 108 124

F-54

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following table presents a geographic breakout for revenue, EBITDA, and
identifiable assets:

1998
Revenue:
United States......... $ 23 $ 62 $ 56 $228 $ 20 $ 389
Other................. 1 1 1 -- -- 3
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ 24 $ 63 $ 57 $228 $ 20 $ 392
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
EBITDA:
United States......... $ (128) $ 14 $(23) $ 92 $ (44) $ (89)
Other................. (11) -- -- -- -- (11)
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ (139) $ 14 $(23) $ 92 $ (44) $ (100)
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
Identifiable Assets:
United States......... $ 886 $ 59 $ 42 $429 $3,996 $5,412
Other................. 113 -- -- -- -- 113
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ 999 $ 59 $ 42 $429 $3,996 $5,525
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
1997
Revenue:
United States......... $ -- $ 50 $ 45 $222 $ 15 $ 332
Other................. -- -- -- -- -- --
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ -- $ 50 $ 45 $222 $ 15 $ 332
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
EBITDA:
United States......... $ -- $ 13 $ 1 $ 88 $ (18) $ 84
Other................. -- -- -- -- -- --
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ -- $ 13 $ 1 $ 88 $ (18) $ 84
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
Identifiable Assets:
United States......... $ -- $ 42 $ 19 $499 $ 924 $1,484
Other................. -- -- -- -- -- --
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ -- $ 42 $ 19 $499 $ 924 $1,484
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
1996
Revenue:
United States......... $ -- $ 41 $ 1 $234 $ 376 $ 652
Other................. -- -- -- -- -- --
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ -- $ 41 $ 1 $234 $ 376 $ 652
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======
EBITDA:
United States......... $ -- $ 12 $ (5) $103 $ 101 $ 211
Other................. -- -- -- -- -- --
------ ---- ---- ---- ------ ------
$ -- $ 12 $ (5) $103 $ 101 $ 211
====== ==== ==== ==== ====== ======

F-55

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

The following information provides a reconciliation of EBITDA to income from
continuing operations for the three years ended December 31, 1998:

1998 1997 1996
----- ------------- -----
(in millions)

EBITDA............................................. $(100) $ 84 $ 211
Depreciation and Amortization Expense.............. (66) (20) (124)
Non-Cash Compensation Expense...................... (39) (21) --
Write-off of In Process Research and Development... (30) -- --
----- ---- -----
Earnings (Loss) from Operations.................. (235) 43 87
Other Income (Expense)............................. 82 (8) 20
Income Tax Benefit (Provision)..................... 25 48 (3)
----- ---- -----
Income (Loss) from Continuing Operations........... $(128) $ 83 $ 104
===== ==== =====

(15) Commitments and Contingencies

On March 23, 1998, the Company and Frontier Communications International,
Inc. ("Frontier") entered into an agreement ("Frontier Agreement") enabling the
Company to lease for a period of up to five years approximately 8,300 miles of
network capacity on Frontier's new 13,000 mile fiber optic, Internet Protocol
capable network, currently under construction. The leased network will
initially connect 15 of the larger cities across the United States. While
requiring an aggregate minimum payment of $165 million over its five-year term,
the Frontier Agreement does not impose monthly minimum consumption requirements
on the Company, allowing the Company to order, alter or terminate circuits as
it deems appropriate. The Company recognized $4 million of operating expenses
in the second half of 1998 as portions of the network became operational.

On April 2, 1998, the Company announced it had reached a definitive
agreement with Union Pacific Railroad Company ("Union Pacific") granting the
Company rights-of-way along Union Pacific's rail routes for construction of the
Company's North American intercity network. The Company expects that the Union
Pacific agreement will satisfy substantially all of its anticipated right-of-
way requirements west of the Mississippi River and approximately 50% of the
right-of-way requirements for its North American intercity network. The
agreement provides for initial fixed payments of up to $8 million to Union
Pacific upon execution of the agreement and throughout the construction period,
and recurring payments in the form of cash, communications capacity, and other
communications services based on the number of conduits that are operational
and certain construction obligations of the Company to provide fiber or conduit
connections for Union Pacific at the Company's incremental cost of
construction. In 1998, the Company recorded $9 million of payments made under
this agreement in network construction-in-progress.

On June 18, 1998, Level 3 selected Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. ("Kiewit") to
build the majority of its nearly 16,000 mile U.S. intercity communications
network. The overall cost of the project is estimated at $2 billion.
Construction of the network began in the third quarter of 1998 and is expected
to be completed during the first quarter of 2001. The contract provides that
Kiewit will be reimbursed for its costs relating to all direct and indirect
project level costs. In addition, Kiewit will have the opportunity to earn an
award fee that will be based on cost and speed of construction, quality, safety
and program management. The award fee will be determined by Level 3's
assessment of Kiewit's performance in each of these areas.

On June 23, 1998, the Company signed a master easement agreement with
Burlington Northern and Santa Fe Railway Company ("BNSF"). The agreement grants
Level 3 right-of-way access to

F-56

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

BNSF rail routes in as many as 28 states, over which to build its network.
Under the easement agreement, Level 3 will make annual payments to BNSF and
provide communications capacity to BNSF for its internal requirements. The
amount of the annual payments is dependent upon the number of conduits
installed, the number of conduits with fiber, and the number of miles of
conduit installed along BNSF's route.

On July 20, 1998, Level 3 entered into a network construction cost-sharing
agreement with INTERNEXT, LLC, a subsidiary of NEXTLINK Communications, Inc.
valued at $700 million. The agreement provides for INTERNEXT to acquire the
right to use conduits, fibers and certain associated facilities installed along
the entire route of Level 3's nearly 16,000 mile intercity fiber optic network
in the United States. INTERNEXT paid Level 3 $26 million in 1998 which was
deferred and included in other liabilities as of December 31, 1998 and will pay
the remaining balance as segments of the intercity network are completed. The
Company will recognize income as the segments of the network are completed and
accepted.

The network as provided to INTERNEXT will not include the necessary
electronics that allow the fiber to carry communications transmissions.
INTERNEXT will be restricted from selling or leasing fiber to unaffiliated
companies for four years following the date of the agreement. Also, under the
terms of the agreement, INTERNEXT has the right to an additional conduit for
its exclusive use and to share costs and capacity in certain future fiber cable
installations in Level 3 conduits.

On August 3, 1998, Level 3 and a group of other global telecommunications
companies entered into an agreement to construct an undersea cable system
connecting Japan and the United States by mid-year 2000. The parties to this
agreement are investing in excess of $1 billion to build the network, of which
Level 3 expects to contribute approximately $130 million. Each party will have
joint responsibility for the cost of network oversight, maintenance and
administration. The Company has recorded $24 million of costs associated with
this project in network construction-in-progress at December 31, 1998.

On October 14, 1998, Level 3 announced it signed an agreement with Global
Crossing Ltd. ("Global") for trans-oceanic capacity on Global Crossing's fiber
optic cable network. The agreement, covering 25 years and valued at
approximately $108 million, will provide Level 3 with as-needed dedicated
capacity across the Atlantic Ocean. Additionally, Level 3 will have the option
of utilizing capacity on other segments of Global's worldwide network. In 1998,
the Company recorded as network construction-in-progress, $32 million of costs
associated with this agreement.

On December 18, 1998 Level 3 announced an agreement with IXC Communications,
Inc. ("IXC") to lease capacity on IXC's network. The dedicated network will
enhance the Company's ability to offer a wide array of data and voice services
to a greater number of customers in key U.S. markets. The arrangement is unique
in that IXC will reserve the network for the exclusive use of Level 3, which
expects to begin running traffic across the network beginning in Spring 1999.
The Company paid IXC $40 million under this agreement in 1998 and recorded this
amount in property, plant and equipment.

Operating Leases

The Company is leasing rights of way, communications capacity and premises
under various operating leases which, in addition to rental payments, require
payments for insurance, maintenance, property taxes and other executory costs
related to the lease. Certain leases provide for adjustments in lease cost
based upon adjustments in the consumer price index and increases in the
landlord's management costs. The lease agreements have various expiration dates
through 2014.

F-57

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

In addition to the items described above, future minimum payments for the
next five years, under the non-cancelable operating leases with initial or
remaining terms of one year or more, consist of the following at December 31,
1998 (in millions):

1999................................................................. $ 35
2000................................................................. 34
2001................................................................. 31
2002................................................................. 24
2003................................................................. 24
Thereafter........................................................... 182
----
$330
====

Rent expense under lease agreements was $18 million in 1998, $1 million in
1997 and $3 million in 1996.

(16) Related Party Transactions

Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. acted as the general contractor on several projects
for the Company in 1998. These projects include the intercity network, local
loops and gateway sites, the Company's new corporate headquarters in Colorado
and a new data center in Tempe, Arizona. Kiewit provided approximately
$130 million of construction services related to these projects in 1998.

In 1999, the Company entered into an agreement with RCN whereby RCN will
lease cross country capacity on Level 3's nationwide network. Also in 1999, the
Company and RCN announced that it had reached joint construction agreements in
several RCN markets, through which the companies will share the cost of
constructing their respective fiber optic networks.

Level 3 also receives certain mine management services from Peter Kiewit
Sons', Inc. The expense for these services was $34 million for 1998, $32
million for 1997, and $37 million for 1996, and is recorded in general and
administrative expenses. The revenue earned by Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc. in 1997
and 1996 is included in discontinued operations.

(17) Other Matters

It is customary in Level 3's industries to use various financial instruments
in the normal course of business. These instruments include items such as
letters of credit. Letters of credit are conditional commitments issued on
behalf of Level 3 in accordance with specified terms and conditions. As of
December 31, 1998, Level 3 had outstanding letters of credit of approximately
$22 million. The Company does not believe it is practicable to estimate the
fair value of the letters of credit and does not believe exposure to loss is
likely.

F-58

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

(18) Subsequent Events

On January 5, 1999 Level 3 acquired BusinessNet Limited, a leading London-
based Internet service provider in a largely stock-for-stock transaction. The
Company granted approximately 400,000 shares of Common Stock and paid $1
million in cash in exchange for BusinessNet's capital stock. The transaction
was valued at approximately $18 million and will be accounted for as a
purchase.

Level 3 filed a "universal" shelf registration statement covering up to $3.5
billion of common stock, preferred stock, debt securities and depositary shares
that became effective February 17, 1999. On March 9, 1999 the Company sold
28.75 million shares through a primary offering. The net proceeds from the
offering of approximately $1.5 billion will be used for working capital,
capital expenditures, acquisitions and other general corporate purposes in
connection with the implementation of the Company's Business Plan.

On February 25, 1999 the Board approved an increase in the number of
authorized shares outstanding from 500 million to 1 billion. This is subject to
approval of the shareholders which will be voted on at the Company's 1999
Annual Meeting.

(19) Unaudited Quarterly Financial Data

March June September December
------------ -------------- ------------------ ---------------
1998 1997 1998 1997 1998 1997 1998 1997
------ ---- ------ ------ -------- -------- --------- ----
(in millions except per share data)

Revenue................. $ 87 $ 80 $ 103 $ 81 $ 106 $ 81 $ 96 $ 90
Earnings (Loss) from
Operations............. (9) 20 (41) 16 (52) 13 (133) (6)
Net Earnings (Loss)..... 926 35 (34) 56 (49) (10) (39) 167
Earnings (Loss) per
Share (Basic and
Diluted):
Continuing
Operations........... $ (.02) $.06 $ (.11) $.06 $(.16) $ .03 $(.13) $.18
Discontinued
Operations Excluding
Construction
Operations........... 3.19 .02 -- .03 -- (.21) -- .18
Net Earnings Excluding
Construction
Operations............. 3.17 .08 (.11) .09 (.16) (.18) (.13) .36
Net Earnings Excluding
Gains On Split-Off of
Construction Group..... 1.09 .08 (.11) .09 (.16) (.18) (.13) .36

Earnings (loss) per share was calculated for each three-month period on a
stand-alone basis. As a result of all the stock transactions, the sum of the
earnings (loss) per share for the four quarters of each year may not equal the
earnings (loss) per share for the twelve month periods.

The earnings (loss) per share amounts above are those of Level 3 Common
Stock.

On January 2, 1998 the Company completed the sale of its energy assets to
MidAmerican, as discussed in Note 3, and recognized an after-tax gain on the
disposition of $324 million.

On March 31, 1998, as a result of the Split-off as discussed in Note 1, the
Company recognized a gain of $608 million equal to the difference between the
carrying value of the Construction Group and its fair value in accordance with
Financial Accounting Standards Board Emerging Issues Task Force Issue 96-4. No
taxes were provided on this gain due to the tax-free nature of the Split-off.
The Company reflected the fair value of the Construction Group as a
distribution to the Class C stockholders.

F-59

LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS--(Continued)

As described in Note 5, the Company reduced its charge for acquired in-
process research and development related to its acquisition of XCOM, which was
originally recorded in the second quarter of 1998, from $115 million to $30
million, and increased the related goodwill $85 million. The unaudited
quarterly financial data above reflects that revision as if it occurred in the
second quarter of 1998. As a result, the amounts presented above differ from
those reported in the Company's 1998 Forms 10-Q for the second and third
quarters. Loss from operations, net loss and losses per share as reported in
the second quarter Form 10-Q were $123 million, $116 million and $0.39 per
share, respectively, a change of $82 million, $82 million and $0.28 per share,
respectively, from the information presented above due to the reduced charge
for in-process research and development and an increase in goodwill
amortization. Loss from operations, net loss and losses per share as reported
in the third quarter Form 10-Q were $48 million, $45 million and $0.15 per
share, respectively, a change of $4 million, $4 million and $0.01 per share,
respectively, from the information presented above due to an increase in
goodwill amortization.

F-60

Prospectus

Level 3 Communications, Inc.

Debt Securities
Preferred Stock
Depositary Shares
Common Stock

------------

We will provide specific terms of these securities and their offering prices
in supplements to this prospectus.

In the case of debt securities, these terms will include, as applicable, the
specific designation, aggregate principal amount, maturity, rate or formula of
interest, premium, terms for redemption. In the case of shares of preferred
stock, these terms will include, as applicable, the specific title and stated
value, any dividend, liquidation, redemption, conversion, voting and other
rights. In the case of depositary shares, these terms will include the
fractional share of preferred stock represented by each depositary share. In
the case of common stock, these terms will include the aggregate number of
shares offered.

We may sell any combination of these securities in one or more offerings up
to a total dollar amount of $3,500,000,000.

Our common stock is quoted on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol
LVLT. The closing price of our common stock on the Nasdaq National Market was
$55.00 per share on February 16, 1999. None of the other securities are
currently publicly traded.

You should read this prospectus and any prospectus supplement carefully
before you invest.

See "Risk Factors" on page 1 for a discussion of matters that you should
consider before investing in these securities.

------------

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities
commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or passed upon the
adequacy or accuracy of this prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is
a criminal offense.

The date of this prospectus is February 17, 1999.

Table of Contents

Page
----

About This Prospectus...................................................... 1
Where You Can Find More Information........................................ 1
Risk Factors............................................................... 1
The Company................................................................ 2
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividends........... 2
Application of Proceeds.................................................... 2
Description of Debt Securities............................................. 3
General terms of debt securities......................................... 3
Certificated securities.................................................. 4
Book-entry debt securities............................................... 4
Merger................................................................... 5
Events of default, notice and waiver..................................... 6
Modification of the indentures........................................... 7
Defeasance and covenant defeasance....................................... 9
Senior debt securities................................................... 10
Subordination of subordinated securities................................. 10
Definition of senior indebtedness........................................ 11
Convertible debt securities.............................................. 11
Description of Preferred Stock............................................. 12
General.................................................................. 12
Dividends................................................................ 13
Redemption............................................................... 14
Conversion or exchange rights............................................ 15
Rights upon liquidation.................................................. 15
Voting rights............................................................ 16
Description of Depositary Shares........................................... 17
General.................................................................. 17
Dividends and other distributions........................................ 17
Withdrawal of stock...................................................... 17
Redemption of depositary shares.......................................... 18
Voting the preferred stock............................................... 18
Exchange of preferred stock.............................................. 18
Conversion of preferred stock............................................ 19
Amendment and termination of the deposit agreement....................... 19
Charges of preferred stock depositary.................................... 19
Resignation and removal of depositary.................................... 19
Miscellaneous............................................................ 19
Description of Common Stock................................................ 20
Description of Outstanding Capital Stock................................... 20
Common stock............................................................. 20
Preferred stock.......................................................... 21
Anti-takeover provisions................................................. 21
Plan of Distribution....................................................... 22
By agents................................................................ 22
By underwriters.......................................................... 22
To dealers............................................................... 22
Direct sales............................................................. 22
Delayed delivery contracts............................................... 22
General information...................................................... 23
Legal Matters.............................................................. 23
Experts.................................................................... 23

About This Prospectus

This prospectus is part of a registration statement that we filed with the
SEC utilizing a shelf registration process. Under this shelf process, we may,
over the next two years, sell any combination of the securities described in
this prospectus in one or more offerings up to a total dollar amount of
$3,500,000,000 or the equivalent denominated in foreign currencies or units of
two or more foreign currencies. This prospectus provides you with a general
description of the securities we may offer. Each time we sell securities, we
will provide a prospectus supplement that will contain specific information
about the terms of that offering. The prospectus supplement may also add,
update or change information contained in this prospectus. You should read both
this prospectus and any prospectus supplement together with additional
information described under the heading "Where You Can Find More Information."

Where You Can Find More Information

We file annual, quarterly and special reports, proxy statements and other
information with the SEC. Our SEC filings are available to the public over the
Internet at the SEC's web site at http://www.sec.gov. You may also read and
copy any document we file at the SEC's public reference room at 450 Fifth
Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for
further information on the public reference room. Our SEC filings are also
available at the offices of the Nasdaq National Market, in Washington, D.C.

The SEC allows us to incorporate by reference the information we file with
them, which means that we can disclose important information to you by
referring you to those documents. The information incorporated by reference is
an important part of this prospectus, and information that we file later with
the SEC will automatically update and supersede this information. We
incorporate by reference our documents listed below and any future filings we
make with the SEC under Sections 13(a), 13(c), 14, or 15(d) of the Securities
Exchange Act until we sell all of the securities.

. Annual report on Form 10-K/A for the fiscal year ended December 27, 1997

. Quarterly reports on Form 10-Q for the quarters ended March 31, 1998,
June 30, 1998 and September 30, 1998

. Current reports on Form 8-K, filed June 9, 1998, September 1, 1998,
October 1, 1998, October 5, 1998, December 2, 1998 and December 7, 1998
and on Form 8-K/A, filed April 30, 1998 and February 17, 1999

. Registration statements on Forms 8-A/A filed March 31, 1998 and June 10,
1998

You may request a copy of these filings at no cost, by writing or
telephoning us at the following address:

Vice President, Investor Relations
Level 3 Communications, Inc.
1450 Infinite Drive
Louisville, CO 80027
303-926-3000

You should rely only on the information incorporated by reference or
provided in this prospectus or any prospectus supplement. We have not
authorized anyone else to provide you with different information. We are not
making an offer of these securities in any state where the offer is not
permitted. You should not assume that the information in this prospectus or any
prospectus supplement is accurate as of any date other than the date on the
front of those documents.

Risk Factors

Before you invest in our securities, you should carefully consider the risks
involved. These risks include, but are not limited to:
. the risks described in our current report on Form 8-K/A filed with the
SEC on February 17, 1999, which is incorporated by reference in this
prospectus; and

. any risks that may be described in other filings we make with the SEC or
in the prospectus supplements relating to specific offerings of
securities.

The Company

We engage in the information services, communications and coal mining
businesses through ownership of operating subsidiaries and substantial equity
positions in public companies. In late 1997, we announced a business plan to
increase substantially our information services business and to expand the
range of services we offer. We are implementing our business plan by building
an advanced communications network based on internet protocol technology.

Since late 1997, we have substantially increased the emphasis we place on
and the resources devoted to our communications and information services
business. We intend to become a facilities-based provider of a broad range of
integrated communications services. A facilities-based provider is one that
owns or leases a substantial portion of the plant, property and equipment
necessary to provide its services. To reach this goal, we plan to expand
substantially the business of our subsidiary PKS Information Services, Inc. and
to create our communications network. We will create this network through a
combination of construction, purchase and leasing of facilities and other
assets. We are designing our network based on internet protocol technology in
order to leverage the efficiencies of this technology to provide lower cost
communications services.

Our network will combine both local and long distance networks and will
connect customers end-to-end across the U.S. and in Europe and Asia. We expect
to complete the U.S. intercity portion of the network during the first quarter
of 2001. In the meantime, we have leased a national network over which we began
to offer services in the third quarter of 1998. We intend to provide a full
range of communications services--including local, long distance, international
and internet services.

Our principal executive offices are located at 3555 Farnam Street, Omaha,
Nebraska 68131 and our telephone number is (402) 536-3677. We are constructing
a new headquarters outside of Denver, Colorado, which we expect to begin
occupying during the summer of 1999.

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividends

The ratio of earnings to fixed charges for each of the periods indicated is
as follows:

Nine Months Ended
September 30, Fiscal Year Ended
------------------ -------------------------
1998 1997 1997 1996 1995 1994 1993
---------- ------- ---- ---- ---- ---- -----

-- 7.29 5.73 3.87 -- -- 20.94

For this ratio, earnings consist of earnings (loss) before income taxes,
minority interest and discontinued operations plus fixed charges excluding
capitalized interest. Fixed charges consist of interest expensed and
capitalized, plus the portion of rent expense under operating leases deemed by
us to be representative of the interest factor, plus, prior to September 30,
1995, preferred stock dividends on preferred stock of its former subsidiary,
MFS Communications Company, Inc. We had deficiencies of earnings to fixed
charges of $106 million for the nine months ended September 30, 1998, $32
million for 1995 and $42 million for 1994.

Application of Proceeds

Unless the applicable prospectus supplement states otherwise, the net
proceeds from the sale of the offered securities will be used for working
capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions and other general corporate
purposes. Until we use the net proceeds in this manner, we may temporarily use
them to make short-term investments or reduce short-term borrowings.

Description of Debt Securities

This section describes the general terms and provisions of the debt
securities. The applicable prospectus supplement will describe the specific
terms of the debt securities offered through that prospectus supplement as well
as any general terms described in this section that will not apply to those
debt securities.

The debt securities will be our direct unsecured general obligations and may
include debentures, notes, bonds and/or other evidences of indebtedness. The
debt securities will be either senior debt securities or subordinated debt
securities. The debt securities will be issued under one or more separate
indentures between us and IBJ Whitehall Bank & Trust Company, as trustee.
Senior debt securities will be issued under a senior indenture, and
subordinated debt securities will be issued under a subordinated indenture.
Together, the senior indentures and the subordinated indentures are called
indentures.

We have summarized selected provisions of the indentures below. The summary
is not complete. We have also filed the forms of the indentures as exhibits to
the registration statement. You should read the indentures for provisions that
may be important to you before you buy any debt securities.

General terms of debt securities

The debt securities issued under each indenture may be issued without limit
as to aggregate principal amount, in one or more series. Each indenture
provides that there may be more than one trustee under the indenture, each with
respect to one or more series of debt securities. Any trustee under either
indenture may resign or be removed with respect to one or more series of debt
securities issued under that indenture, and a successor trustee may be
appointed to act with respect to that series.

If two or more persons are acting as trustee with respect to different
series of debt securities issued under the same indenture, each of those
trustees will be a trustee of a trust under that indenture separate and apart
from the trust administered by any other trustee. In that case, except as
otherwise indicated in this prospectus, any action described in this prospectus
to be taken by the trustee may be taken by each of those trustees only with
respect to the one or more series of debt securities for which it is trustee.

A prospectus supplement relating to a series of debt securities being
offered will include specific terms relating to the offering and that series.
These terms will contain some or all of the following:

. the title of the debt securities;

. any limit on the aggregate principal amount of the debt securities;

. the purchase price of the debt securities, expressed as a percentage of
the principal amount;

. the date or dates on which the principal of and any premium on the debt
securities will be payable or the method for determining the date or
dates;

. if the debt securities will bear interest, the interest rate or rates or
the method by which the rate or rates will be determined;

. if the debt securities will bear interest, the date or dates from which
any interest will accrue, the interest payment dates on which any
interest will be payable, the record dates for those interest payment
dates and the basis upon which interest shall be calculated if other
than that of a 360 day year of twelve 30-day months;

. the place or places where payments on the debt securities will be made
and the debt securities may be surrendered for registration of transfer
or exchange;

. if we will have the option to redeem all or any portion of the debt
securities, the terms and conditions upon which the debt securities may
be redeemed;

. the terms and conditions of any sinking fund or other similar provisions
obligating us or permitting a holder to require us to redeem or purchase
all or any portion of the debt securities prior to final maturity;

. the currency or currencies in which the debt securities are denominated
and payable if other than U.S. dollars;

. whether the amount of any payments on the debt securities may be
determined with reference to an index, formula or other method and the
manner in which such amounts are to be determined;

. any additions or changes to the events of default in the respective
indentures;

. any additions or changes with respect to the other covenants in the
respective indentures;

. the terms and conditions, if any, upon which the debt securities may be
convertible into common stock or preferred stock;

. whether the debt securities will be issued in certificated or book-entry
form;

. whether the debt securities will be in registered or bearer form and, if
in registered form, the denominations of the debt securities if other
than $1,000 and multiples of $1,000;

. the applicability of the defeasance and covenant defeasance provisions
of the applicable indenture; and

. any other terms of the debt securities consistent with the provisions of
the applicable indenture.

Debt securities may be issued under the indentures as original issue
discount securities to be offered and sold at a substantial discount from their
stated principal amount. Special U.S. federal income tax, accounting and other
considerations applicable to original issue discount securities will be
described in the applicable prospectus supplement.

Unless otherwise provided with respect to a series of debt securities, the
debt securities will be issued only in registered form, without coupons, in
denominations of $1,000 and multiples of $1,000.

Certificated securities

Except as otherwise stated in the applicable prospectus supplement, debt
securities will not be issued in certificated form. If, however, debt
securities are to be issued in certificated form, no service charge will be
made for any transfer or exchange of any of those debt securities. We may
require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax or other governmental
charge payable in connection with the transfer or exchange of those debt
securities.

Book-entry debt securities

The debt securities of a series may be issued in whole or in part in the
form of one or more global securities that will be deposited with the
depositary identified in the applicable prospectus supplement. Unless it is
exchanged in whole or in part for debt securities in definitive form, a global
security may not be transferred. However, transfers of the whole security
between the depositary for that global security and its nominee or their
respective successors are permitted.

Unless otherwise stated, The Depository Trust Company, New York, New York
will act as depositary for each series of global securities. Beneficial
interests in global securities will be shown on, and transfers of global
securities will be effected only through, records maintained by DTC and its
participants.

DTC has provided the following information to us. DTC is a:

. limited-purpose trust company organized under the New York Banking Law;

. a banking organization within the meaning of the New York Banking Law;

. a member of the U.S. Federal Reserve System;

. a clearing corporation within the meaning of the New York Uniform
Commercial Code; and

. a clearing agency registered under the provisions of Section 17A of the
Securities Exchange Act.

DTC holds securities that its direct participants deposit with DTC. DTC also
facilitates the settlement among direct participants of securities
transactions, in deposited securities through electronic computerized book-
entry changes in the direct participant's accounts. This eliminates the need
for physical movement of securities certificates. Direct participants include
securities brokers and dealers, banks, trust companies, clearing corporations
and certain other organizations. DTC is owned by a number of its direct
participants and by the New York Stock Exchange, Inc., the American Stock
Exchange, Inc. and the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. Access
to DTC's book-entry system is also available to indirect participants such as
securities brokers and dealers, banks and trust companies that clear through or
maintain a custodial relationship with a direct participant. The rules
applicable to DTC and its direct and indirect participants are on file with the
SEC.

Principal and interest payments on global securities registered in the name
of DTC's nominee will be made in immediately available funds to DTC's nominee
as the registered owner of the global securities. We and the trustee will treat
DTC's nominee as the owner of the global securities for all other purposes as
well. Accordingly, we, the trustee and any paying agent will have no direct
responsibility or liability to pay amounts due on the global securities to
owners of beneficial interests in the global securities. It is DTC's current
practice, upon receipt of any payment of principal or interest, to credit
direct participants' accounts on the payment date according to their respective
holdings of beneficial interests in the global securities. These payments will
be the responsibility of the direct and indirect participants and not of DTC,
the trustee or us.

Debt securities represented by a global security will be exchangeable for
debt securities in definitive form of like amount and terms in authorized
denominations only if:

. DTC notifies us that it is unwilling or unable to continue as
depositary;

. DTC ceases to be a registered clearing agency and a successor depositary
is not appointed by us within 90 days; or

. we determine not to require all of the debt securities of a series to be
represented by a global security and notify the trustee of our decision.

Merger

We generally may consolidate with, or sell, lease or convey all or
substantially all of our assets to, or merge with or into, any other
corporation if:

. we are the continuing corporation; or

. we are not the continuing corporation, the successor corporation,
expressly assumes all payments on all the debt securities and the
performance and observance of all the covenants and conditions of the
applicable indenture; and

. neither we nor the successor corporation is in default immediately after
the transaction under the applicable indenture.

Events of default, notice and waiver

Senior indenture. The senior indenture provides that the following are
events of default with respect to any series of senior debt securities:

. default for 30 days in the payment of any interest on any debt security
of that series;

. default in the payment of the principal of or premium, if any, on any
debt security of that series at its maturity;

. default in making a sinking fund payment required for any debt security
of that series;

. default in the performance of any of our other covenants in the senior
indenture that continues for 60 days after written notice, other than
default in a covenant included in the senior indenture solely for the
benefit of another series of senior debt securities;

. the acceleration of the maturity of more than $25,000,000 in the
aggregate of any of our other indebtedness, where that indebtedness is
not discharged or that acceleration is not rescinded or annulled;

. certain events of bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization of us or our
property; and

. any other event of default provided with respect to a particular series
of debt securities.

The senior trustee generally may withhold notice to the holders of any
series of debt securities of any default with respect to that series if it
considers the withholding to be in the interest of those holders. However, the
senior trustee may not withhold notice of any default in the payment of the
principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on any debt security of that
series or in the payment of any sinking fund installment in respect of any debt
security of that series.

If an event of default with respect to any series of senior debt securities
occurs and is continuing, the senior trustee or the holders of not less than
25% in principal amount of the outstanding debt securities of that series may
declare the principal amount of all of the debt securities of that series
immediately due and payable. Subject to certain conditions, the holders of a
majority in principal amount of outstanding debt securities of that series may
rescind and annul that acceleration. However, they may only do so if all events
of default, other than the non-payment of accelerated principal or specified
portion of accelerated principal, with respect to debt securities of that
series have been cured or waived.

Holders of a majority in principal amount of any series of outstanding
senior debt securities may, subject to some limitations, waive any past default
with respect to that series and the consequences of the default. The prospectus
supplement relating to any series of senior debt securities which are original
issue discount securities will describe the particular provisions relating to
acceleration of a portion of the principal amount of those original issue
discount securities upon the occurrence and continuation of an event of
default. Within 120 days after the close of each fiscal year, we must file with
the senior trustee a statement, signed by specified of our officers, stating
whether those officers have knowledge of any default under the senior
indenture.

Except with respect to its duties in case of default, the senior trustee is
not obligated to exercise any of its rights or powers at the request or
direction of any holders of any series of outstanding senior debt securities,
unless those holders have offered the senior trustee reasonable security or
indemnity. Subject to those indemnification provisions and limitations
contained in the senior indenture, the holders of a majority in principal
amount of any series of the outstanding debt securities issued thereunder may
direct any proceeding for any remedy available to the senior trustee, or the
exercising of any of the senior trustee's trusts or powers.

Subordinated indenture. The subordinated indenture provides that the
following are events of default with respect to any series of subordinated debt
securities:

. default for 30 days in the payment of any interest on any debt security
of that series;

. default in the payment of the principal of or premium, if any, on any
debt security of that series at its maturity;

. default in making a sinking fund payment required for any debt security
of that series;

. any default in the performance of any of our other covenants in the
subordinated indenture that continues for 60 days after written notice,
other than default in a covenant included in the subordinated indenture
solely for the benefit of another series of subordinated debt
securities;

. the acceleration of more than $25,000,000, where that indebtedness is
not discharged or that acceleration is not rescinded or annulled;

. certain events relating to the bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization
of us or our property; and

. any other event of default provided with respect to a particular series
of debt securities.

The subordinated trustee generally may withhold notice to the holders of any
series of subordinated debt securities of any default with respect to that
series if it considers the withholding to be in the interest of the holders.
However, the subordinated trustee may not withhold notice of any default in the
payment of the principal of or premium, if any or interest on any debt security
of that series or in the payment of any sinking fund installment in respect of
any debt security of that series.

If an event of default with respect to any series of subordinated debt
securities occurs and is continuing, the subordinated trustee or the holders of
not less than 25% in principal amount of the outstanding debt securities of
that series may declare the principal amount of all of the debt securities of
that series immediately due and payable. Subject to certain conditions, the
holders of a majority in principal amount of outstanding debt securities of
that series may rescind and annul that acceleration. However, they may only do
so if all events of default with respect to debt securities of that series have
been cured or waived. Holders of a majority in principal amount of any series
of the outstanding subordinated debt securities may, subject to some
limitations, waive any past default with respect to that series and the
consequences of the default. The prospectus supplement relating to any series
of subordinated debt securities which are original issue discount securities
will describe the particular provisions relating to acceleration of a portion
of the principal amount of those original issue discount securities upon the
occurrence and continuation of an event of default. Within 120 days after the
close of each fiscal year, we must file with the subordinated trustee a
statement, signed by specified officers of us, stating whether such officers
have knowledge of any default under the subordinated indenture.

Except with respect to its duties in case of default, the subordinated
trustee is not obligated to exercise any of its rights or powers at the request
or direction of any holders of any series of outstanding subordinated debt
securities, unless those holders have offered the subordinated trustee
reasonable security or indemnity. Subject to those indemnification provisions
and limitations contained in the subordinated indenture, the holders of a
majority in principal amount of any series of the outstanding subordinated debt
securities may direct any proceeding for any remedy available to the
subordinated trustee, or the exercising of any of the subordinated trustee's
trusts or powers.

Modification of the indentures

Senior indenture. Modifications and amendments of the senior indenture may
be made only, subject to some exceptions, with the consent of the holders of a
majority in aggregate principal amount of all outstanding debt securities under
the senior indenture which are affected by the modification or amendment.

However, the holder of each affected senior debt security must consent to any
modification or amendment of the senior indenture that:

. changes the stated maturity of the principal of, or the premium, if any,
or any installment of interest on, that debt security;

. reduces the principal amount of, or the rate or amount of interest on,
or any premium payable on redemption of, that debt security;

. reduces the amount of principal of an original issue discount security
that would be due and payable upon declaration of acceleration of its
maturity or would be provable in bankruptcy;

. adversely affects any right of repayment of the holder of that debt
security;

. changes the place of payment where, or the currency in which, any
payment on that debt security is payable;

. impairs the right to institute suit to enforce any payment on or with
respect to that debt security; or

. reduces the percentage of outstanding debt securities of any series
necessary to modify or amend the senior indenture or to waive compliance
with some of its provisions or defaults and their consequences.

We and the senior trustee may amend the senior indenture without the consent
of the holders of any senior debt securities in certain limited circumstances,
such as:

. to evidence the succession of another entity to us and the assumption by
the successor of our covenants contained in the senior indenture;

. to secure the securities; and

. to cure any ambiguity, to correct or supplement any provision in the
senior indenture which may be inconsistent with any other provision of
the senior indenture.

Subordinated indenture. Modifications and amendments to the subordinated
indenture may be made only, subject to some exceptions, with the consent of the
holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of all outstanding debt
securities under the subordinated indenture which are affected by the
modification or amendment. However, the holder of each affected subordinated
debt security must consent to any modification or amendment of the subordinated
indenture that:

. changes the stated maturity of the principal of, or the premium, if any,
or any installment of interest on, that debt security;

. reduces the principal amount of, or the rate or amount of interest on,
or any premium payable on redemption of, that debt security;

. reduces the amount of principal of an original issue discount security
that would be due and payable upon declaration of acceleration of its
maturity or would be provable in bankruptcy;

. adversely affects any right of the repayment of the holder of that debt
security;

. changes the place of payment where, or the currency in which, any
payment on that debt security is payable;

. impairs the right to institute suit to enforce any payment on or with
respect to that debt security;

. reduces the percentage of outstanding debt securities of any series
necessary to modify or amend the subordinated indenture or to waive
compliance with some of its provisions or defaults and their
consequences; or

. subordinates the indebtedness evidenced by that debt security to any of
our indebtedness other than senior indebtedness.

We and the subordinated trustee also may amend the subordinated indenture
without the consent of the holders of any subordinated securities in certain
limited circumstances, such as:

. to evidence the succession of another entity to us and the assumption by
the successor of our covenants contained in the subordinated indenture;

. to secure the securities; and

. to cure any ambiguity, to correct or supplement any provision in the
subordinated indenture which may be inconsistent with any other
provision of the subordinated indenture.

Defeasance and covenant defeasance

When we establish a series of debt securities, we may provide that that
series is subject to the defeasance and discharge provisions of the applicable
indenture. If those provisions are made applicable, we may elect either:

. to defease and be discharged from, subject to some limitations, all of
our obligations with respect to those debt securities; or

. to be released from our obligations to comply with specified covenants
relating to those debt securities as described in the applicable
prospectus supplement.

To effect that defeasance or covenant defeasance, we must irrevocably
deposit in trust with the relevant trustee an amount in any combination of
funds or government obligations, which, through the payment of principal and
interest in accordance with their terms, will provide money sufficient to make
payments on those debt securities and any mandatory sinking fund or analogous
payments on those debt securities.

On such a defeasance, we will not be released from obligations:

. to pay additional amounts, if any, upon the occurrence of some events;

. to register the transfer or exchange of those debt securities;

. to replace some of those debt securities;

. to maintain an office relating to those debt securities;

. to hold moneys for payment in trust will not be discharged.

To establish such a trust we must, among other things, deliver to the
relevant trustee an opinion of counsel to the effect that the holders of those
debt securities:

. will not recognize income, gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax
purposes as a result of the defeasance or covenant defeasance; and

. will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on the same amounts, in the
same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if the
defeasance or covenant defeasance had not occurred. In the case of
defeasance, the opinion of counsel must be based upon a ruling of the
IRS or a change in applicable U.S. federal income tax law occurring
after the date of the applicable indenture.

Government obligations mean generally securities which are:

. direct obligations of the U.S. or of the government which issued the
foreign currency in which the debt securities of a particular series are
payable, in each case, where the issuer has pledged its full faith and
credit to pay the obligations; or

. obligations of an agency or instrumentality of the U.S. or of the
government which issued the foreign currency in which the debt
securities of that series are payable, the payment of which is
unconditionally guaranteed as a full faith and credit obligation by the
U.S. or that other government.

In any case, the issuer of government obligations cannot have the option
to call or redeem the obligations. In addition, government obligations
include, subject to certain qualifications, a depository receipt issued
by a bank or trust company as custodian with respect to any government
obligation or a specific payment of interest on or principal of any such
government obligation held by the custodian for the account of a
depository receipt holder.

If we effect covenant defeasance with respect to any debt securities, the
amount on deposit with the relevant trustee will be sufficient to pay amounts
due on the debt securities at the time of their stated maturity. However,
those debt securities may become due and payable prior to their stated
maturity if there is an event of default with respect to a covenant from which
we have not been released. In that event, the amount on deposit may not be
sufficient to pay all amounts due on the debt securities at the time of the
acceleration.

The applicable prospectus supplement may further describe the provisions,
if any, permitting defeasance or covenant defeasance, including any
modifications to the provisions described above.

Senior debt securities

Senior debt securities are to be issued under the senior indenture. Each
series of senior debt securities will constitute senior indebtedness and will
rank equally with each other series of senior debt securities and other senior
indebtedness. All subordinated debt, including, but not limited to, all
subordinated securities, will be subordinated to the senior debt securities
and other senior indebtedness.

Subordination of subordinated securities

Subordinated indenture. Payments on the subordinated securities will be
subordinated to our senior indebtedness, whether outstanding on the date of
the subordinated indenture or incurred after that date. At September 30, 1998,
after giving pro forma effect to our issuance on December 2, 1998 of 10 1/2%
senior discount notes due 2008, our aggregate senior indebtedness was
approximately $2,646,000,000. The applicable prospectus supplement for each
issuance of subordinated securities will specify the aggregate amount of our
outstanding indebtedness as of the most recent practicable date that would
rank senior to and equally with the offered subordinated securities.

Ranking. No class of subordinated securities is subordinated to any other
class of subordinated debt securities. See "Subordination provisions" below.

Subordination provisions. If any of certain specified events occur, the
holders of senior indebtedness must receive payment of the full amount due on
the senior indebtedness, or that payment must be duly provided for, before we
may make payments on the subordinated securities. These events are:

. any distribution of our assets upon our liquidation, reorganization or
other similar transaction except for a distribution in connection with a
merger or other transaction complying with the covenant described above
under "Merger";

. the occurrence and continuation of a payment default on any senior
indebtedness; or

. a declaration of the principal of any series of the subordinated
securities, or, in the case of original issue discount securities, the
portion of the principal amount specified under their terms, as due and
payable, that has not been rescinded and annulled.

However, if the event is the acceleration of any series of subordinated
securities, only the holders of senior indebtedness outstanding at the time of
the acceleration of those subordinated securities, or, in the case of original
issue discount securities, that portion of the principal amount

specified under their terms, must receive payment of the full amount due on
that senior indebtedness, or such payment must be duly provided for, before we
make payments on the subordinated securities.

As a result of the subordination provisions, some of our general creditors,
including holders of senior indebtedness, may recover more, ratably, than the
holders of the subordinated securities in the event of insolvency.

Definition of senior indebtedness

Senior indebtedness means the following indebtedness or obligations:

. the principal of and premium, if any, and unpaid interest on
indebtedness for money borrowed;

. purchase money and similar obligations;

. obligations under capital leases;

. guarantees, assumptions or purchase commitments relating to, or other
transactions as a result of which we are responsible for the payment of,
the indebtedness of others;

. renewals, extensions and refunding of that indebtedness;

. interest or obligations in respect of the indebtedness accruing after
the commencement of any insolvency or bankruptcy proceedings; and

. obligations associated with derivative products.

However, indebtedness or obligations are not senior indebtedness if the
instrument by which we become obligated for that indebtedness or those
obligations expressly provides that that indebtedness or those obligations are
junior in right of payment to any other of our indebtedness or obligations.

Convertible debt securities

Unless otherwise provided in the applicable prospectus supplement, the
following provisions will apply to debt securities that will be convertible
into common stock or preferred stock.

Conversion. The holder of unredeemed convertible debt securities may, at any
time during the period specified in the applicable prospectus supplement,
convert those convertible debt securities into shares of common stock or
preferred stock. The conversion price or rate for each $1,000 principal amount
of convertible debt securities will be specified in the applicable prospectus
supplement. The holder of a convertible debt security may convert a portion of
the convertible debt security which is $1,000 principal amount or any multiple
of $1,000. In the case of convertible debt securities called for redemption,
conversion rights will expire at the close of business on the date fixed for
the redemption. However, in the case of repayment at the option of the
applicable holder, conversion rights will terminate upon receipt of written
notice of the holder's exercise of that option.

In certain events, the conversion price or rate will be subject to
adjustment as specified in the applicable indenture. For debt securities
convertible into common stock, those events include:

. the issuance of shares of common stock as a dividend;

. subdivisions and combinations of common stock;

. the issuance to all holders of common stock of rights or warrants
entitling such holders for a period not exceeding 45 days to subscribe
for or purchase shares of common stock at a price per share less than
its current per share market price; and

. the distribution to all holders of common stock of:

(1) shares of our capital stock, other than common stock;

(2) evidences of our indebtedness or assets excluding cash dividends or
distributions paid from our retained earnings; or

(3) subscription rights or warrants other than those referred to above.

No adjustment of the conversion price or rate will be required in any of
these cases unless an adjustment would require a cumulative increase or
decrease of at least 1% in that price or rate. Fractional shares of common
stock will not be issued upon conversion. In place of fractional shares, we
will pay a cash adjustment. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable
prospectus supplement, convertible debt securities convertible into common
stock surrendered for conversion between any record date for an interest
payment and the related interest payment date must be accompanied by payment of
an amount equal to the interest payment on the surrendered convertible debt
security. However, that payment does not have to accompany convertible debt
securities surrendered for conversion if those convertible debt securities have
been called for redemption during that period.

The adjustment provisions for debt securities convertible into shares of
preferred stock will be determined at the time of an issuance of debt
securities and will be described in the applicable prospectus supplement.

Description of Preferred Stock

This section describes the general terms and provisions of our preferred
stock. The applicable prospectus supplement will describe the specific terms of
the preferred stock offered through that prospectus supplement as well as any
general terms described in this section that will not apply to those shares of
preferred stock.

We have summarized certain selected terms of the preferred stock in this
section. The summary is not complete. You should read our restated certificate
of incorporation that is an exhibit to our annual report on Form 10-K and the
certificate of designation relating to the applicable series of the preferred
stock that we will file with the SEC for additional information before you buy
any preferred stock.

General

Our restated certificate of incorporation and Delaware General Corporation
Law give our board of directors the authority, without further stockholder
action, to issue a maximum of 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock. The board
of directors has the authority to fix the following terms with respect to
shares of any series of preferred stock:

. the designation of the series;

. the number of shares to comprise the series;

. the dividend rate or rates payable with respect to the shares of the
series;

. the redemption price or prices, if any, and the terms and conditions of
any redemption;

. the voting rights;

. any sinking fund provisions for the redemption or purchase of the shares
of the series;

. the terms and conditions upon which the shares are convertible or
exchangeable, if they are convertible or exchangeable; and

. any other relative rights, preferences and limitations pertaining to the
series.

The preferred stock will have the rights described in this section unless
the applicable prospectus supplement provides otherwise. You should read the
prospectus supplement relating to the particular series of the preferred stock
it offers for specific terms, including:

. the designation, stated value and liquidation preference of that series
of the preferred stock and the number of shares offered;

. the initial public offering price at which the shares will be issued;

. the dividend rate or rates or method of calculation of dividends, the
dividend periods, the date or dates on which dividends will be payable
and whether such dividends will be cumulative or noncumulative and, if
cumulative, the dates from which dividends shall commence to cumulate;

. any redemption or sinking fund provisions;

. any conversion or exchange provisions;

. the procedures for any auction and remarketing, if any, of that series
of preferred stock;

. whether interests in that series of preferred stock will be represented
by our depositary shares; and

. any additional dividend, liquidation, redemption, sinking fund and other
rights, preferences, privileges, limitations and restrictions of that
series of preferred stock.

When we issue shares of preferred stock against payment for the shares, they
will be fully paid and nonassessable. This means that the full purchase price
for those shares will have been paid and the holders of those shares will not
be assessed any additional monies for those shares. Holders of preferred stock
will have no preemptive rights to subscribe for any additional securities that
we may issue.

Because we are a holding company, our rights and the rights of holders of
our securities, including the holders of preferred stock, to participate in the
distribution of assets of any subsidiary of ours upon its liquidation or
recapitalization will be subject to the prior claims of its creditors and
preferred stockholders. We will not be structurally subordinated to the extent
we are a creditor with recognized claims against the subsidiary or are a holder
of preferred stock of the subsidiary.

Dividends

The holders of the preferred stock will be entitled to receive dividends, if
declared by our board of directors out of our assets that we can legally use to
pay dividends. The prospectus supplement relating to a particular series of
preferred stock will describe the dividend rates and dates on which dividends
will be payable. The rates may be fixed or variable or both. If the dividend
rate is variable, the applicable prospectus supplement will describe the
formula used for determining the dividend rate for each dividend period. We
will pay dividends to the holders of record as they appear on our stock books
on the record dates fixed by our board of directors. The applicable prospectus
supplement will specify whether dividends will be paid in the form of cash,
preferred stock or common stock.

The applicable prospectus supplement will also state whether dividends on
any series of preferred stock are cumulative or noncumulative. If our board of
directors does not declare a dividend payable on a dividend payment date on any
noncumulative series of preferred stock, then the holders of that series will
not be entitled to receive a dividend for that dividend period. In those
circumstances, we will not be obligated to pay the dividend accrued for that
period, whether or not dividends on such preferred stock are declared or paid
on any future dividend payment dates.

Our board of directors may not declare and pay a dividend on any of our
stock ranking, as to dividends, equal with or junior to any series of preferred
stock unless full dividends on that series

have been declared and paid, or declared and sufficient money is set aside for
payment. Until either full dividends are paid, or are declared and payment is
set aside, on preferred stock ranking equal as to dividends, then:

. we will declare any dividends pro rata among the preferred stock of each
series and any preferred stock ranking equal to the preferred stock as
to dividends; in other words, the dividends we declare per share on each
series of such preferred stock will bear the same relationship to each
other that the full accrued dividends per share on each such series of
the preferred stock bear to each other;

. other than such pro rata dividends, we will not declare or pay any
dividends or declare or make any distributions upon any security ranking
junior to or equal with the preferred stock as to dividends or upon
liquidation, except dividends or distributions paid for with securities
ranking junior to the preferred stock as to dividends and upon
liquidation; and

. we will not redeem, purchase or otherwise acquire or set aside money for
a sinking fund for any securities ranking junior to or equal with the
preferred stock as to dividends or upon liquidation except by conversion
into or exchange for stock junior to the preferred stock as to dividends
and upon liquidation.

We will not owe any interest, or any money in lieu of interest, on any
dividend payment(s) on any series of the preferred stock which may be past due.

Redemption

Preferred stock may be redeemable, in whole or in part, at our option, and
may be subject to mandatory redemption through a sinking fund or otherwise, as
described in the applicable prospectus supplement. Redeemed preferred stock
will become authorized but unissued shares of preferred stock that we may issue
in the future.

If a series of preferred stock is subject to mandatory redemption, the
applicable prospectus supplement will specify the number of shares that we will
redeem each year and the redemption price. If preferred stock is redeemed, we
will pay all accrued and unpaid dividends on those shares to, but excluding,
the redemption date. In the case of any noncumulative series of preferred
stock, accrued and unpaid dividends will not include any accumulation of
dividends for prior dividend periods. The applicable prospectus supplement will
also specify whether we will pay the redemption price in cash or other
property. If the redemption price for preferred stock of any series is payable
only from the net proceeds of the issuance of our capital stock, the terms of
that preferred stock may provide for its automatic conversion upon the
occurrence of certain events. These events include if no capital stock has been
issued or if the net proceeds from any issuance are insufficient to pay in full
the aggregate redemption price then due.

If fewer than all of the outstanding shares of any series of the preferred
stock are to be redeemed, our board of directors will determine the number of
shares to be redeemed. We may redeem the shares pro rata from the holders of
record in proportion to the number of shares held by them, with adjustments to
avoid redemption of fractional shares, or by lot in a manner determined by our
board of directors.

Even though the terms of a series of preferred stock may permit redemption
of shares of preferred stock in whole or in part, if any dividends, including
accumulated dividends, on that series are past due:

. we will not redeem any preferred stock of that series unless we
simultaneously redeem all outstanding shares of preferred stock of that
series; and

. we will not purchase or otherwise acquire any preferred stock of that
series.

The prohibition discussed in the prior sentence will not prohibit us from
purchasing or acquiring preferred stock of that series through a purchase or
exchange offer if we make the offer on the same terms to all holders of that
series.

Unless the applicable prospectus supplement specifies otherwise, we will
give notice of a redemption by mailing a notice to each record holder of the
shares to be redeemed, between 30 to 60 days prior to the date fixed for
redemption. We will mail the notices to the holders' addresses as they appear
on our stock records. Each notice will state:

. the redemption date;

. the number of shares and the series of the preferred stock to be
redeemed;

. the redemption price;

. the place or places where holders can surrender the certificates for the
preferred stock for payment of the redemption price;

. that dividends on the shares to be redeemed will cease to accrue on the
redemption date; and

. the date when the holders' conversion rights, if any, will terminate.

If we redeem fewer than all shares of any series of the preferred stock held
by any holder, we will also specify the number of shares to be redeemed from
the holder in the notice.

If we have given notice of the redemption and have provided the funds for
the payment of the redemption price, then beginning on the redemption date:

. the dividends on the preferred stock called for redemption will no
longer accrue;

. such shares will no longer be considered outstanding; and

. the holders will no longer have any rights as stockholders except to
receive the redemption price.

When the holders of these shares surrender the certificates representing
these shares, in accordance with the notice, the redemption price described
above will be paid out of the funds we provide. If fewer than all the shares
represented by any certificate are redeemed, a new certificate will be issued
representing the unredeemed shares without cost to the holder of those shares.

Conversion or exchange rights

The prospectus supplement relating to a series of preferred stock that is
convertible or exchangeable will state the terms on which shares of that series
are convertible or exchangeable into common stock, another series of preferred
stock or debt securities.

Rights upon liquidation

Unless the applicable prospectus supplement states otherwise, if we
liquidate, dissolve or wind up our business, the holders of shares of each
series of the preferred stock will be entitled to receive:

. liquidation distributions in the amount stated in the applicable
prospectus supplement; and

. all accrued and unpaid dividends whether or not earned or declared.

We will pay these amounts to the holders of shares of each series of the
preferred stock, and all amounts owing on any preferred stock ranking equally
with that series of preferred stock as to liquidating distributions, out of our
assets available for distribution to stockholders. These payments will be made
before any distribution is made to holders of any securities ranking junior to
the series of preferred stock upon liquidation.

If we liquidate, dissolve or wind up our business and the assets available
for distribution to the holders of the preferred stock of any series and any
other shares of our stock ranking equal with that series as to liquidating
distributions are insufficient to pay all amounts to which the holders are
entitled, then we will only make pro rata distributions to the holders of all
shares ranking equal as to liquidating distributions. This means that the
distributions we pay to these holders will bear the same relationship to each
other that the full distributable amounts for which these holders are
respectively entitled upon liquidation of our business bear to each other.

After we pay the full amount of the liquidation distribution to which the
holders of a series of the preferred stock are entitled, those holders will
have no right or claim to any of our remaining assets.

Voting rights

Except as indicated below or in the applicable prospectus supplement, or
except as expressly required by applicable law, the holders of preferred stock
will not be entitled to vote.

If we fail to pay dividends on any shares of preferred stock for six
consecutive quarterly periods, the holders of those shares of preferred stock,
voting separately as a class with all other series of preferred stock upon
which the same voting rights have been conferred and are exercisable, will be
entitled to vote for the election of two additional directors to the board of
directors. This may be done at a special meeting called by the holders of
record of at least 10% of those shares of preferred stock or the next annual
meeting of stockholders and at each subsequent meeting until:

. in the case of a series of preferred stock with cumulative dividends,
all dividends accumulated on that series of preferred stock for the past
dividend periods and the then current dividend period have been fully
paid or declared and a sum sufficient for the payment of these dividends
has been set aside for payment; or

. in the case of a series of noncumulative preferred stock, four
consecutive quarterly dividends on that series of noncumulative
preferred stock have been fully paid or declared and a sum sufficient
for the payment of these dividends has been set aside for payment.

In this case, the entire board of directors will be increased by two
directors.

So long as any shares of preferred stock remain outstanding, unless we
receive the consent of the holders of any outstanding series of preferred stock
as specified below, we will not:

. authorize, issue or increase the authorized amount of, any capital stock
ranking prior to the outstanding series of preferred stock as to
dividends or liquidating distributions;

. reclassify any capital stock into any shares with this kind of prior
ranking;

. authorize or issue any obligation or security that represents the right
to purchase any capital stock with this kind of prior ranking; or

. amend or alter the provisions of our restated certificate of
incorporation, so as to materially and adversely affect any right,
preference, privilege or voting power of that series of preferred stock
or the holders of that series of preferred stock.

This consent must be given by the holders of at least two-thirds of each
series of all outstanding preferred stock described in the preceding sentence,
voting separately as a class. We will not be required to obtain this consent
with respect to the actions relating to changes to our restated certificate of
incorporation, however, if we only:

. increase the amount of the authorized preferred stock or any outstanding
series of preferred stock or any of our other capital stock; or

. create and issue another series of preferred stock or any other capital
stock; and

. in either case, this preferred stock ranks equal with or junior to the
outstanding preferred stock as to dividends and liquidating
distributions.

Description of Depositary Shares

This section describes the general-terms and provisions of shares of
preferred stock represented by depositary shares. The applicable prospectus
supplement will describe the specific terms of the depositary shares offered
through that prospectus supplement and any general terms outlined in this
section that will not apply to those depositary shares.

We have summarized in this section certain terms and provisions of the
deposit agreement, the depositary shares and the receipts representing
depositary shares. The summary is not complete. You should read the forms of
deposit agreement and depositary receipt that we have filed with the SEC for
additional information before you buy any depositary shares that represent
preferred stock of that series.

General

We may issue depositary receipts evidencing the depositary shares. Each
depositary share will represent a fraction of a share of preferred stock.
Shares of preferred stock of each class or series represented by depositary
shares will be deposited under a separate deposit agreement among us, the
preferred stock depositary and the holders of the depositary receipts. Subject
to the terms of the deposit agreement, each owner of a depositary receipt will
be entitled, in proportion to the fraction of a share of preferred stock
represented by the depositary shares evidenced by that depositary receipt, to
all the rights and preferences of the preferred stock represented by those
depositary shares. Those rights include any dividend, voting, conversion,
redemption and liquidation rights. Immediately following our issuance and
delivery of the preferred stock to the preferred stock depositary, we will
cause the preferred stock depositary to issue the depositary receipts on our
behalf.

Dividends and other distributions

The preferred stock depositary will distribute all dividends or other cash
distributions received in respect of the preferred stock to the record holders
of depositary receipts in proportion to the number of depositary receipts owned
by those holders.

If there is a distribution other than in cash, the preferred stock
depositary will distribute property it receives to the entitled record holders
of depositary receipts. However, if the preferred stock depositary determines
that it is not feasible to make that distribution, the preferred stock
depositary may, with our approval, sell the property and distribute the net
proceeds from this sale to the holders of depositary shares.

Withdrawal of stock

If a holder of depositary receipts surrenders the depositary receipts at the
corporate trust office of the preferred stock depositary, the holder will be
entitled to receive the number of shares of the preferred stock and any money
or other property represented by those depositary shares. However, the holder
will not be entitled to receive these shares and related assets if the related
depositary shares have previously been called for redemption or converted or
exchanged into other securities of our company. Holders of depositary receipts
will be entitled to receive whole or fractional shares of the preferred stock
on the basis of the proportion of preferred stock represented by each
depositary share specified in the applicable prospectus supplement. Holders of
shares of preferred stock received in exchange for depositary shares will no
longer be entitled to receive depositary shares in exchange for shares of
preferred stock. If the holder delivers depositary receipts evidencing a number
of depositary shares that is more than the number of depositary shares
representing the number of shares of preferred stock to be withdrawn, the
preferred stock depositary will issue the holder a new depositary receipt
evidencing this excess number of depositary shares at the same time.

Redemption of depositary shares

Whenever we redeem shares of preferred stock held by the preferred stock
depositary, the preferred stock depositary will redeem as of that redemption
date the number of depositary shares representing shares of the preferred stock
so redeemed. However, we must have paid in full the redemption price of the
preferred stock to be redeemed plus any accrued and unpaid dividends on the
preferred stock to the preferred stock depositary.

The redemption price per depositary share will be equal to the redemption
price and any other amounts per share payable with respect to the preferred
stock. If fewer than all the depositary shares are to be redeemed, the
depositary shares to be redeemed will be selected by the preferred stock
depositary pro rata or by lot or another equitable method. In each case, we
will determine the method for selecting the depositary shares.

After the date fixed for redemption, the depositary shares called for
redemption will no longer be outstanding. When the depositary shares are no
longer outstanding, all rights of the holders of the related depositary
receipts will cease, except the right to receive money or other property that
the holders of the depositary receipts were entitled to receive upon such
redemption. These payments will be made when the holders surrender their
depositary receipts to the preferred stock depositary.

Voting the preferred stock

Upon receipt of notice of any meeting at which the holders of the preferred
stock are entitled to vote, the preferred stock depositary will mail
information about the meeting contained in the notice to the record holders of
the depositary shares representing such preferred stock. Each record holder of
depositary shares on the record date will be entitled to instruct the preferred
stock depositary as to how the preferred stock underlying the holder's
depositary shares will be voted. The record date for the depositary shares will
be the same as the record date for the preferred stock.

The preferred stock depositary will vote the amount of preferred stock
represented by the depositary shares according to these instructions. We will
agree to take all reasonable action deemed necessary by the preferred stock
depositary in order to enable the preferred stock depositary to vote the
preferred stock in that manner. The preferred stock depositary will not vote
shares of preferred stock for which it does not receive specific instructions
from the holders of depositary shares representing that preferred stock. The
preferred stock depositary will not be responsible for any failure to carry out
any voting instruction, or for the manner or effect of any vote, as long as its
action or inaction is in good faith and does not result from its negligence or
willful misconduct.

Exchange of preferred stock

Whenever we exchange all of the shares of preferred stock held by the
preferred stock depositary for debt securities or common stock, the preferred
stock depositary will exchange as of that exchange date all depositary shares
representing all of the shares of the preferred stock exchanged for debt
securities or common stock. However, we must have issued and deposited with the
preferred stock depositary debt securities or common stock for all of the
shares of the preferred stock to be exchanged.

The exchange rate per depositary share will be equal to the exchange rate
per share of preferred stock, multiplied by the fraction of a share of
preferred stock represented by one depositary share, plus all money and other
property, if any, represented by such depositary shares, including all accrued
and unpaid dividends on the shares of preferred stock.

Conversion of preferred stock

The depositary shares, as such, are not convertible or exchangeable into
common stock or any of our other securities or property. Nevertheless, the
prospectus supplement relating to an offering of depositary shares may provide
that the holders of depositary receipts may surrender their depositary receipts
to the preferred stock depositary with written instructions to the preferred
stock depositary to instruct us to cause the conversion or exchange of the
preferred stock represented by these depositary shares. We have agreed that
upon receipt of these instructions and any related amounts payable we will
cause the requested conversion or exchange. If the depositary shares are to be
converted or exchanged in part only, a new depositary receipt or receipts will
be issued for any depositary shares not to be converted or exchanged.

Amendment and termination of the deposit agreement

The form of depositary receipt evidencing the depositary shares and any
provision of the deposit agreement may be amended by agreement between us and
the preferred stock depositary. However, any amendment that materially and
adversely alters the rights of the holders of depositary shares or that would
be materially and adversely inconsistent with the rights granted to the holders
of the related preferred stock requires the approval of the holders of at least
two thirds of the depositary shares then outstanding.

We may terminate the deposit agreement upon not less than 60 days' notice if
holders of a majority of the depository shares then outstanding consent. If we
terminate the deposit agreement, the preferred stock depositary will deliver or
make available to each holder of depositary receipts that surrenders the
depositary receipts it holds, the number of whole or fractional shares of
preferred stock represented by the depositary shares evidenced by these
depositary receipts.

In addition, the deposit agreement will automatically terminate if:

. all outstanding depositary shares are redeemed, converted or exchanged;
or

. there is a final distribution in respect of the related preferred stock
in connection with any liquidation of our business and the distribution
has been distributed to the holders of the related depositary receipts.

Charges of preferred stock depositary

We will pay all transfer and other taxes and governmental charges arising
solely from the existence of the deposit agreement. In addition, we will pay
the fees and expenses of the preferred stock depositary in connection with the
performance of its duties under the deposit agreement. Holders of depositary
receipts will pay transfer and other taxes and governmental charges and any
other charges that are stated to be their responsibility in the deposit
agreement.

Resignation and removal of depositary

The preferred stock depositary may resign at any time by delivering notice
to us. We also may remove the preferred stock depositary at any time.
Resignations or removals will take effect upon the appointment of a successor
preferred stock depositary. This successor must be appointed within 60 days
after delivery of the notice of resignation or removal and must be a bank or
trust company having its principal office in the United States and having a
combined capital and surplus of at least $50,000,000.

Miscellaneous

The preferred stock depositary will forward to holders of depositary
receipts any reports and communications that we send to the preferred stock
depositary with respect to the related preferred stock.

Neither we nor the preferred stock depositary will be liable if it is
prevented or delayed, by law or any circumstances beyond its control in
performing its obligations under the deposit agreement. Our obligations and the
preferred stock depositary's obligations under the deposit agreement will be
limited to performance in good faith and without negligence or willful
misconduct of the duties described in the deposit agreement. Neither we nor the
preferred stock depositary will be obligated to prosecute or defend any legal
proceeding relating to any depositary receipts, depositary shares or shares of
preferred stock unless satisfactory indemnity is furnished. We and the
preferred stock depositary may rely on written advice of counsel or
accountants, or information provided by persons presenting shares of preferred
stock for deposit, holders of depositary receipts or other persons believed to
be competent and authorized to this information and on documents believed to be
genuine.

If the preferred stock depositary receives conflicting claims, requests or
instructions from any holders of depositary receipts, on the one hand, and us,
on the other hand, the preferred stock depositary will be entitled to act on
the claims, requests or instructions received from us.

Description of Common Stock

We may issue, either separately or together with other securities, shares of
our common stock. Under our restated certificate of incorporation, we are
authorized to issue up to 500,000,000 shares of our common stock. A prospectus
supplement relating to an offering of common stock, or other securities
convertible or exchangeable for, or exercisable into, common stock, will
describe the relevant terms, including the number of shares offered, any
initial offering price, and market price and dividend information, as well as,
if applicable, information on other related securities. See "Description of
Outstanding Capital Stock" below.

Description of Outstanding Capital Stock

We have summarized some of the terms and provisions of our outstanding
capital stock in this section. The summary is not complete. We have also filed
our restated certificate of incorporation, our by-laws and the certificate of
designation relating to the Series A preferred stock as exhibits to our annual
report on Form 10-K. You should read our restated certificate of incorporation
and our by-laws and the certificate of designation relating to the Series A
preferred stock for additional information before you purchase any of our
capital stock.

As of January 1, 1999, our authorized capital stock was 518,500,000 shares.
Those shares consisted of:

. 500,000,000 shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share;

. 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock, par value $.01 per share; and

. 8,500,000 shares of Class R convertible common stock, par value
$.01 per share.

As of January 1, 1999 there were 307,868,632 shares of common stock, no shares
of preferred stock and no shares of Class R convertible common stock
outstanding.

Common stock

Subject to the senior rights of preferred stock which may from time to time
be outstanding, holders of common stock are entitled to receive dividends
declared by the board of directors out of funds legally available for their
payment. Upon dissolution and liquidation of our business, holders of

common stock are entitled to a ratable share of our net assets remaining after
payment to the holders of the preferred stock of the full preferential amounts
they are entitled to. All outstanding shares of common stock are fully paid and
nonassessable.

The holders of common stock are entitled to one vote per share for the
election of directors and on all other matters submitted to a vote of
stockholders. Holders of common stock are not entitled to cumulative voting
for the election of directors. They are not entitled to preemptive rights.

The transfer agent and registrar for the common stock is Norwest Bank
Minnesota, N.A.

Preferred stock

The preferred stock has priority over the common stock with respect to
dividends and to other distributions, including the distribution of assets upon
liquidation. The board of directors is authorized to fix and determine the
terms, limitations and relative rights and preferences of the preferred stock,
to establish series of preferred stock and to fix and determine the variations
as among series. The board of directors without stockholder approval could
issue preferred stock with voting and conversion rights which could adversely
affect the voting power of the holders of common stock. The board of directors
has designated 500,000 shares of Series A junior participating preferred stock.
Series A junior participating preferred stock will be issued in units
consisting of one one-thousandth of a share of Series A junior participating
preferred stock. Series A junior participating preferred stock is on a parity
with the common stock with respect to dividends and to other distributions,
including the distribution of assets on liquidation. Quarterly dividends per
unit equal the amount of the quarterly dividend paid per share of common stock,
when, as and if declared by the board of directors. The holders of units are
entitled to one vote per unit, voting together with the common stock on all
matters submitted to the stockholders. As of the date of this prospectus, there
are no outstanding shares of preferred stock.

Anti-takeover provisions

We currently have provisions in our restated certificate of incorporation
and by-laws that could have an anti-takeover effect. The provisions in the
restated certificate of incorporation include:

. a classified board of directors;

. a prohibition on our stockholders taking action by written consent;

. the requirement that special meetings of stockholders be called only by
the board of directors or the chairman of the board; and

. the requirement of the affirmative vote of at least 66-2/3% of our
outstanding shares of stock entitled to vote thereon to adopt, repeal,
alter, amend or rescind our by-laws.

The by-laws contain specific procedural requirements for the nomination of
directors and the introduction of business by a stockholder of record at an
annual meeting of stockholders where such business is not specified in the
notice of meeting or brought by or at the discretion of the board of directors.
In addition to these provisions, the board of directors has adopted a
stockholder's rights plan, under which rights were distributed in a dividend.
These rights entitle the holder to acquire units of Series A junior
participating preferred stock, which is exercisable upon the occurrence of
certain events, including the acquisition by a person or group of a specified
percentage of the common stock.

Plan of Distribution

We may sell the offered securities as follows:

. through agents;

. through underwriters;

. to dealers; or

. directly to one or more purchasers.

By agents

Offered securities may be sold through agents designated by us. Unless
otherwise indicated in a prospectus supplement, the agents will use their best
efforts to solicit purchases for the period of their appointment.

By underwriters

If underwriters are used in the sale, the offered securities will be
acquired by the underwriters for their own account. The underwriters may
resell the securities in one or more transactions, including negotiated
transactions, at a fixed public offering price or at varying prices determined
at the time of sale. The obligations of the underwriters to purchase the
securities will be subject to certain conditions. The underwriters will be
obligated to purchase all the securities of the series offered if any of the
securities are purchased. Any initial public offering price and any discounts
or concessions allowed or re-allowed or paid to dealers may be changed from
time to time.

To dealers

If a dealer is used in the sale, we will sell the offered securities to the
dealer, as principal. The dealer may then resell those securities to the
public at varying prices to be determined by the dealer at the time of resale.

Direct sales

We may also sell offered securities directly to institutional investors or
others. In this case, no underwriters or agents would be involved.

Delayed delivery contracts

We may authorize underwriters, dealers and agents to solicit offers by
certain institutional investors to purchase offered securities under contracts
providing for payment and delivery on a future date specified in the
prospectus supplement. The prospectus supplement will also describe the public
offering price for the securities and the commission payable for solicitation
of these delayed delivery contracts. Delayed delivery contracts will contain
definite fixed price and quantity terms. The obligations of a purchaser under
these delayed delivery contracts will be subject to only two conditions:

. that the institution's purchase of the securities at the time of
delivery of the securities is not prohibited under the law of any
jurisdiction to which the institution is subject; and

. that we shall have sold to the underwriters the total principal amount
of the offered securities, less the principal amount covered by the
delayed delivery contracts.

General information

Underwriters, dealers, agents and direct purchasers that participate in the
distribution of the offered securities may be underwriters as defined in the
Securities Act and any discounts or commissions they receive from us and any
profit on the resale of the offered securities by them may be treated as
underwriting discounts and commissions under the Securities Act. Any
underwriters, dealers or agents will be identified and their compensation
described in a prospectus supplement.

We may have agreements with the underwriters, dealers and agents to
indemnify them against certain civil liabilities, including liabilities under
the Securities Act, or to contribute with respect to payments which the
underwriters, dealers or agents may be required to make.

Underwriters, dealers and agents may engage in transactions with, or perform
services for, us or our subsidiaries in the ordinary course of their
businesses.

The place and time of delivery of the offered securities will be described
in the prospectus supplement.

Legal Matters

Willkie Farr & Gallagher will issue an opinion for us about the legality of
the offered securities. Any underwriters will be advised about other issues
relating to any offering by their own legal counsel.

Experts

The following financial statement, incorporated by reference in this
registration statement, have been incorporated in this registration statement
in reliance on the reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, independent
accountants, given on the authority of that firm as experts in accounting and
auditing:

. the consolidated financial statements of Level 3 Communications, Inc. as
of December 27, 1997 and December 31, 1996 and for the three years ended
December 27, 1997;

. the consolidated financial statements of RCN Corporation and
Subsidiaries as of December 31, 1997 and 1996 and for the three years
ended December 31, 1997;

. the financial statements of Kiewit Construction & Mining Group, a
business group of Peter Kiewit Sons', Inc., as of December 27, 1997 and
December 31, 1996 and for the three years ended December 27, 1997; and

. the financial statements of Diversified Group, a business group of Peter
Kiewit Sons', Inc., as of December 27, 1997 and December 31, 1996 and
for the three years ended December 27, 1997.

[ARTWORK APPEARING ON INSIDE BACK COVER OF PROSPECTUS SUPPLEMENT]

LEVEL 3 NETWORK

Level 3 Communications is building the first international end-to-end
communications network based entirely on Internet Protocol (IP) technology. To
implement this new technology, Level 3 plans to have local networks in 56
cities across the United States and 23 international cities, all interconnected
by intercity networks.

[MAP SHOWING LEVEL 3 NETWORK PLANNED OR IN DEVELOPMENT]

UPGRADEABLE NETWORK

[PICTURES SHOWING INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS]

[DIAGRAM SHOWING MULTIPLE CONDUITS IN PLACE]

Level 3 is installing multiple conduits 42" below ground in its continuously
upgradeable network. Ten to twelve 1 1/4" conduits are grouped together. Fiber
will initially be drawn through only one of the conduits, leaving the others for
future expansion as technology changes, to meet customer demand and to provide
Level 3 the flexibility to offer conduit to others.

[LOGO OF LEVEL 3]

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

No dealer, salesperson or other person is authorized to give any information
or to represent anything not contained in this prospectus. You must not rely on
any unauthorized information or representations. This prospectus is an offer to
sell only the notes offered hereby, but only under circumstances and in
jurisdictions where it is lawful to do so. The information contained in this
prospectus is current only as of its date.
---------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Prospectus Supplement

Page
-----

Prospectus Supplement Summary........................................... S-2
Risk Factors............................................................ S-11
Information Regarding Forward-Looking Statements........................ S-21
Use of Proceeds......................................................... S-22
Common Stock Price Range and
Dividends.............................................................. S-22
Capitalization.......................................................... S-23
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
of Operations.......................................................... S-24
Industry Overview....................................................... S-43
Business................................................................ S-49
Management.............................................................. S-71
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management.......... S-75
Certain Transactions and
Relationships.......................................................... S-76
Description of Other Indebtedness of Level 3............................ S-78
Description of Notes.................................................... S-81
Certain United States Tax
Considerations......................................................... S-97
Underwriting............................................................ S-104
Legal Matters........................................................... S-106
Experts................................................................. S-106
Glossary of Terms....................................................... S-107
Index to Financial Statements........................................... F-1

Prospectus

About This Prospectus................................................... 1
Where You Can Find More Information..................................... 1
Risk Factors............................................................ 1
The Company............................................................. 2
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges and
Preferred Stock Dividends.............................................. 2
Application of Proceeds................................................. 2
Description of Debt Securities.......................................... 3
Description of Preferred Stock.......................................... 12
Description of Depositary Shares........................................ 17
Description of Common Stock............................................. 20
Description of Outstanding Capital Stock................................ 20
Plan of Distribution.................................................... 22
Legal Matters........................................................... 23
Experts................................................................. 23

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

$750,000,000

Level 3 Communications, Inc.

6% Convertible
Subordinated Notes
due 2009

---------------

[LOGO OF LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, INC.]

---------------

Goldman, Sachs & Co.
Salomon Smith Barney
Chase Securities Inc.
Credit Suisse First Boston
J.P. Morgan & Co.
Morgan Stanley Dean Witter

Representatives of the Underwriters

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------